1 /* Convert tree expression to rtl instructions, for GNU compiler.
2 Copyright (C) 1988-2013 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
4 This file is part of GCC.
6 GCC is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify it under
7 the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by the Free
8 Software Foundation; either version 3, or (at your option) any later
11 GCC is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, but WITHOUT ANY
12 WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or
13 FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU General Public License
16 You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License
17 along with GCC; see the file COPYING3. If not see
18 <http://www.gnu.org/licenses/>. */
22 #include "coretypes.h"
29 #include "hard-reg-set.h"
32 #include "insn-config.h"
33 #include "insn-attr.h"
34 /* Include expr.h after insn-config.h so we get HAVE_conditional_move. */
40 #include "typeclass.h"
42 #include "langhooks.h"
45 #include "tree-iterator.h"
47 #include "gimple-ssa.h"
49 #include "tree-ssanames.h"
51 #include "common/common-target.h"
54 #include "diagnostic.h"
55 #include "tree-ssa-live.h"
56 #include "tree-outof-ssa.h"
57 #include "target-globals.h"
59 #include "tree-ssa-address.h"
61 /* Decide whether a function's arguments should be processed
62 from first to last or from last to first.
64 They should if the stack and args grow in opposite directions, but
65 only if we have push insns. */
69 #ifndef PUSH_ARGS_REVERSED
70 #if defined (STACK_GROWS_DOWNWARD) != defined (ARGS_GROW_DOWNWARD)
71 #define PUSH_ARGS_REVERSED /* If it's last to first. */
77 #ifndef STACK_PUSH_CODE
78 #ifdef STACK_GROWS_DOWNWARD
79 #define STACK_PUSH_CODE PRE_DEC
81 #define STACK_PUSH_CODE PRE_INC
86 /* If this is nonzero, we do not bother generating VOLATILE
87 around volatile memory references, and we are willing to
88 output indirect addresses. If cse is to follow, we reject
89 indirect addresses so a useful potential cse is generated;
90 if it is used only once, instruction combination will produce
91 the same indirect address eventually. */
94 /* This structure is used by move_by_pieces to describe the move to
96 struct move_by_pieces_d
105 int explicit_inc_from
;
106 unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT len
;
107 HOST_WIDE_INT offset
;
111 /* This structure is used by store_by_pieces to describe the clear to
114 struct store_by_pieces_d
120 unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT len
;
121 HOST_WIDE_INT offset
;
122 rtx (*constfun
) (void *, HOST_WIDE_INT
, enum machine_mode
);
127 static void move_by_pieces_1 (insn_gen_fn
, machine_mode
,
128 struct move_by_pieces_d
*);
129 static bool block_move_libcall_safe_for_call_parm (void);
130 static bool emit_block_move_via_movmem (rtx
, rtx
, rtx
, unsigned, unsigned, HOST_WIDE_INT
);
131 static tree
emit_block_move_libcall_fn (int);
132 static void emit_block_move_via_loop (rtx
, rtx
, rtx
, unsigned);
133 static rtx
clear_by_pieces_1 (void *, HOST_WIDE_INT
, enum machine_mode
);
134 static void clear_by_pieces (rtx
, unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT
, unsigned int);
135 static void store_by_pieces_1 (struct store_by_pieces_d
*, unsigned int);
136 static void store_by_pieces_2 (insn_gen_fn
, machine_mode
,
137 struct store_by_pieces_d
*);
138 static tree
clear_storage_libcall_fn (int);
139 static rtx
compress_float_constant (rtx
, rtx
);
140 static rtx
get_subtarget (rtx
);
141 static void store_constructor_field (rtx
, unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT
,
142 HOST_WIDE_INT
, enum machine_mode
,
143 tree
, int, alias_set_type
);
144 static void store_constructor (tree
, rtx
, int, HOST_WIDE_INT
);
145 static rtx
store_field (rtx
, HOST_WIDE_INT
, HOST_WIDE_INT
,
146 unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT
, unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT
,
147 enum machine_mode
, tree
, alias_set_type
, bool);
149 static unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT
highest_pow2_factor_for_target (const_tree
, const_tree
);
151 static int is_aligning_offset (const_tree
, const_tree
);
152 static void expand_operands (tree
, tree
, rtx
, rtx
*, rtx
*,
153 enum expand_modifier
);
154 static rtx
reduce_to_bit_field_precision (rtx
, rtx
, tree
);
155 static rtx
do_store_flag (sepops
, rtx
, enum machine_mode
);
157 static void emit_single_push_insn (enum machine_mode
, rtx
, tree
);
159 static void do_tablejump (rtx
, enum machine_mode
, rtx
, rtx
, rtx
, int);
160 static rtx
const_vector_from_tree (tree
);
161 static void write_complex_part (rtx
, rtx
, bool);
163 /* This macro is used to determine whether move_by_pieces should be called
164 to perform a structure copy. */
165 #ifndef MOVE_BY_PIECES_P
166 #define MOVE_BY_PIECES_P(SIZE, ALIGN) \
167 (move_by_pieces_ninsns (SIZE, ALIGN, MOVE_MAX_PIECES + 1) \
168 < (unsigned int) MOVE_RATIO (optimize_insn_for_speed_p ()))
171 /* This macro is used to determine whether clear_by_pieces should be
172 called to clear storage. */
173 #ifndef CLEAR_BY_PIECES_P
174 #define CLEAR_BY_PIECES_P(SIZE, ALIGN) \
175 (move_by_pieces_ninsns (SIZE, ALIGN, STORE_MAX_PIECES + 1) \
176 < (unsigned int) CLEAR_RATIO (optimize_insn_for_speed_p ()))
179 /* This macro is used to determine whether store_by_pieces should be
180 called to "memset" storage with byte values other than zero. */
181 #ifndef SET_BY_PIECES_P
182 #define SET_BY_PIECES_P(SIZE, ALIGN) \
183 (move_by_pieces_ninsns (SIZE, ALIGN, STORE_MAX_PIECES + 1) \
184 < (unsigned int) SET_RATIO (optimize_insn_for_speed_p ()))
187 /* This macro is used to determine whether store_by_pieces should be
188 called to "memcpy" storage when the source is a constant string. */
189 #ifndef STORE_BY_PIECES_P
190 #define STORE_BY_PIECES_P(SIZE, ALIGN) \
191 (move_by_pieces_ninsns (SIZE, ALIGN, STORE_MAX_PIECES + 1) \
192 < (unsigned int) MOVE_RATIO (optimize_insn_for_speed_p ()))
195 /* This is run to set up which modes can be used
196 directly in memory and to initialize the block move optab. It is run
197 at the beginning of compilation and when the target is reinitialized. */
200 init_expr_target (void)
203 enum machine_mode mode
;
208 /* Try indexing by frame ptr and try by stack ptr.
209 It is known that on the Convex the stack ptr isn't a valid index.
210 With luck, one or the other is valid on any machine. */
211 mem
= gen_rtx_MEM (VOIDmode
, stack_pointer_rtx
);
212 mem1
= gen_rtx_MEM (VOIDmode
, frame_pointer_rtx
);
214 /* A scratch register we can modify in-place below to avoid
215 useless RTL allocations. */
216 reg
= gen_rtx_REG (VOIDmode
, -1);
218 insn
= rtx_alloc (INSN
);
219 pat
= gen_rtx_SET (VOIDmode
, NULL_RTX
, NULL_RTX
);
220 PATTERN (insn
) = pat
;
222 for (mode
= VOIDmode
; (int) mode
< NUM_MACHINE_MODES
;
223 mode
= (enum machine_mode
) ((int) mode
+ 1))
227 direct_load
[(int) mode
] = direct_store
[(int) mode
] = 0;
228 PUT_MODE (mem
, mode
);
229 PUT_MODE (mem1
, mode
);
230 PUT_MODE (reg
, mode
);
232 /* See if there is some register that can be used in this mode and
233 directly loaded or stored from memory. */
235 if (mode
!= VOIDmode
&& mode
!= BLKmode
)
236 for (regno
= 0; regno
< FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER
237 && (direct_load
[(int) mode
] == 0 || direct_store
[(int) mode
] == 0);
240 if (! HARD_REGNO_MODE_OK (regno
, mode
))
243 SET_REGNO (reg
, regno
);
246 SET_DEST (pat
) = reg
;
247 if (recog (pat
, insn
, &num_clobbers
) >= 0)
248 direct_load
[(int) mode
] = 1;
250 SET_SRC (pat
) = mem1
;
251 SET_DEST (pat
) = reg
;
252 if (recog (pat
, insn
, &num_clobbers
) >= 0)
253 direct_load
[(int) mode
] = 1;
256 SET_DEST (pat
) = mem
;
257 if (recog (pat
, insn
, &num_clobbers
) >= 0)
258 direct_store
[(int) mode
] = 1;
261 SET_DEST (pat
) = mem1
;
262 if (recog (pat
, insn
, &num_clobbers
) >= 0)
263 direct_store
[(int) mode
] = 1;
267 mem
= gen_rtx_MEM (VOIDmode
, gen_rtx_raw_REG (Pmode
, 10000));
269 for (mode
= GET_CLASS_NARROWEST_MODE (MODE_FLOAT
); mode
!= VOIDmode
;
270 mode
= GET_MODE_WIDER_MODE (mode
))
272 enum machine_mode srcmode
;
273 for (srcmode
= GET_CLASS_NARROWEST_MODE (MODE_FLOAT
); srcmode
!= mode
;
274 srcmode
= GET_MODE_WIDER_MODE (srcmode
))
278 ic
= can_extend_p (mode
, srcmode
, 0);
279 if (ic
== CODE_FOR_nothing
)
282 PUT_MODE (mem
, srcmode
);
284 if (insn_operand_matches (ic
, 1, mem
))
285 float_extend_from_mem
[mode
][srcmode
] = true;
290 /* This is run at the start of compiling a function. */
295 memset (&crtl
->expr
, 0, sizeof (crtl
->expr
));
298 /* Copy data from FROM to TO, where the machine modes are not the same.
299 Both modes may be integer, or both may be floating, or both may be
301 UNSIGNEDP should be nonzero if FROM is an unsigned type.
302 This causes zero-extension instead of sign-extension. */
305 convert_move (rtx to
, rtx from
, int unsignedp
)
307 enum machine_mode to_mode
= GET_MODE (to
);
308 enum machine_mode from_mode
= GET_MODE (from
);
309 int to_real
= SCALAR_FLOAT_MODE_P (to_mode
);
310 int from_real
= SCALAR_FLOAT_MODE_P (from_mode
);
314 /* rtx code for making an equivalent value. */
315 enum rtx_code equiv_code
= (unsignedp
< 0 ? UNKNOWN
316 : (unsignedp
? ZERO_EXTEND
: SIGN_EXTEND
));
319 gcc_assert (to_real
== from_real
);
320 gcc_assert (to_mode
!= BLKmode
);
321 gcc_assert (from_mode
!= BLKmode
);
323 /* If the source and destination are already the same, then there's
328 /* If FROM is a SUBREG that indicates that we have already done at least
329 the required extension, strip it. We don't handle such SUBREGs as
332 if (GET_CODE (from
) == SUBREG
&& SUBREG_PROMOTED_VAR_P (from
)
333 && (GET_MODE_PRECISION (GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (from
)))
334 >= GET_MODE_PRECISION (to_mode
))
335 && SUBREG_PROMOTED_UNSIGNED_P (from
) == unsignedp
)
336 from
= gen_lowpart (to_mode
, from
), from_mode
= to_mode
;
338 gcc_assert (GET_CODE (to
) != SUBREG
|| !SUBREG_PROMOTED_VAR_P (to
));
340 if (to_mode
== from_mode
341 || (from_mode
== VOIDmode
&& CONSTANT_P (from
)))
343 emit_move_insn (to
, from
);
347 if (VECTOR_MODE_P (to_mode
) || VECTOR_MODE_P (from_mode
))
349 gcc_assert (GET_MODE_BITSIZE (from_mode
) == GET_MODE_BITSIZE (to_mode
));
351 if (VECTOR_MODE_P (to_mode
))
352 from
= simplify_gen_subreg (to_mode
, from
, GET_MODE (from
), 0);
354 to
= simplify_gen_subreg (from_mode
, to
, GET_MODE (to
), 0);
356 emit_move_insn (to
, from
);
360 if (GET_CODE (to
) == CONCAT
&& GET_CODE (from
) == CONCAT
)
362 convert_move (XEXP (to
, 0), XEXP (from
, 0), unsignedp
);
363 convert_move (XEXP (to
, 1), XEXP (from
, 1), unsignedp
);
372 gcc_assert ((GET_MODE_PRECISION (from_mode
)
373 != GET_MODE_PRECISION (to_mode
))
374 || (DECIMAL_FLOAT_MODE_P (from_mode
)
375 != DECIMAL_FLOAT_MODE_P (to_mode
)));
377 if (GET_MODE_PRECISION (from_mode
) == GET_MODE_PRECISION (to_mode
))
378 /* Conversion between decimal float and binary float, same size. */
379 tab
= DECIMAL_FLOAT_MODE_P (from_mode
) ? trunc_optab
: sext_optab
;
380 else if (GET_MODE_PRECISION (from_mode
) < GET_MODE_PRECISION (to_mode
))
385 /* Try converting directly if the insn is supported. */
387 code
= convert_optab_handler (tab
, to_mode
, from_mode
);
388 if (code
!= CODE_FOR_nothing
)
390 emit_unop_insn (code
, to
, from
,
391 tab
== sext_optab
? FLOAT_EXTEND
: FLOAT_TRUNCATE
);
395 /* Otherwise use a libcall. */
396 libcall
= convert_optab_libfunc (tab
, to_mode
, from_mode
);
398 /* Is this conversion implemented yet? */
399 gcc_assert (libcall
);
402 value
= emit_library_call_value (libcall
, NULL_RTX
, LCT_CONST
, to_mode
,
404 insns
= get_insns ();
406 emit_libcall_block (insns
, to
, value
,
407 tab
== trunc_optab
? gen_rtx_FLOAT_TRUNCATE (to_mode
,
409 : gen_rtx_FLOAT_EXTEND (to_mode
, from
));
413 /* Handle pointer conversion. */ /* SPEE 900220. */
414 /* Targets are expected to provide conversion insns between PxImode and
415 xImode for all MODE_PARTIAL_INT modes they use, but no others. */
416 if (GET_MODE_CLASS (to_mode
) == MODE_PARTIAL_INT
)
418 enum machine_mode full_mode
419 = smallest_mode_for_size (GET_MODE_BITSIZE (to_mode
), MODE_INT
);
421 gcc_assert (convert_optab_handler (trunc_optab
, to_mode
, full_mode
)
422 != CODE_FOR_nothing
);
424 if (full_mode
!= from_mode
)
425 from
= convert_to_mode (full_mode
, from
, unsignedp
);
426 emit_unop_insn (convert_optab_handler (trunc_optab
, to_mode
, full_mode
),
430 if (GET_MODE_CLASS (from_mode
) == MODE_PARTIAL_INT
)
433 enum machine_mode full_mode
434 = smallest_mode_for_size (GET_MODE_BITSIZE (from_mode
), MODE_INT
);
435 convert_optab ctab
= unsignedp
? zext_optab
: sext_optab
;
436 enum insn_code icode
;
438 icode
= convert_optab_handler (ctab
, full_mode
, from_mode
);
439 gcc_assert (icode
!= CODE_FOR_nothing
);
441 if (to_mode
== full_mode
)
443 emit_unop_insn (icode
, to
, from
, UNKNOWN
);
447 new_from
= gen_reg_rtx (full_mode
);
448 emit_unop_insn (icode
, new_from
, from
, UNKNOWN
);
450 /* else proceed to integer conversions below. */
451 from_mode
= full_mode
;
455 /* Make sure both are fixed-point modes or both are not. */
456 gcc_assert (ALL_SCALAR_FIXED_POINT_MODE_P (from_mode
) ==
457 ALL_SCALAR_FIXED_POINT_MODE_P (to_mode
));
458 if (ALL_SCALAR_FIXED_POINT_MODE_P (from_mode
))
460 /* If we widen from_mode to to_mode and they are in the same class,
461 we won't saturate the result.
462 Otherwise, always saturate the result to play safe. */
463 if (GET_MODE_CLASS (from_mode
) == GET_MODE_CLASS (to_mode
)
464 && GET_MODE_SIZE (from_mode
) < GET_MODE_SIZE (to_mode
))
465 expand_fixed_convert (to
, from
, 0, 0);
467 expand_fixed_convert (to
, from
, 0, 1);
471 /* Now both modes are integers. */
473 /* Handle expanding beyond a word. */
474 if (GET_MODE_PRECISION (from_mode
) < GET_MODE_PRECISION (to_mode
)
475 && GET_MODE_PRECISION (to_mode
) > BITS_PER_WORD
)
482 enum machine_mode lowpart_mode
;
483 int nwords
= CEIL (GET_MODE_SIZE (to_mode
), UNITS_PER_WORD
);
485 /* Try converting directly if the insn is supported. */
486 if ((code
= can_extend_p (to_mode
, from_mode
, unsignedp
))
489 /* If FROM is a SUBREG, put it into a register. Do this
490 so that we always generate the same set of insns for
491 better cse'ing; if an intermediate assignment occurred,
492 we won't be doing the operation directly on the SUBREG. */
493 if (optimize
> 0 && GET_CODE (from
) == SUBREG
)
494 from
= force_reg (from_mode
, from
);
495 emit_unop_insn (code
, to
, from
, equiv_code
);
498 /* Next, try converting via full word. */
499 else if (GET_MODE_PRECISION (from_mode
) < BITS_PER_WORD
500 && ((code
= can_extend_p (to_mode
, word_mode
, unsignedp
))
501 != CODE_FOR_nothing
))
503 rtx word_to
= gen_reg_rtx (word_mode
);
506 if (reg_overlap_mentioned_p (to
, from
))
507 from
= force_reg (from_mode
, from
);
510 convert_move (word_to
, from
, unsignedp
);
511 emit_unop_insn (code
, to
, word_to
, equiv_code
);
515 /* No special multiword conversion insn; do it by hand. */
518 /* Since we will turn this into a no conflict block, we must ensure the
519 the source does not overlap the target so force it into an isolated
520 register when maybe so. Likewise for any MEM input, since the
521 conversion sequence might require several references to it and we
522 must ensure we're getting the same value every time. */
524 if (MEM_P (from
) || reg_overlap_mentioned_p (to
, from
))
525 from
= force_reg (from_mode
, from
);
527 /* Get a copy of FROM widened to a word, if necessary. */
528 if (GET_MODE_PRECISION (from_mode
) < BITS_PER_WORD
)
529 lowpart_mode
= word_mode
;
531 lowpart_mode
= from_mode
;
533 lowfrom
= convert_to_mode (lowpart_mode
, from
, unsignedp
);
535 lowpart
= gen_lowpart (lowpart_mode
, to
);
536 emit_move_insn (lowpart
, lowfrom
);
538 /* Compute the value to put in each remaining word. */
540 fill_value
= const0_rtx
;
542 fill_value
= emit_store_flag (gen_reg_rtx (word_mode
),
543 LT
, lowfrom
, const0_rtx
,
546 /* Fill the remaining words. */
547 for (i
= GET_MODE_SIZE (lowpart_mode
) / UNITS_PER_WORD
; i
< nwords
; i
++)
549 int index
= (WORDS_BIG_ENDIAN
? nwords
- i
- 1 : i
);
550 rtx subword
= operand_subword (to
, index
, 1, to_mode
);
552 gcc_assert (subword
);
554 if (fill_value
!= subword
)
555 emit_move_insn (subword
, fill_value
);
558 insns
= get_insns ();
565 /* Truncating multi-word to a word or less. */
566 if (GET_MODE_PRECISION (from_mode
) > BITS_PER_WORD
567 && GET_MODE_PRECISION (to_mode
) <= BITS_PER_WORD
)
570 && ! MEM_VOLATILE_P (from
)
571 && direct_load
[(int) to_mode
]
572 && ! mode_dependent_address_p (XEXP (from
, 0),
573 MEM_ADDR_SPACE (from
)))
575 || GET_CODE (from
) == SUBREG
))
576 from
= force_reg (from_mode
, from
);
577 convert_move (to
, gen_lowpart (word_mode
, from
), 0);
581 /* Now follow all the conversions between integers
582 no more than a word long. */
584 /* For truncation, usually we can just refer to FROM in a narrower mode. */
585 if (GET_MODE_BITSIZE (to_mode
) < GET_MODE_BITSIZE (from_mode
)
586 && TRULY_NOOP_TRUNCATION_MODES_P (to_mode
, from_mode
))
589 && ! MEM_VOLATILE_P (from
)
590 && direct_load
[(int) to_mode
]
591 && ! mode_dependent_address_p (XEXP (from
, 0),
592 MEM_ADDR_SPACE (from
)))
594 || GET_CODE (from
) == SUBREG
))
595 from
= force_reg (from_mode
, from
);
596 if (REG_P (from
) && REGNO (from
) < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER
597 && ! HARD_REGNO_MODE_OK (REGNO (from
), to_mode
))
598 from
= copy_to_reg (from
);
599 emit_move_insn (to
, gen_lowpart (to_mode
, from
));
603 /* Handle extension. */
604 if (GET_MODE_PRECISION (to_mode
) > GET_MODE_PRECISION (from_mode
))
606 /* Convert directly if that works. */
607 if ((code
= can_extend_p (to_mode
, from_mode
, unsignedp
))
610 emit_unop_insn (code
, to
, from
, equiv_code
);
615 enum machine_mode intermediate
;
619 /* Search for a mode to convert via. */
620 for (intermediate
= from_mode
; intermediate
!= VOIDmode
;
621 intermediate
= GET_MODE_WIDER_MODE (intermediate
))
622 if (((can_extend_p (to_mode
, intermediate
, unsignedp
)
624 || (GET_MODE_SIZE (to_mode
) < GET_MODE_SIZE (intermediate
)
625 && TRULY_NOOP_TRUNCATION_MODES_P (to_mode
, intermediate
)))
626 && (can_extend_p (intermediate
, from_mode
, unsignedp
)
627 != CODE_FOR_nothing
))
629 convert_move (to
, convert_to_mode (intermediate
, from
,
630 unsignedp
), unsignedp
);
634 /* No suitable intermediate mode.
635 Generate what we need with shifts. */
636 shift_amount
= (GET_MODE_PRECISION (to_mode
)
637 - GET_MODE_PRECISION (from_mode
));
638 from
= gen_lowpart (to_mode
, force_reg (from_mode
, from
));
639 tmp
= expand_shift (LSHIFT_EXPR
, to_mode
, from
, shift_amount
,
641 tmp
= expand_shift (RSHIFT_EXPR
, to_mode
, tmp
, shift_amount
,
644 emit_move_insn (to
, tmp
);
649 /* Support special truncate insns for certain modes. */
650 if (convert_optab_handler (trunc_optab
, to_mode
,
651 from_mode
) != CODE_FOR_nothing
)
653 emit_unop_insn (convert_optab_handler (trunc_optab
, to_mode
, from_mode
),
658 /* Handle truncation of volatile memrefs, and so on;
659 the things that couldn't be truncated directly,
660 and for which there was no special instruction.
662 ??? Code above formerly short-circuited this, for most integer
663 mode pairs, with a force_reg in from_mode followed by a recursive
664 call to this routine. Appears always to have been wrong. */
665 if (GET_MODE_PRECISION (to_mode
) < GET_MODE_PRECISION (from_mode
))
667 rtx temp
= force_reg (to_mode
, gen_lowpart (to_mode
, from
));
668 emit_move_insn (to
, temp
);
672 /* Mode combination is not recognized. */
676 /* Return an rtx for a value that would result
677 from converting X to mode MODE.
678 Both X and MODE may be floating, or both integer.
679 UNSIGNEDP is nonzero if X is an unsigned value.
680 This can be done by referring to a part of X in place
681 or by copying to a new temporary with conversion. */
684 convert_to_mode (enum machine_mode mode
, rtx x
, int unsignedp
)
686 return convert_modes (mode
, VOIDmode
, x
, unsignedp
);
689 /* Return an rtx for a value that would result
690 from converting X from mode OLDMODE to mode MODE.
691 Both modes may be floating, or both integer.
692 UNSIGNEDP is nonzero if X is an unsigned value.
694 This can be done by referring to a part of X in place
695 or by copying to a new temporary with conversion.
697 You can give VOIDmode for OLDMODE, if you are sure X has a nonvoid mode. */
700 convert_modes (enum machine_mode mode
, enum machine_mode oldmode
, rtx x
, int unsignedp
)
704 /* If FROM is a SUBREG that indicates that we have already done at least
705 the required extension, strip it. */
707 if (GET_CODE (x
) == SUBREG
&& SUBREG_PROMOTED_VAR_P (x
)
708 && GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (x
))) >= GET_MODE_SIZE (mode
)
709 && SUBREG_PROMOTED_UNSIGNED_P (x
) == unsignedp
)
710 x
= gen_lowpart (mode
, x
);
712 if (GET_MODE (x
) != VOIDmode
)
713 oldmode
= GET_MODE (x
);
718 /* There is one case that we must handle specially: If we are converting
719 a CONST_INT into a mode whose size is twice HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT and
720 we are to interpret the constant as unsigned, gen_lowpart will do
721 the wrong if the constant appears negative. What we want to do is
722 make the high-order word of the constant zero, not all ones. */
724 if (unsignedp
&& GET_MODE_CLASS (mode
) == MODE_INT
725 && GET_MODE_BITSIZE (mode
) == HOST_BITS_PER_DOUBLE_INT
726 && CONST_INT_P (x
) && INTVAL (x
) < 0)
728 double_int val
= double_int::from_uhwi (INTVAL (x
));
730 /* We need to zero extend VAL. */
731 if (oldmode
!= VOIDmode
)
732 val
= val
.zext (GET_MODE_BITSIZE (oldmode
));
734 return immed_double_int_const (val
, mode
);
737 /* We can do this with a gen_lowpart if both desired and current modes
738 are integer, and this is either a constant integer, a register, or a
739 non-volatile MEM. Except for the constant case where MODE is no
740 wider than HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT, we must be narrowing the operand. */
743 && GET_MODE_PRECISION (mode
) <= HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT
)
744 || (GET_MODE_CLASS (mode
) == MODE_INT
745 && GET_MODE_CLASS (oldmode
) == MODE_INT
746 && (CONST_DOUBLE_AS_INT_P (x
)
747 || (GET_MODE_PRECISION (mode
) <= GET_MODE_PRECISION (oldmode
)
748 && ((MEM_P (x
) && ! MEM_VOLATILE_P (x
)
749 && direct_load
[(int) mode
])
751 && (! HARD_REGISTER_P (x
)
752 || HARD_REGNO_MODE_OK (REGNO (x
), mode
))
753 && TRULY_NOOP_TRUNCATION_MODES_P (mode
,
756 /* ?? If we don't know OLDMODE, we have to assume here that
757 X does not need sign- or zero-extension. This may not be
758 the case, but it's the best we can do. */
759 if (CONST_INT_P (x
) && oldmode
!= VOIDmode
760 && GET_MODE_PRECISION (mode
) > GET_MODE_PRECISION (oldmode
))
762 HOST_WIDE_INT val
= INTVAL (x
);
764 /* We must sign or zero-extend in this case. Start by
765 zero-extending, then sign extend if we need to. */
766 val
&= GET_MODE_MASK (oldmode
);
768 && val_signbit_known_set_p (oldmode
, val
))
769 val
|= ~GET_MODE_MASK (oldmode
);
771 return gen_int_mode (val
, mode
);
774 return gen_lowpart (mode
, x
);
777 /* Converting from integer constant into mode is always equivalent to an
779 if (VECTOR_MODE_P (mode
) && GET_MODE (x
) == VOIDmode
)
781 gcc_assert (GET_MODE_BITSIZE (mode
) == GET_MODE_BITSIZE (oldmode
));
782 return simplify_gen_subreg (mode
, x
, oldmode
, 0);
785 temp
= gen_reg_rtx (mode
);
786 convert_move (temp
, x
, unsignedp
);
790 /* Return the largest alignment we can use for doing a move (or store)
791 of MAX_PIECES. ALIGN is the largest alignment we could use. */
794 alignment_for_piecewise_move (unsigned int max_pieces
, unsigned int align
)
796 enum machine_mode tmode
;
798 tmode
= mode_for_size (max_pieces
* BITS_PER_UNIT
, MODE_INT
, 1);
799 if (align
>= GET_MODE_ALIGNMENT (tmode
))
800 align
= GET_MODE_ALIGNMENT (tmode
);
803 enum machine_mode tmode
, xmode
;
805 for (tmode
= GET_CLASS_NARROWEST_MODE (MODE_INT
), xmode
= tmode
;
807 xmode
= tmode
, tmode
= GET_MODE_WIDER_MODE (tmode
))
808 if (GET_MODE_SIZE (tmode
) > max_pieces
809 || SLOW_UNALIGNED_ACCESS (tmode
, align
))
812 align
= MAX (align
, GET_MODE_ALIGNMENT (xmode
));
818 /* Return the widest integer mode no wider than SIZE. If no such mode
819 can be found, return VOIDmode. */
821 static enum machine_mode
822 widest_int_mode_for_size (unsigned int size
)
824 enum machine_mode tmode
, mode
= VOIDmode
;
826 for (tmode
= GET_CLASS_NARROWEST_MODE (MODE_INT
);
827 tmode
!= VOIDmode
; tmode
= GET_MODE_WIDER_MODE (tmode
))
828 if (GET_MODE_SIZE (tmode
) < size
)
834 /* STORE_MAX_PIECES is the number of bytes at a time that we can
835 store efficiently. Due to internal GCC limitations, this is
836 MOVE_MAX_PIECES limited by the number of bytes GCC can represent
837 for an immediate constant. */
839 #define STORE_MAX_PIECES MIN (MOVE_MAX_PIECES, 2 * sizeof (HOST_WIDE_INT))
841 /* Determine whether the LEN bytes can be moved by using several move
842 instructions. Return nonzero if a call to move_by_pieces should
846 can_move_by_pieces (unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT len ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED
,
847 unsigned int align ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED
)
849 return MOVE_BY_PIECES_P (len
, align
);
852 /* Generate several move instructions to copy LEN bytes from block FROM to
853 block TO. (These are MEM rtx's with BLKmode).
855 If PUSH_ROUNDING is defined and TO is NULL, emit_single_push_insn is
856 used to push FROM to the stack.
858 ALIGN is maximum stack alignment we can assume.
860 If ENDP is 0 return to, if ENDP is 1 return memory at the end ala
861 mempcpy, and if ENDP is 2 return memory the end minus one byte ala
865 move_by_pieces (rtx to
, rtx from
, unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT len
,
866 unsigned int align
, int endp
)
868 struct move_by_pieces_d data
;
869 enum machine_mode to_addr_mode
;
870 enum machine_mode from_addr_mode
= get_address_mode (from
);
871 rtx to_addr
, from_addr
= XEXP (from
, 0);
872 unsigned int max_size
= MOVE_MAX_PIECES
+ 1;
873 enum insn_code icode
;
875 align
= MIN (to
? MEM_ALIGN (to
) : align
, MEM_ALIGN (from
));
878 data
.from_addr
= from_addr
;
881 to_addr_mode
= get_address_mode (to
);
882 to_addr
= XEXP (to
, 0);
885 = (GET_CODE (to_addr
) == PRE_INC
|| GET_CODE (to_addr
) == PRE_DEC
886 || GET_CODE (to_addr
) == POST_INC
|| GET_CODE (to_addr
) == POST_DEC
);
888 = (GET_CODE (to_addr
) == PRE_DEC
|| GET_CODE (to_addr
) == POST_DEC
);
892 to_addr_mode
= VOIDmode
;
896 #ifdef STACK_GROWS_DOWNWARD
902 data
.to_addr
= to_addr
;
905 = (GET_CODE (from_addr
) == PRE_INC
|| GET_CODE (from_addr
) == PRE_DEC
906 || GET_CODE (from_addr
) == POST_INC
907 || GET_CODE (from_addr
) == POST_DEC
);
909 data
.explicit_inc_from
= 0;
910 data
.explicit_inc_to
= 0;
911 if (data
.reverse
) data
.offset
= len
;
914 /* If copying requires more than two move insns,
915 copy addresses to registers (to make displacements shorter)
916 and use post-increment if available. */
917 if (!(data
.autinc_from
&& data
.autinc_to
)
918 && move_by_pieces_ninsns (len
, align
, max_size
) > 2)
920 /* Find the mode of the largest move...
921 MODE might not be used depending on the definitions of the
922 USE_* macros below. */
923 enum machine_mode mode ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED
924 = widest_int_mode_for_size (max_size
);
926 if (USE_LOAD_PRE_DECREMENT (mode
) && data
.reverse
&& ! data
.autinc_from
)
928 data
.from_addr
= copy_to_mode_reg (from_addr_mode
,
929 plus_constant (from_addr_mode
,
931 data
.autinc_from
= 1;
932 data
.explicit_inc_from
= -1;
934 if (USE_LOAD_POST_INCREMENT (mode
) && ! data
.autinc_from
)
936 data
.from_addr
= copy_to_mode_reg (from_addr_mode
, from_addr
);
937 data
.autinc_from
= 1;
938 data
.explicit_inc_from
= 1;
940 if (!data
.autinc_from
&& CONSTANT_P (from_addr
))
941 data
.from_addr
= copy_to_mode_reg (from_addr_mode
, from_addr
);
942 if (USE_STORE_PRE_DECREMENT (mode
) && data
.reverse
&& ! data
.autinc_to
)
944 data
.to_addr
= copy_to_mode_reg (to_addr_mode
,
945 plus_constant (to_addr_mode
,
948 data
.explicit_inc_to
= -1;
950 if (USE_STORE_POST_INCREMENT (mode
) && ! data
.reverse
&& ! data
.autinc_to
)
952 data
.to_addr
= copy_to_mode_reg (to_addr_mode
, to_addr
);
954 data
.explicit_inc_to
= 1;
956 if (!data
.autinc_to
&& CONSTANT_P (to_addr
))
957 data
.to_addr
= copy_to_mode_reg (to_addr_mode
, to_addr
);
960 align
= alignment_for_piecewise_move (MOVE_MAX_PIECES
, align
);
962 /* First move what we can in the largest integer mode, then go to
963 successively smaller modes. */
965 while (max_size
> 1 && data
.len
> 0)
967 enum machine_mode mode
= widest_int_mode_for_size (max_size
);
969 if (mode
== VOIDmode
)
972 icode
= optab_handler (mov_optab
, mode
);
973 if (icode
!= CODE_FOR_nothing
&& align
>= GET_MODE_ALIGNMENT (mode
))
974 move_by_pieces_1 (GEN_FCN (icode
), mode
, &data
);
976 max_size
= GET_MODE_SIZE (mode
);
979 /* The code above should have handled everything. */
980 gcc_assert (!data
.len
);
986 gcc_assert (!data
.reverse
);
991 if (HAVE_POST_INCREMENT
&& data
.explicit_inc_to
> 0)
992 emit_insn (gen_add2_insn (data
.to_addr
, constm1_rtx
));
994 data
.to_addr
= copy_to_mode_reg (to_addr_mode
,
995 plus_constant (to_addr_mode
,
999 to1
= adjust_automodify_address (data
.to
, QImode
, data
.to_addr
,
1006 to1
= adjust_address (data
.to
, QImode
, data
.offset
);
1014 /* Return number of insns required to move L bytes by pieces.
1015 ALIGN (in bits) is maximum alignment we can assume. */
1017 unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT
1018 move_by_pieces_ninsns (unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT l
, unsigned int align
,
1019 unsigned int max_size
)
1021 unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT n_insns
= 0;
1023 align
= alignment_for_piecewise_move (MOVE_MAX_PIECES
, align
);
1025 while (max_size
> 1 && l
> 0)
1027 enum machine_mode mode
;
1028 enum insn_code icode
;
1030 mode
= widest_int_mode_for_size (max_size
);
1032 if (mode
== VOIDmode
)
1035 icode
= optab_handler (mov_optab
, mode
);
1036 if (icode
!= CODE_FOR_nothing
&& align
>= GET_MODE_ALIGNMENT (mode
))
1037 n_insns
+= l
/ GET_MODE_SIZE (mode
), l
%= GET_MODE_SIZE (mode
);
1039 max_size
= GET_MODE_SIZE (mode
);
1046 /* Subroutine of move_by_pieces. Move as many bytes as appropriate
1047 with move instructions for mode MODE. GENFUN is the gen_... function
1048 to make a move insn for that mode. DATA has all the other info. */
1051 move_by_pieces_1 (insn_gen_fn genfun
, machine_mode mode
,
1052 struct move_by_pieces_d
*data
)
1054 unsigned int size
= GET_MODE_SIZE (mode
);
1055 rtx to1
= NULL_RTX
, from1
;
1057 while (data
->len
>= size
)
1060 data
->offset
-= size
;
1064 if (data
->autinc_to
)
1065 to1
= adjust_automodify_address (data
->to
, mode
, data
->to_addr
,
1068 to1
= adjust_address (data
->to
, mode
, data
->offset
);
1071 if (data
->autinc_from
)
1072 from1
= adjust_automodify_address (data
->from
, mode
, data
->from_addr
,
1075 from1
= adjust_address (data
->from
, mode
, data
->offset
);
1077 if (HAVE_PRE_DECREMENT
&& data
->explicit_inc_to
< 0)
1078 emit_insn (gen_add2_insn (data
->to_addr
,
1079 gen_int_mode (-(HOST_WIDE_INT
) size
,
1080 GET_MODE (data
->to_addr
))));
1081 if (HAVE_PRE_DECREMENT
&& data
->explicit_inc_from
< 0)
1082 emit_insn (gen_add2_insn (data
->from_addr
,
1083 gen_int_mode (-(HOST_WIDE_INT
) size
,
1084 GET_MODE (data
->from_addr
))));
1087 emit_insn ((*genfun
) (to1
, from1
));
1090 #ifdef PUSH_ROUNDING
1091 emit_single_push_insn (mode
, from1
, NULL
);
1097 if (HAVE_POST_INCREMENT
&& data
->explicit_inc_to
> 0)
1098 emit_insn (gen_add2_insn (data
->to_addr
,
1100 GET_MODE (data
->to_addr
))));
1101 if (HAVE_POST_INCREMENT
&& data
->explicit_inc_from
> 0)
1102 emit_insn (gen_add2_insn (data
->from_addr
,
1104 GET_MODE (data
->from_addr
))));
1106 if (! data
->reverse
)
1107 data
->offset
+= size
;
1113 /* Emit code to move a block Y to a block X. This may be done with
1114 string-move instructions, with multiple scalar move instructions,
1115 or with a library call.
1117 Both X and Y must be MEM rtx's (perhaps inside VOLATILE) with mode BLKmode.
1118 SIZE is an rtx that says how long they are.
1119 ALIGN is the maximum alignment we can assume they have.
1120 METHOD describes what kind of copy this is, and what mechanisms may be used.
1122 Return the address of the new block, if memcpy is called and returns it,
1126 emit_block_move_hints (rtx x
, rtx y
, rtx size
, enum block_op_methods method
,
1127 unsigned int expected_align
, HOST_WIDE_INT expected_size
)
1134 if (CONST_INT_P (size
)
1135 && INTVAL (size
) == 0)
1140 case BLOCK_OP_NORMAL
:
1141 case BLOCK_OP_TAILCALL
:
1142 may_use_call
= true;
1145 case BLOCK_OP_CALL_PARM
:
1146 may_use_call
= block_move_libcall_safe_for_call_parm ();
1148 /* Make inhibit_defer_pop nonzero around the library call
1149 to force it to pop the arguments right away. */
1153 case BLOCK_OP_NO_LIBCALL
:
1154 may_use_call
= false;
1161 gcc_assert (MEM_P (x
) && MEM_P (y
));
1162 align
= MIN (MEM_ALIGN (x
), MEM_ALIGN (y
));
1163 gcc_assert (align
>= BITS_PER_UNIT
);
1165 /* Make sure we've got BLKmode addresses; store_one_arg can decide that
1166 block copy is more efficient for other large modes, e.g. DCmode. */
1167 x
= adjust_address (x
, BLKmode
, 0);
1168 y
= adjust_address (y
, BLKmode
, 0);
1170 /* Set MEM_SIZE as appropriate for this block copy. The main place this
1171 can be incorrect is coming from __builtin_memcpy. */
1172 if (CONST_INT_P (size
))
1174 x
= shallow_copy_rtx (x
);
1175 y
= shallow_copy_rtx (y
);
1176 set_mem_size (x
, INTVAL (size
));
1177 set_mem_size (y
, INTVAL (size
));
1180 if (CONST_INT_P (size
) && MOVE_BY_PIECES_P (INTVAL (size
), align
))
1181 move_by_pieces (x
, y
, INTVAL (size
), align
, 0);
1182 else if (emit_block_move_via_movmem (x
, y
, size
, align
,
1183 expected_align
, expected_size
))
1185 else if (may_use_call
1186 && ADDR_SPACE_GENERIC_P (MEM_ADDR_SPACE (x
))
1187 && ADDR_SPACE_GENERIC_P (MEM_ADDR_SPACE (y
)))
1189 /* Since x and y are passed to a libcall, mark the corresponding
1190 tree EXPR as addressable. */
1191 tree y_expr
= MEM_EXPR (y
);
1192 tree x_expr
= MEM_EXPR (x
);
1194 mark_addressable (y_expr
);
1196 mark_addressable (x_expr
);
1197 retval
= emit_block_move_via_libcall (x
, y
, size
,
1198 method
== BLOCK_OP_TAILCALL
);
1202 emit_block_move_via_loop (x
, y
, size
, align
);
1204 if (method
== BLOCK_OP_CALL_PARM
)
1211 emit_block_move (rtx x
, rtx y
, rtx size
, enum block_op_methods method
)
1213 return emit_block_move_hints (x
, y
, size
, method
, 0, -1);
1216 /* A subroutine of emit_block_move. Returns true if calling the
1217 block move libcall will not clobber any parameters which may have
1218 already been placed on the stack. */
1221 block_move_libcall_safe_for_call_parm (void)
1223 #if defined (REG_PARM_STACK_SPACE)
1227 /* If arguments are pushed on the stack, then they're safe. */
1231 /* If registers go on the stack anyway, any argument is sure to clobber
1232 an outgoing argument. */
1233 #if defined (REG_PARM_STACK_SPACE)
1234 fn
= emit_block_move_libcall_fn (false);
1235 /* Avoid set but not used warning if *REG_PARM_STACK_SPACE doesn't
1236 depend on its argument. */
1238 if (OUTGOING_REG_PARM_STACK_SPACE ((!fn
? NULL_TREE
: TREE_TYPE (fn
)))
1239 && REG_PARM_STACK_SPACE (fn
) != 0)
1243 /* If any argument goes in memory, then it might clobber an outgoing
1246 CUMULATIVE_ARGS args_so_far_v
;
1247 cumulative_args_t args_so_far
;
1250 fn
= emit_block_move_libcall_fn (false);
1251 INIT_CUMULATIVE_ARGS (args_so_far_v
, TREE_TYPE (fn
), NULL_RTX
, 0, 3);
1252 args_so_far
= pack_cumulative_args (&args_so_far_v
);
1254 arg
= TYPE_ARG_TYPES (TREE_TYPE (fn
));
1255 for ( ; arg
!= void_list_node
; arg
= TREE_CHAIN (arg
))
1257 enum machine_mode mode
= TYPE_MODE (TREE_VALUE (arg
));
1258 rtx tmp
= targetm
.calls
.function_arg (args_so_far
, mode
,
1260 if (!tmp
|| !REG_P (tmp
))
1262 if (targetm
.calls
.arg_partial_bytes (args_so_far
, mode
, NULL
, 1))
1264 targetm
.calls
.function_arg_advance (args_so_far
, mode
,
1271 /* A subroutine of emit_block_move. Expand a movmem pattern;
1272 return true if successful. */
1275 emit_block_move_via_movmem (rtx x
, rtx y
, rtx size
, unsigned int align
,
1276 unsigned int expected_align
, HOST_WIDE_INT expected_size
)
1278 int save_volatile_ok
= volatile_ok
;
1279 enum machine_mode mode
;
1281 if (expected_align
< align
)
1282 expected_align
= align
;
1284 /* Since this is a move insn, we don't care about volatility. */
1287 /* Try the most limited insn first, because there's no point
1288 including more than one in the machine description unless
1289 the more limited one has some advantage. */
1291 for (mode
= GET_CLASS_NARROWEST_MODE (MODE_INT
); mode
!= VOIDmode
;
1292 mode
= GET_MODE_WIDER_MODE (mode
))
1294 enum insn_code code
= direct_optab_handler (movmem_optab
, mode
);
1296 if (code
!= CODE_FOR_nothing
1297 /* We don't need MODE to be narrower than BITS_PER_HOST_WIDE_INT
1298 here because if SIZE is less than the mode mask, as it is
1299 returned by the macro, it will definitely be less than the
1300 actual mode mask. */
1301 && ((CONST_INT_P (size
)
1302 && ((unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT
) INTVAL (size
)
1303 <= (GET_MODE_MASK (mode
) >> 1)))
1304 || GET_MODE_BITSIZE (mode
) >= BITS_PER_WORD
))
1306 struct expand_operand ops
[6];
1309 /* ??? When called via emit_block_move_for_call, it'd be
1310 nice if there were some way to inform the backend, so
1311 that it doesn't fail the expansion because it thinks
1312 emitting the libcall would be more efficient. */
1313 nops
= insn_data
[(int) code
].n_generator_args
;
1314 gcc_assert (nops
== 4 || nops
== 6);
1316 create_fixed_operand (&ops
[0], x
);
1317 create_fixed_operand (&ops
[1], y
);
1318 /* The check above guarantees that this size conversion is valid. */
1319 create_convert_operand_to (&ops
[2], size
, mode
, true);
1320 create_integer_operand (&ops
[3], align
/ BITS_PER_UNIT
);
1323 create_integer_operand (&ops
[4], expected_align
/ BITS_PER_UNIT
);
1324 create_integer_operand (&ops
[5], expected_size
);
1326 if (maybe_expand_insn (code
, nops
, ops
))
1328 volatile_ok
= save_volatile_ok
;
1334 volatile_ok
= save_volatile_ok
;
1338 /* A subroutine of emit_block_move. Expand a call to memcpy.
1339 Return the return value from memcpy, 0 otherwise. */
1342 emit_block_move_via_libcall (rtx dst
, rtx src
, rtx size
, bool tailcall
)
1344 rtx dst_addr
, src_addr
;
1345 tree call_expr
, fn
, src_tree
, dst_tree
, size_tree
;
1346 enum machine_mode size_mode
;
1349 /* Emit code to copy the addresses of DST and SRC and SIZE into new
1350 pseudos. We can then place those new pseudos into a VAR_DECL and
1353 dst_addr
= copy_addr_to_reg (XEXP (dst
, 0));
1354 src_addr
= copy_addr_to_reg (XEXP (src
, 0));
1356 dst_addr
= convert_memory_address (ptr_mode
, dst_addr
);
1357 src_addr
= convert_memory_address (ptr_mode
, src_addr
);
1359 dst_tree
= make_tree (ptr_type_node
, dst_addr
);
1360 src_tree
= make_tree (ptr_type_node
, src_addr
);
1362 size_mode
= TYPE_MODE (sizetype
);
1364 size
= convert_to_mode (size_mode
, size
, 1);
1365 size
= copy_to_mode_reg (size_mode
, size
);
1367 /* It is incorrect to use the libcall calling conventions to call
1368 memcpy in this context. This could be a user call to memcpy and
1369 the user may wish to examine the return value from memcpy. For
1370 targets where libcalls and normal calls have different conventions
1371 for returning pointers, we could end up generating incorrect code. */
1373 size_tree
= make_tree (sizetype
, size
);
1375 fn
= emit_block_move_libcall_fn (true);
1376 call_expr
= build_call_expr (fn
, 3, dst_tree
, src_tree
, size_tree
);
1377 CALL_EXPR_TAILCALL (call_expr
) = tailcall
;
1379 retval
= expand_normal (call_expr
);
1384 /* A subroutine of emit_block_move_via_libcall. Create the tree node
1385 for the function we use for block copies. */
1387 static GTY(()) tree block_move_fn
;
1390 init_block_move_fn (const char *asmspec
)
1394 tree args
, fn
, attrs
, attr_args
;
1396 fn
= get_identifier ("memcpy");
1397 args
= build_function_type_list (ptr_type_node
, ptr_type_node
,
1398 const_ptr_type_node
, sizetype
,
1401 fn
= build_decl (UNKNOWN_LOCATION
, FUNCTION_DECL
, fn
, args
);
1402 DECL_EXTERNAL (fn
) = 1;
1403 TREE_PUBLIC (fn
) = 1;
1404 DECL_ARTIFICIAL (fn
) = 1;
1405 TREE_NOTHROW (fn
) = 1;
1406 DECL_VISIBILITY (fn
) = VISIBILITY_DEFAULT
;
1407 DECL_VISIBILITY_SPECIFIED (fn
) = 1;
1409 attr_args
= build_tree_list (NULL_TREE
, build_string (1, "1"));
1410 attrs
= tree_cons (get_identifier ("fn spec"), attr_args
, NULL
);
1412 decl_attributes (&fn
, attrs
, ATTR_FLAG_BUILT_IN
);
1418 set_user_assembler_name (block_move_fn
, asmspec
);
1422 emit_block_move_libcall_fn (int for_call
)
1424 static bool emitted_extern
;
1427 init_block_move_fn (NULL
);
1429 if (for_call
&& !emitted_extern
)
1431 emitted_extern
= true;
1432 make_decl_rtl (block_move_fn
);
1435 return block_move_fn
;
1438 /* A subroutine of emit_block_move. Copy the data via an explicit
1439 loop. This is used only when libcalls are forbidden. */
1440 /* ??? It'd be nice to copy in hunks larger than QImode. */
1443 emit_block_move_via_loop (rtx x
, rtx y
, rtx size
,
1444 unsigned int align ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED
)
1446 rtx cmp_label
, top_label
, iter
, x_addr
, y_addr
, tmp
;
1447 enum machine_mode x_addr_mode
= get_address_mode (x
);
1448 enum machine_mode y_addr_mode
= get_address_mode (y
);
1449 enum machine_mode iter_mode
;
1451 iter_mode
= GET_MODE (size
);
1452 if (iter_mode
== VOIDmode
)
1453 iter_mode
= word_mode
;
1455 top_label
= gen_label_rtx ();
1456 cmp_label
= gen_label_rtx ();
1457 iter
= gen_reg_rtx (iter_mode
);
1459 emit_move_insn (iter
, const0_rtx
);
1461 x_addr
= force_operand (XEXP (x
, 0), NULL_RTX
);
1462 y_addr
= force_operand (XEXP (y
, 0), NULL_RTX
);
1463 do_pending_stack_adjust ();
1465 emit_jump (cmp_label
);
1466 emit_label (top_label
);
1468 tmp
= convert_modes (x_addr_mode
, iter_mode
, iter
, true);
1469 x_addr
= simplify_gen_binary (PLUS
, x_addr_mode
, x_addr
, tmp
);
1471 if (x_addr_mode
!= y_addr_mode
)
1472 tmp
= convert_modes (y_addr_mode
, iter_mode
, iter
, true);
1473 y_addr
= simplify_gen_binary (PLUS
, y_addr_mode
, y_addr
, tmp
);
1475 x
= change_address (x
, QImode
, x_addr
);
1476 y
= change_address (y
, QImode
, y_addr
);
1478 emit_move_insn (x
, y
);
1480 tmp
= expand_simple_binop (iter_mode
, PLUS
, iter
, const1_rtx
, iter
,
1481 true, OPTAB_LIB_WIDEN
);
1483 emit_move_insn (iter
, tmp
);
1485 emit_label (cmp_label
);
1487 emit_cmp_and_jump_insns (iter
, size
, LT
, NULL_RTX
, iter_mode
,
1488 true, top_label
, REG_BR_PROB_BASE
* 90 / 100);
1491 /* Copy all or part of a value X into registers starting at REGNO.
1492 The number of registers to be filled is NREGS. */
1495 move_block_to_reg (int regno
, rtx x
, int nregs
, enum machine_mode mode
)
1498 #ifdef HAVE_load_multiple
1506 if (CONSTANT_P (x
) && !targetm
.legitimate_constant_p (mode
, x
))
1507 x
= validize_mem (force_const_mem (mode
, x
));
1509 /* See if the machine can do this with a load multiple insn. */
1510 #ifdef HAVE_load_multiple
1511 if (HAVE_load_multiple
)
1513 last
= get_last_insn ();
1514 pat
= gen_load_multiple (gen_rtx_REG (word_mode
, regno
), x
,
1522 delete_insns_since (last
);
1526 for (i
= 0; i
< nregs
; i
++)
1527 emit_move_insn (gen_rtx_REG (word_mode
, regno
+ i
),
1528 operand_subword_force (x
, i
, mode
));
1531 /* Copy all or part of a BLKmode value X out of registers starting at REGNO.
1532 The number of registers to be filled is NREGS. */
1535 move_block_from_reg (int regno
, rtx x
, int nregs
)
1542 /* See if the machine can do this with a store multiple insn. */
1543 #ifdef HAVE_store_multiple
1544 if (HAVE_store_multiple
)
1546 rtx last
= get_last_insn ();
1547 rtx pat
= gen_store_multiple (x
, gen_rtx_REG (word_mode
, regno
),
1555 delete_insns_since (last
);
1559 for (i
= 0; i
< nregs
; i
++)
1561 rtx tem
= operand_subword (x
, i
, 1, BLKmode
);
1565 emit_move_insn (tem
, gen_rtx_REG (word_mode
, regno
+ i
));
1569 /* Generate a PARALLEL rtx for a new non-consecutive group of registers from
1570 ORIG, where ORIG is a non-consecutive group of registers represented by
1571 a PARALLEL. The clone is identical to the original except in that the
1572 original set of registers is replaced by a new set of pseudo registers.
1573 The new set has the same modes as the original set. */
1576 gen_group_rtx (rtx orig
)
1581 gcc_assert (GET_CODE (orig
) == PARALLEL
);
1583 length
= XVECLEN (orig
, 0);
1584 tmps
= XALLOCAVEC (rtx
, length
);
1586 /* Skip a NULL entry in first slot. */
1587 i
= XEXP (XVECEXP (orig
, 0, 0), 0) ? 0 : 1;
1592 for (; i
< length
; i
++)
1594 enum machine_mode mode
= GET_MODE (XEXP (XVECEXP (orig
, 0, i
), 0));
1595 rtx offset
= XEXP (XVECEXP (orig
, 0, i
), 1);
1597 tmps
[i
] = gen_rtx_EXPR_LIST (VOIDmode
, gen_reg_rtx (mode
), offset
);
1600 return gen_rtx_PARALLEL (GET_MODE (orig
), gen_rtvec_v (length
, tmps
));
1603 /* A subroutine of emit_group_load. Arguments as for emit_group_load,
1604 except that values are placed in TMPS[i], and must later be moved
1605 into corresponding XEXP (XVECEXP (DST, 0, i), 0) element. */
1608 emit_group_load_1 (rtx
*tmps
, rtx dst
, rtx orig_src
, tree type
, int ssize
)
1612 enum machine_mode m
= GET_MODE (orig_src
);
1614 gcc_assert (GET_CODE (dst
) == PARALLEL
);
1617 && !SCALAR_INT_MODE_P (m
)
1618 && !MEM_P (orig_src
)
1619 && GET_CODE (orig_src
) != CONCAT
)
1621 enum machine_mode imode
= int_mode_for_mode (GET_MODE (orig_src
));
1622 if (imode
== BLKmode
)
1623 src
= assign_stack_temp (GET_MODE (orig_src
), ssize
);
1625 src
= gen_reg_rtx (imode
);
1626 if (imode
!= BLKmode
)
1627 src
= gen_lowpart (GET_MODE (orig_src
), src
);
1628 emit_move_insn (src
, orig_src
);
1629 /* ...and back again. */
1630 if (imode
!= BLKmode
)
1631 src
= gen_lowpart (imode
, src
);
1632 emit_group_load_1 (tmps
, dst
, src
, type
, ssize
);
1636 /* Check for a NULL entry, used to indicate that the parameter goes
1637 both on the stack and in registers. */
1638 if (XEXP (XVECEXP (dst
, 0, 0), 0))
1643 /* Process the pieces. */
1644 for (i
= start
; i
< XVECLEN (dst
, 0); i
++)
1646 enum machine_mode mode
= GET_MODE (XEXP (XVECEXP (dst
, 0, i
), 0));
1647 HOST_WIDE_INT bytepos
= INTVAL (XEXP (XVECEXP (dst
, 0, i
), 1));
1648 unsigned int bytelen
= GET_MODE_SIZE (mode
);
1651 /* Handle trailing fragments that run over the size of the struct. */
1652 if (ssize
>= 0 && bytepos
+ (HOST_WIDE_INT
) bytelen
> ssize
)
1654 /* Arrange to shift the fragment to where it belongs.
1655 extract_bit_field loads to the lsb of the reg. */
1657 #ifdef BLOCK_REG_PADDING
1658 BLOCK_REG_PADDING (GET_MODE (orig_src
), type
, i
== start
)
1659 == (BYTES_BIG_ENDIAN
? upward
: downward
)
1664 shift
= (bytelen
- (ssize
- bytepos
)) * BITS_PER_UNIT
;
1665 bytelen
= ssize
- bytepos
;
1666 gcc_assert (bytelen
> 0);
1669 /* If we won't be loading directly from memory, protect the real source
1670 from strange tricks we might play; but make sure that the source can
1671 be loaded directly into the destination. */
1673 if (!MEM_P (orig_src
)
1674 && (!CONSTANT_P (orig_src
)
1675 || (GET_MODE (orig_src
) != mode
1676 && GET_MODE (orig_src
) != VOIDmode
)))
1678 if (GET_MODE (orig_src
) == VOIDmode
)
1679 src
= gen_reg_rtx (mode
);
1681 src
= gen_reg_rtx (GET_MODE (orig_src
));
1683 emit_move_insn (src
, orig_src
);
1686 /* Optimize the access just a bit. */
1688 && (! SLOW_UNALIGNED_ACCESS (mode
, MEM_ALIGN (src
))
1689 || MEM_ALIGN (src
) >= GET_MODE_ALIGNMENT (mode
))
1690 && bytepos
* BITS_PER_UNIT
% GET_MODE_ALIGNMENT (mode
) == 0
1691 && bytelen
== GET_MODE_SIZE (mode
))
1693 tmps
[i
] = gen_reg_rtx (mode
);
1694 emit_move_insn (tmps
[i
], adjust_address (src
, mode
, bytepos
));
1696 else if (COMPLEX_MODE_P (mode
)
1697 && GET_MODE (src
) == mode
1698 && bytelen
== GET_MODE_SIZE (mode
))
1699 /* Let emit_move_complex do the bulk of the work. */
1701 else if (GET_CODE (src
) == CONCAT
)
1703 unsigned int slen
= GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (src
));
1704 unsigned int slen0
= GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (XEXP (src
, 0)));
1706 if ((bytepos
== 0 && bytelen
== slen0
)
1707 || (bytepos
!= 0 && bytepos
+ bytelen
<= slen
))
1709 /* The following assumes that the concatenated objects all
1710 have the same size. In this case, a simple calculation
1711 can be used to determine the object and the bit field
1713 tmps
[i
] = XEXP (src
, bytepos
/ slen0
);
1714 if (! CONSTANT_P (tmps
[i
])
1715 && (!REG_P (tmps
[i
]) || GET_MODE (tmps
[i
]) != mode
))
1716 tmps
[i
] = extract_bit_field (tmps
[i
], bytelen
* BITS_PER_UNIT
,
1717 (bytepos
% slen0
) * BITS_PER_UNIT
,
1718 1, NULL_RTX
, mode
, mode
);
1724 gcc_assert (!bytepos
);
1725 mem
= assign_stack_temp (GET_MODE (src
), slen
);
1726 emit_move_insn (mem
, src
);
1727 tmps
[i
] = extract_bit_field (mem
, bytelen
* BITS_PER_UNIT
,
1728 0, 1, NULL_RTX
, mode
, mode
);
1731 /* FIXME: A SIMD parallel will eventually lead to a subreg of a
1732 SIMD register, which is currently broken. While we get GCC
1733 to emit proper RTL for these cases, let's dump to memory. */
1734 else if (VECTOR_MODE_P (GET_MODE (dst
))
1737 int slen
= GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (src
));
1740 mem
= assign_stack_temp (GET_MODE (src
), slen
);
1741 emit_move_insn (mem
, src
);
1742 tmps
[i
] = adjust_address (mem
, mode
, (int) bytepos
);
1744 else if (CONSTANT_P (src
) && GET_MODE (dst
) != BLKmode
1745 && XVECLEN (dst
, 0) > 1)
1746 tmps
[i
] = simplify_gen_subreg (mode
, src
, GET_MODE (dst
), bytepos
);
1747 else if (CONSTANT_P (src
))
1749 HOST_WIDE_INT len
= (HOST_WIDE_INT
) bytelen
;
1757 gcc_assert (2 * len
== ssize
);
1758 split_double (src
, &first
, &second
);
1765 else if (REG_P (src
) && GET_MODE (src
) == mode
)
1768 tmps
[i
] = extract_bit_field (src
, bytelen
* BITS_PER_UNIT
,
1769 bytepos
* BITS_PER_UNIT
, 1, NULL_RTX
,
1773 tmps
[i
] = expand_shift (LSHIFT_EXPR
, mode
, tmps
[i
],
1778 /* Emit code to move a block SRC of type TYPE to a block DST,
1779 where DST is non-consecutive registers represented by a PARALLEL.
1780 SSIZE represents the total size of block ORIG_SRC in bytes, or -1
1784 emit_group_load (rtx dst
, rtx src
, tree type
, int ssize
)
1789 tmps
= XALLOCAVEC (rtx
, XVECLEN (dst
, 0));
1790 emit_group_load_1 (tmps
, dst
, src
, type
, ssize
);
1792 /* Copy the extracted pieces into the proper (probable) hard regs. */
1793 for (i
= 0; i
< XVECLEN (dst
, 0); i
++)
1795 rtx d
= XEXP (XVECEXP (dst
, 0, i
), 0);
1798 emit_move_insn (d
, tmps
[i
]);
1802 /* Similar, but load SRC into new pseudos in a format that looks like
1803 PARALLEL. This can later be fed to emit_group_move to get things
1804 in the right place. */
1807 emit_group_load_into_temps (rtx parallel
, rtx src
, tree type
, int ssize
)
1812 vec
= rtvec_alloc (XVECLEN (parallel
, 0));
1813 emit_group_load_1 (&RTVEC_ELT (vec
, 0), parallel
, src
, type
, ssize
);
1815 /* Convert the vector to look just like the original PARALLEL, except
1816 with the computed values. */
1817 for (i
= 0; i
< XVECLEN (parallel
, 0); i
++)
1819 rtx e
= XVECEXP (parallel
, 0, i
);
1820 rtx d
= XEXP (e
, 0);
1824 d
= force_reg (GET_MODE (d
), RTVEC_ELT (vec
, i
));
1825 e
= alloc_EXPR_LIST (REG_NOTE_KIND (e
), d
, XEXP (e
, 1));
1827 RTVEC_ELT (vec
, i
) = e
;
1830 return gen_rtx_PARALLEL (GET_MODE (parallel
), vec
);
1833 /* Emit code to move a block SRC to block DST, where SRC and DST are
1834 non-consecutive groups of registers, each represented by a PARALLEL. */
1837 emit_group_move (rtx dst
, rtx src
)
1841 gcc_assert (GET_CODE (src
) == PARALLEL
1842 && GET_CODE (dst
) == PARALLEL
1843 && XVECLEN (src
, 0) == XVECLEN (dst
, 0));
1845 /* Skip first entry if NULL. */
1846 for (i
= XEXP (XVECEXP (src
, 0, 0), 0) ? 0 : 1; i
< XVECLEN (src
, 0); i
++)
1847 emit_move_insn (XEXP (XVECEXP (dst
, 0, i
), 0),
1848 XEXP (XVECEXP (src
, 0, i
), 0));
1851 /* Move a group of registers represented by a PARALLEL into pseudos. */
1854 emit_group_move_into_temps (rtx src
)
1856 rtvec vec
= rtvec_alloc (XVECLEN (src
, 0));
1859 for (i
= 0; i
< XVECLEN (src
, 0); i
++)
1861 rtx e
= XVECEXP (src
, 0, i
);
1862 rtx d
= XEXP (e
, 0);
1865 e
= alloc_EXPR_LIST (REG_NOTE_KIND (e
), copy_to_reg (d
), XEXP (e
, 1));
1866 RTVEC_ELT (vec
, i
) = e
;
1869 return gen_rtx_PARALLEL (GET_MODE (src
), vec
);
1872 /* Emit code to move a block SRC to a block ORIG_DST of type TYPE,
1873 where SRC is non-consecutive registers represented by a PARALLEL.
1874 SSIZE represents the total size of block ORIG_DST, or -1 if not
1878 emit_group_store (rtx orig_dst
, rtx src
, tree type ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED
, int ssize
)
1881 int start
, finish
, i
;
1882 enum machine_mode m
= GET_MODE (orig_dst
);
1884 gcc_assert (GET_CODE (src
) == PARALLEL
);
1886 if (!SCALAR_INT_MODE_P (m
)
1887 && !MEM_P (orig_dst
) && GET_CODE (orig_dst
) != CONCAT
)
1889 enum machine_mode imode
= int_mode_for_mode (GET_MODE (orig_dst
));
1890 if (imode
== BLKmode
)
1891 dst
= assign_stack_temp (GET_MODE (orig_dst
), ssize
);
1893 dst
= gen_reg_rtx (imode
);
1894 emit_group_store (dst
, src
, type
, ssize
);
1895 if (imode
!= BLKmode
)
1896 dst
= gen_lowpart (GET_MODE (orig_dst
), dst
);
1897 emit_move_insn (orig_dst
, dst
);
1901 /* Check for a NULL entry, used to indicate that the parameter goes
1902 both on the stack and in registers. */
1903 if (XEXP (XVECEXP (src
, 0, 0), 0))
1907 finish
= XVECLEN (src
, 0);
1909 tmps
= XALLOCAVEC (rtx
, finish
);
1911 /* Copy the (probable) hard regs into pseudos. */
1912 for (i
= start
; i
< finish
; i
++)
1914 rtx reg
= XEXP (XVECEXP (src
, 0, i
), 0);
1915 if (!REG_P (reg
) || REGNO (reg
) < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER
)
1917 tmps
[i
] = gen_reg_rtx (GET_MODE (reg
));
1918 emit_move_insn (tmps
[i
], reg
);
1924 /* If we won't be storing directly into memory, protect the real destination
1925 from strange tricks we might play. */
1927 if (GET_CODE (dst
) == PARALLEL
)
1931 /* We can get a PARALLEL dst if there is a conditional expression in
1932 a return statement. In that case, the dst and src are the same,
1933 so no action is necessary. */
1934 if (rtx_equal_p (dst
, src
))
1937 /* It is unclear if we can ever reach here, but we may as well handle
1938 it. Allocate a temporary, and split this into a store/load to/from
1941 temp
= assign_stack_temp (GET_MODE (dst
), ssize
);
1942 emit_group_store (temp
, src
, type
, ssize
);
1943 emit_group_load (dst
, temp
, type
, ssize
);
1946 else if (!MEM_P (dst
) && GET_CODE (dst
) != CONCAT
)
1948 enum machine_mode outer
= GET_MODE (dst
);
1949 enum machine_mode inner
;
1950 HOST_WIDE_INT bytepos
;
1954 if (!REG_P (dst
) || REGNO (dst
) < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER
)
1955 dst
= gen_reg_rtx (outer
);
1957 /* Make life a bit easier for combine. */
1958 /* If the first element of the vector is the low part
1959 of the destination mode, use a paradoxical subreg to
1960 initialize the destination. */
1963 inner
= GET_MODE (tmps
[start
]);
1964 bytepos
= subreg_lowpart_offset (inner
, outer
);
1965 if (INTVAL (XEXP (XVECEXP (src
, 0, start
), 1)) == bytepos
)
1967 temp
= simplify_gen_subreg (outer
, tmps
[start
],
1971 emit_move_insn (dst
, temp
);
1978 /* If the first element wasn't the low part, try the last. */
1980 && start
< finish
- 1)
1982 inner
= GET_MODE (tmps
[finish
- 1]);
1983 bytepos
= subreg_lowpart_offset (inner
, outer
);
1984 if (INTVAL (XEXP (XVECEXP (src
, 0, finish
- 1), 1)) == bytepos
)
1986 temp
= simplify_gen_subreg (outer
, tmps
[finish
- 1],
1990 emit_move_insn (dst
, temp
);
1997 /* Otherwise, simply initialize the result to zero. */
1999 emit_move_insn (dst
, CONST0_RTX (outer
));
2002 /* Process the pieces. */
2003 for (i
= start
; i
< finish
; i
++)
2005 HOST_WIDE_INT bytepos
= INTVAL (XEXP (XVECEXP (src
, 0, i
), 1));
2006 enum machine_mode mode
= GET_MODE (tmps
[i
]);
2007 unsigned int bytelen
= GET_MODE_SIZE (mode
);
2008 unsigned int adj_bytelen
= bytelen
;
2011 /* Handle trailing fragments that run over the size of the struct. */
2012 if (ssize
>= 0 && bytepos
+ (HOST_WIDE_INT
) bytelen
> ssize
)
2013 adj_bytelen
= ssize
- bytepos
;
2015 if (GET_CODE (dst
) == CONCAT
)
2017 if (bytepos
+ adj_bytelen
2018 <= GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (XEXP (dst
, 0))))
2019 dest
= XEXP (dst
, 0);
2020 else if (bytepos
>= GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (XEXP (dst
, 0))))
2022 bytepos
-= GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (XEXP (dst
, 0)));
2023 dest
= XEXP (dst
, 1);
2027 enum machine_mode dest_mode
= GET_MODE (dest
);
2028 enum machine_mode tmp_mode
= GET_MODE (tmps
[i
]);
2030 gcc_assert (bytepos
== 0 && XVECLEN (src
, 0));
2032 if (GET_MODE_ALIGNMENT (dest_mode
)
2033 >= GET_MODE_ALIGNMENT (tmp_mode
))
2035 dest
= assign_stack_temp (dest_mode
,
2036 GET_MODE_SIZE (dest_mode
));
2037 emit_move_insn (adjust_address (dest
,
2045 dest
= assign_stack_temp (tmp_mode
,
2046 GET_MODE_SIZE (tmp_mode
));
2047 emit_move_insn (dest
, tmps
[i
]);
2048 dst
= adjust_address (dest
, dest_mode
, bytepos
);
2054 if (ssize
>= 0 && bytepos
+ (HOST_WIDE_INT
) bytelen
> ssize
)
2056 /* store_bit_field always takes its value from the lsb.
2057 Move the fragment to the lsb if it's not already there. */
2059 #ifdef BLOCK_REG_PADDING
2060 BLOCK_REG_PADDING (GET_MODE (orig_dst
), type
, i
== start
)
2061 == (BYTES_BIG_ENDIAN
? upward
: downward
)
2067 int shift
= (bytelen
- (ssize
- bytepos
)) * BITS_PER_UNIT
;
2068 tmps
[i
] = expand_shift (RSHIFT_EXPR
, mode
, tmps
[i
],
2071 bytelen
= adj_bytelen
;
2074 /* Optimize the access just a bit. */
2076 && (! SLOW_UNALIGNED_ACCESS (mode
, MEM_ALIGN (dest
))
2077 || MEM_ALIGN (dest
) >= GET_MODE_ALIGNMENT (mode
))
2078 && bytepos
* BITS_PER_UNIT
% GET_MODE_ALIGNMENT (mode
) == 0
2079 && bytelen
== GET_MODE_SIZE (mode
))
2080 emit_move_insn (adjust_address (dest
, mode
, bytepos
), tmps
[i
]);
2082 store_bit_field (dest
, bytelen
* BITS_PER_UNIT
, bytepos
* BITS_PER_UNIT
,
2083 0, 0, mode
, tmps
[i
]);
2086 /* Copy from the pseudo into the (probable) hard reg. */
2087 if (orig_dst
!= dst
)
2088 emit_move_insn (orig_dst
, dst
);
2091 /* Return a form of X that does not use a PARALLEL. TYPE is the type
2092 of the value stored in X. */
2095 maybe_emit_group_store (rtx x
, tree type
)
2097 enum machine_mode mode
= TYPE_MODE (type
);
2098 gcc_checking_assert (GET_MODE (x
) == VOIDmode
|| GET_MODE (x
) == mode
);
2099 if (GET_CODE (x
) == PARALLEL
)
2101 rtx result
= gen_reg_rtx (mode
);
2102 emit_group_store (result
, x
, type
, int_size_in_bytes (type
));
2108 /* Copy a BLKmode object of TYPE out of a register SRCREG into TARGET.
2110 This is used on targets that return BLKmode values in registers. */
2113 copy_blkmode_from_reg (rtx target
, rtx srcreg
, tree type
)
2115 unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT bytes
= int_size_in_bytes (type
);
2116 rtx src
= NULL
, dst
= NULL
;
2117 unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT bitsize
= MIN (TYPE_ALIGN (type
), BITS_PER_WORD
);
2118 unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT bitpos
, xbitpos
, padding_correction
= 0;
2119 enum machine_mode mode
= GET_MODE (srcreg
);
2120 enum machine_mode tmode
= GET_MODE (target
);
2121 enum machine_mode copy_mode
;
2123 /* BLKmode registers created in the back-end shouldn't have survived. */
2124 gcc_assert (mode
!= BLKmode
);
2126 /* If the structure doesn't take up a whole number of words, see whether
2127 SRCREG is padded on the left or on the right. If it's on the left,
2128 set PADDING_CORRECTION to the number of bits to skip.
2130 In most ABIs, the structure will be returned at the least end of
2131 the register, which translates to right padding on little-endian
2132 targets and left padding on big-endian targets. The opposite
2133 holds if the structure is returned at the most significant
2134 end of the register. */
2135 if (bytes
% UNITS_PER_WORD
!= 0
2136 && (targetm
.calls
.return_in_msb (type
)
2138 : BYTES_BIG_ENDIAN
))
2140 = (BITS_PER_WORD
- ((bytes
% UNITS_PER_WORD
) * BITS_PER_UNIT
));
2142 /* We can use a single move if we have an exact mode for the size. */
2143 else if (MEM_P (target
)
2144 && (!SLOW_UNALIGNED_ACCESS (mode
, MEM_ALIGN (target
))
2145 || MEM_ALIGN (target
) >= GET_MODE_ALIGNMENT (mode
))
2146 && bytes
== GET_MODE_SIZE (mode
))
2148 emit_move_insn (adjust_address (target
, mode
, 0), srcreg
);
2152 /* And if we additionally have the same mode for a register. */
2153 else if (REG_P (target
)
2154 && GET_MODE (target
) == mode
2155 && bytes
== GET_MODE_SIZE (mode
))
2157 emit_move_insn (target
, srcreg
);
2161 /* This code assumes srcreg is at least a full word. If it isn't, copy it
2162 into a new pseudo which is a full word. */
2163 if (GET_MODE_SIZE (mode
) < UNITS_PER_WORD
)
2165 srcreg
= convert_to_mode (word_mode
, srcreg
, TYPE_UNSIGNED (type
));
2169 /* Copy the structure BITSIZE bits at a time. If the target lives in
2170 memory, take care of not reading/writing past its end by selecting
2171 a copy mode suited to BITSIZE. This should always be possible given
2174 If the target lives in register, make sure not to select a copy mode
2175 larger than the mode of the register.
2177 We could probably emit more efficient code for machines which do not use
2178 strict alignment, but it doesn't seem worth the effort at the current
2181 copy_mode
= word_mode
;
2184 enum machine_mode mem_mode
= mode_for_size (bitsize
, MODE_INT
, 1);
2185 if (mem_mode
!= BLKmode
)
2186 copy_mode
= mem_mode
;
2188 else if (REG_P (target
) && GET_MODE_BITSIZE (tmode
) < BITS_PER_WORD
)
2191 for (bitpos
= 0, xbitpos
= padding_correction
;
2192 bitpos
< bytes
* BITS_PER_UNIT
;
2193 bitpos
+= bitsize
, xbitpos
+= bitsize
)
2195 /* We need a new source operand each time xbitpos is on a
2196 word boundary and when xbitpos == padding_correction
2197 (the first time through). */
2198 if (xbitpos
% BITS_PER_WORD
== 0 || xbitpos
== padding_correction
)
2199 src
= operand_subword_force (srcreg
, xbitpos
/ BITS_PER_WORD
, mode
);
2201 /* We need a new destination operand each time bitpos is on
2203 if (REG_P (target
) && GET_MODE_BITSIZE (tmode
) < BITS_PER_WORD
)
2205 else if (bitpos
% BITS_PER_WORD
== 0)
2206 dst
= operand_subword (target
, bitpos
/ BITS_PER_WORD
, 1, tmode
);
2208 /* Use xbitpos for the source extraction (right justified) and
2209 bitpos for the destination store (left justified). */
2210 store_bit_field (dst
, bitsize
, bitpos
% BITS_PER_WORD
, 0, 0, copy_mode
,
2211 extract_bit_field (src
, bitsize
,
2212 xbitpos
% BITS_PER_WORD
, 1,
2213 NULL_RTX
, copy_mode
, copy_mode
));
2217 /* Copy BLKmode value SRC into a register of mode MODE. Return the
2218 register if it contains any data, otherwise return null.
2220 This is used on targets that return BLKmode values in registers. */
2223 copy_blkmode_to_reg (enum machine_mode mode
, tree src
)
2226 unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT bitpos
, xbitpos
, padding_correction
= 0, bytes
;
2227 unsigned int bitsize
;
2228 rtx
*dst_words
, dst
, x
, src_word
= NULL_RTX
, dst_word
= NULL_RTX
;
2229 enum machine_mode dst_mode
;
2231 gcc_assert (TYPE_MODE (TREE_TYPE (src
)) == BLKmode
);
2233 x
= expand_normal (src
);
2235 bytes
= int_size_in_bytes (TREE_TYPE (src
));
2239 /* If the structure doesn't take up a whole number of words, see
2240 whether the register value should be padded on the left or on
2241 the right. Set PADDING_CORRECTION to the number of padding
2242 bits needed on the left side.
2244 In most ABIs, the structure will be returned at the least end of
2245 the register, which translates to right padding on little-endian
2246 targets and left padding on big-endian targets. The opposite
2247 holds if the structure is returned at the most significant
2248 end of the register. */
2249 if (bytes
% UNITS_PER_WORD
!= 0
2250 && (targetm
.calls
.return_in_msb (TREE_TYPE (src
))
2252 : BYTES_BIG_ENDIAN
))
2253 padding_correction
= (BITS_PER_WORD
- ((bytes
% UNITS_PER_WORD
)
2256 n_regs
= (bytes
+ UNITS_PER_WORD
- 1) / UNITS_PER_WORD
;
2257 dst_words
= XALLOCAVEC (rtx
, n_regs
);
2258 bitsize
= MIN (TYPE_ALIGN (TREE_TYPE (src
)), BITS_PER_WORD
);
2260 /* Copy the structure BITSIZE bits at a time. */
2261 for (bitpos
= 0, xbitpos
= padding_correction
;
2262 bitpos
< bytes
* BITS_PER_UNIT
;
2263 bitpos
+= bitsize
, xbitpos
+= bitsize
)
2265 /* We need a new destination pseudo each time xbitpos is
2266 on a word boundary and when xbitpos == padding_correction
2267 (the first time through). */
2268 if (xbitpos
% BITS_PER_WORD
== 0
2269 || xbitpos
== padding_correction
)
2271 /* Generate an appropriate register. */
2272 dst_word
= gen_reg_rtx (word_mode
);
2273 dst_words
[xbitpos
/ BITS_PER_WORD
] = dst_word
;
2275 /* Clear the destination before we move anything into it. */
2276 emit_move_insn (dst_word
, CONST0_RTX (word_mode
));
2279 /* We need a new source operand each time bitpos is on a word
2281 if (bitpos
% BITS_PER_WORD
== 0)
2282 src_word
= operand_subword_force (x
, bitpos
/ BITS_PER_WORD
, BLKmode
);
2284 /* Use bitpos for the source extraction (left justified) and
2285 xbitpos for the destination store (right justified). */
2286 store_bit_field (dst_word
, bitsize
, xbitpos
% BITS_PER_WORD
,
2288 extract_bit_field (src_word
, bitsize
,
2289 bitpos
% BITS_PER_WORD
, 1,
2290 NULL_RTX
, word_mode
, word_mode
));
2293 if (mode
== BLKmode
)
2295 /* Find the smallest integer mode large enough to hold the
2296 entire structure. */
2297 for (mode
= GET_CLASS_NARROWEST_MODE (MODE_INT
);
2299 mode
= GET_MODE_WIDER_MODE (mode
))
2300 /* Have we found a large enough mode? */
2301 if (GET_MODE_SIZE (mode
) >= bytes
)
2304 /* A suitable mode should have been found. */
2305 gcc_assert (mode
!= VOIDmode
);
2308 if (GET_MODE_SIZE (mode
) < GET_MODE_SIZE (word_mode
))
2309 dst_mode
= word_mode
;
2312 dst
= gen_reg_rtx (dst_mode
);
2314 for (i
= 0; i
< n_regs
; i
++)
2315 emit_move_insn (operand_subword (dst
, i
, 0, dst_mode
), dst_words
[i
]);
2317 if (mode
!= dst_mode
)
2318 dst
= gen_lowpart (mode
, dst
);
2323 /* Add a USE expression for REG to the (possibly empty) list pointed
2324 to by CALL_FUSAGE. REG must denote a hard register. */
2327 use_reg_mode (rtx
*call_fusage
, rtx reg
, enum machine_mode mode
)
2329 gcc_assert (REG_P (reg
) && REGNO (reg
) < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER
);
2332 = gen_rtx_EXPR_LIST (mode
, gen_rtx_USE (VOIDmode
, reg
), *call_fusage
);
2335 /* Add USE expressions to *CALL_FUSAGE for each of NREGS consecutive regs,
2336 starting at REGNO. All of these registers must be hard registers. */
2339 use_regs (rtx
*call_fusage
, int regno
, int nregs
)
2343 gcc_assert (regno
+ nregs
<= FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER
);
2345 for (i
= 0; i
< nregs
; i
++)
2346 use_reg (call_fusage
, regno_reg_rtx
[regno
+ i
]);
2349 /* Add USE expressions to *CALL_FUSAGE for each REG contained in the
2350 PARALLEL REGS. This is for calls that pass values in multiple
2351 non-contiguous locations. The Irix 6 ABI has examples of this. */
2354 use_group_regs (rtx
*call_fusage
, rtx regs
)
2358 for (i
= 0; i
< XVECLEN (regs
, 0); i
++)
2360 rtx reg
= XEXP (XVECEXP (regs
, 0, i
), 0);
2362 /* A NULL entry means the parameter goes both on the stack and in
2363 registers. This can also be a MEM for targets that pass values
2364 partially on the stack and partially in registers. */
2365 if (reg
!= 0 && REG_P (reg
))
2366 use_reg (call_fusage
, reg
);
2370 /* Return the defining gimple statement for SSA_NAME NAME if it is an
2371 assigment and the code of the expresion on the RHS is CODE. Return
2375 get_def_for_expr (tree name
, enum tree_code code
)
2379 if (TREE_CODE (name
) != SSA_NAME
)
2382 def_stmt
= get_gimple_for_ssa_name (name
);
2384 || gimple_assign_rhs_code (def_stmt
) != code
)
2390 #ifdef HAVE_conditional_move
2391 /* Return the defining gimple statement for SSA_NAME NAME if it is an
2392 assigment and the class of the expresion on the RHS is CLASS. Return
2396 get_def_for_expr_class (tree name
, enum tree_code_class tclass
)
2400 if (TREE_CODE (name
) != SSA_NAME
)
2403 def_stmt
= get_gimple_for_ssa_name (name
);
2405 || TREE_CODE_CLASS (gimple_assign_rhs_code (def_stmt
)) != tclass
)
2413 /* Determine whether the LEN bytes generated by CONSTFUN can be
2414 stored to memory using several move instructions. CONSTFUNDATA is
2415 a pointer which will be passed as argument in every CONSTFUN call.
2416 ALIGN is maximum alignment we can assume. MEMSETP is true if this is
2417 a memset operation and false if it's a copy of a constant string.
2418 Return nonzero if a call to store_by_pieces should succeed. */
2421 can_store_by_pieces (unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT len
,
2422 rtx (*constfun
) (void *, HOST_WIDE_INT
, enum machine_mode
),
2423 void *constfundata
, unsigned int align
, bool memsetp
)
2425 unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT l
;
2426 unsigned int max_size
;
2427 HOST_WIDE_INT offset
= 0;
2428 enum machine_mode mode
;
2429 enum insn_code icode
;
2431 /* cst is set but not used if LEGITIMATE_CONSTANT doesn't use it. */
2432 rtx cst ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED
;
2438 ? SET_BY_PIECES_P (len
, align
)
2439 : STORE_BY_PIECES_P (len
, align
)))
2442 align
= alignment_for_piecewise_move (STORE_MAX_PIECES
, align
);
2444 /* We would first store what we can in the largest integer mode, then go to
2445 successively smaller modes. */
2448 reverse
<= (HAVE_PRE_DECREMENT
|| HAVE_POST_DECREMENT
);
2452 max_size
= STORE_MAX_PIECES
+ 1;
2453 while (max_size
> 1 && l
> 0)
2455 mode
= widest_int_mode_for_size (max_size
);
2457 if (mode
== VOIDmode
)
2460 icode
= optab_handler (mov_optab
, mode
);
2461 if (icode
!= CODE_FOR_nothing
2462 && align
>= GET_MODE_ALIGNMENT (mode
))
2464 unsigned int size
= GET_MODE_SIZE (mode
);
2471 cst
= (*constfun
) (constfundata
, offset
, mode
);
2472 if (!targetm
.legitimate_constant_p (mode
, cst
))
2482 max_size
= GET_MODE_SIZE (mode
);
2485 /* The code above should have handled everything. */
2492 /* Generate several move instructions to store LEN bytes generated by
2493 CONSTFUN to block TO. (A MEM rtx with BLKmode). CONSTFUNDATA is a
2494 pointer which will be passed as argument in every CONSTFUN call.
2495 ALIGN is maximum alignment we can assume. MEMSETP is true if this is
2496 a memset operation and false if it's a copy of a constant string.
2497 If ENDP is 0 return to, if ENDP is 1 return memory at the end ala
2498 mempcpy, and if ENDP is 2 return memory the end minus one byte ala
2502 store_by_pieces (rtx to
, unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT len
,
2503 rtx (*constfun
) (void *, HOST_WIDE_INT
, enum machine_mode
),
2504 void *constfundata
, unsigned int align
, bool memsetp
, int endp
)
2506 enum machine_mode to_addr_mode
= get_address_mode (to
);
2507 struct store_by_pieces_d data
;
2511 gcc_assert (endp
!= 2);
2516 ? SET_BY_PIECES_P (len
, align
)
2517 : STORE_BY_PIECES_P (len
, align
));
2518 data
.constfun
= constfun
;
2519 data
.constfundata
= constfundata
;
2522 store_by_pieces_1 (&data
, align
);
2527 gcc_assert (!data
.reverse
);
2532 if (HAVE_POST_INCREMENT
&& data
.explicit_inc_to
> 0)
2533 emit_insn (gen_add2_insn (data
.to_addr
, constm1_rtx
));
2535 data
.to_addr
= copy_to_mode_reg (to_addr_mode
,
2536 plus_constant (to_addr_mode
,
2540 to1
= adjust_automodify_address (data
.to
, QImode
, data
.to_addr
,
2547 to1
= adjust_address (data
.to
, QImode
, data
.offset
);
2555 /* Generate several move instructions to clear LEN bytes of block TO. (A MEM
2556 rtx with BLKmode). ALIGN is maximum alignment we can assume. */
2559 clear_by_pieces (rtx to
, unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT len
, unsigned int align
)
2561 struct store_by_pieces_d data
;
2566 data
.constfun
= clear_by_pieces_1
;
2567 data
.constfundata
= NULL
;
2570 store_by_pieces_1 (&data
, align
);
2573 /* Callback routine for clear_by_pieces.
2574 Return const0_rtx unconditionally. */
2577 clear_by_pieces_1 (void *data ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED
,
2578 HOST_WIDE_INT offset ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED
,
2579 enum machine_mode mode ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED
)
2584 /* Subroutine of clear_by_pieces and store_by_pieces.
2585 Generate several move instructions to store LEN bytes of block TO. (A MEM
2586 rtx with BLKmode). ALIGN is maximum alignment we can assume. */
2589 store_by_pieces_1 (struct store_by_pieces_d
*data ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED
,
2590 unsigned int align ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED
)
2592 enum machine_mode to_addr_mode
= get_address_mode (data
->to
);
2593 rtx to_addr
= XEXP (data
->to
, 0);
2594 unsigned int max_size
= STORE_MAX_PIECES
+ 1;
2595 enum insn_code icode
;
2598 data
->to_addr
= to_addr
;
2600 = (GET_CODE (to_addr
) == PRE_INC
|| GET_CODE (to_addr
) == PRE_DEC
2601 || GET_CODE (to_addr
) == POST_INC
|| GET_CODE (to_addr
) == POST_DEC
);
2603 data
->explicit_inc_to
= 0;
2605 = (GET_CODE (to_addr
) == PRE_DEC
|| GET_CODE (to_addr
) == POST_DEC
);
2607 data
->offset
= data
->len
;
2609 /* If storing requires more than two move insns,
2610 copy addresses to registers (to make displacements shorter)
2611 and use post-increment if available. */
2612 if (!data
->autinc_to
2613 && move_by_pieces_ninsns (data
->len
, align
, max_size
) > 2)
2615 /* Determine the main mode we'll be using.
2616 MODE might not be used depending on the definitions of the
2617 USE_* macros below. */
2618 enum machine_mode mode ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED
2619 = widest_int_mode_for_size (max_size
);
2621 if (USE_STORE_PRE_DECREMENT (mode
) && data
->reverse
&& ! data
->autinc_to
)
2623 data
->to_addr
= copy_to_mode_reg (to_addr_mode
,
2624 plus_constant (to_addr_mode
,
2627 data
->autinc_to
= 1;
2628 data
->explicit_inc_to
= -1;
2631 if (USE_STORE_POST_INCREMENT (mode
) && ! data
->reverse
2632 && ! data
->autinc_to
)
2634 data
->to_addr
= copy_to_mode_reg (to_addr_mode
, to_addr
);
2635 data
->autinc_to
= 1;
2636 data
->explicit_inc_to
= 1;
2639 if ( !data
->autinc_to
&& CONSTANT_P (to_addr
))
2640 data
->to_addr
= copy_to_mode_reg (to_addr_mode
, to_addr
);
2643 align
= alignment_for_piecewise_move (STORE_MAX_PIECES
, align
);
2645 /* First store what we can in the largest integer mode, then go to
2646 successively smaller modes. */
2648 while (max_size
> 1 && data
->len
> 0)
2650 enum machine_mode mode
= widest_int_mode_for_size (max_size
);
2652 if (mode
== VOIDmode
)
2655 icode
= optab_handler (mov_optab
, mode
);
2656 if (icode
!= CODE_FOR_nothing
&& align
>= GET_MODE_ALIGNMENT (mode
))
2657 store_by_pieces_2 (GEN_FCN (icode
), mode
, data
);
2659 max_size
= GET_MODE_SIZE (mode
);
2662 /* The code above should have handled everything. */
2663 gcc_assert (!data
->len
);
2666 /* Subroutine of store_by_pieces_1. Store as many bytes as appropriate
2667 with move instructions for mode MODE. GENFUN is the gen_... function
2668 to make a move insn for that mode. DATA has all the other info. */
2671 store_by_pieces_2 (insn_gen_fn genfun
, machine_mode mode
,
2672 struct store_by_pieces_d
*data
)
2674 unsigned int size
= GET_MODE_SIZE (mode
);
2677 while (data
->len
>= size
)
2680 data
->offset
-= size
;
2682 if (data
->autinc_to
)
2683 to1
= adjust_automodify_address (data
->to
, mode
, data
->to_addr
,
2686 to1
= adjust_address (data
->to
, mode
, data
->offset
);
2688 if (HAVE_PRE_DECREMENT
&& data
->explicit_inc_to
< 0)
2689 emit_insn (gen_add2_insn (data
->to_addr
,
2690 gen_int_mode (-(HOST_WIDE_INT
) size
,
2691 GET_MODE (data
->to_addr
))));
2693 cst
= (*data
->constfun
) (data
->constfundata
, data
->offset
, mode
);
2694 emit_insn ((*genfun
) (to1
, cst
));
2696 if (HAVE_POST_INCREMENT
&& data
->explicit_inc_to
> 0)
2697 emit_insn (gen_add2_insn (data
->to_addr
,
2699 GET_MODE (data
->to_addr
))));
2701 if (! data
->reverse
)
2702 data
->offset
+= size
;
2708 /* Write zeros through the storage of OBJECT. If OBJECT has BLKmode, SIZE is
2709 its length in bytes. */
2712 clear_storage_hints (rtx object
, rtx size
, enum block_op_methods method
,
2713 unsigned int expected_align
, HOST_WIDE_INT expected_size
)
2715 enum machine_mode mode
= GET_MODE (object
);
2718 gcc_assert (method
== BLOCK_OP_NORMAL
|| method
== BLOCK_OP_TAILCALL
);
2720 /* If OBJECT is not BLKmode and SIZE is the same size as its mode,
2721 just move a zero. Otherwise, do this a piece at a time. */
2723 && CONST_INT_P (size
)
2724 && INTVAL (size
) == (HOST_WIDE_INT
) GET_MODE_SIZE (mode
))
2726 rtx zero
= CONST0_RTX (mode
);
2729 emit_move_insn (object
, zero
);
2733 if (COMPLEX_MODE_P (mode
))
2735 zero
= CONST0_RTX (GET_MODE_INNER (mode
));
2738 write_complex_part (object
, zero
, 0);
2739 write_complex_part (object
, zero
, 1);
2745 if (size
== const0_rtx
)
2748 align
= MEM_ALIGN (object
);
2750 if (CONST_INT_P (size
)
2751 && CLEAR_BY_PIECES_P (INTVAL (size
), align
))
2752 clear_by_pieces (object
, INTVAL (size
), align
);
2753 else if (set_storage_via_setmem (object
, size
, const0_rtx
, align
,
2754 expected_align
, expected_size
))
2756 else if (ADDR_SPACE_GENERIC_P (MEM_ADDR_SPACE (object
)))
2757 return set_storage_via_libcall (object
, size
, const0_rtx
,
2758 method
== BLOCK_OP_TAILCALL
);
2766 clear_storage (rtx object
, rtx size
, enum block_op_methods method
)
2768 return clear_storage_hints (object
, size
, method
, 0, -1);
2772 /* A subroutine of clear_storage. Expand a call to memset.
2773 Return the return value of memset, 0 otherwise. */
2776 set_storage_via_libcall (rtx object
, rtx size
, rtx val
, bool tailcall
)
2778 tree call_expr
, fn
, object_tree
, size_tree
, val_tree
;
2779 enum machine_mode size_mode
;
2782 /* Emit code to copy OBJECT and SIZE into new pseudos. We can then
2783 place those into new pseudos into a VAR_DECL and use them later. */
2785 object
= copy_addr_to_reg (XEXP (object
, 0));
2787 size_mode
= TYPE_MODE (sizetype
);
2788 size
= convert_to_mode (size_mode
, size
, 1);
2789 size
= copy_to_mode_reg (size_mode
, size
);
2791 /* It is incorrect to use the libcall calling conventions to call
2792 memset in this context. This could be a user call to memset and
2793 the user may wish to examine the return value from memset. For
2794 targets where libcalls and normal calls have different conventions
2795 for returning pointers, we could end up generating incorrect code. */
2797 object_tree
= make_tree (ptr_type_node
, object
);
2798 if (!CONST_INT_P (val
))
2799 val
= convert_to_mode (TYPE_MODE (integer_type_node
), val
, 1);
2800 size_tree
= make_tree (sizetype
, size
);
2801 val_tree
= make_tree (integer_type_node
, val
);
2803 fn
= clear_storage_libcall_fn (true);
2804 call_expr
= build_call_expr (fn
, 3, object_tree
, val_tree
, size_tree
);
2805 CALL_EXPR_TAILCALL (call_expr
) = tailcall
;
2807 retval
= expand_normal (call_expr
);
2812 /* A subroutine of set_storage_via_libcall. Create the tree node
2813 for the function we use for block clears. */
2815 tree block_clear_fn
;
2818 init_block_clear_fn (const char *asmspec
)
2820 if (!block_clear_fn
)
2824 fn
= get_identifier ("memset");
2825 args
= build_function_type_list (ptr_type_node
, ptr_type_node
,
2826 integer_type_node
, sizetype
,
2829 fn
= build_decl (UNKNOWN_LOCATION
, FUNCTION_DECL
, fn
, args
);
2830 DECL_EXTERNAL (fn
) = 1;
2831 TREE_PUBLIC (fn
) = 1;
2832 DECL_ARTIFICIAL (fn
) = 1;
2833 TREE_NOTHROW (fn
) = 1;
2834 DECL_VISIBILITY (fn
) = VISIBILITY_DEFAULT
;
2835 DECL_VISIBILITY_SPECIFIED (fn
) = 1;
2837 block_clear_fn
= fn
;
2841 set_user_assembler_name (block_clear_fn
, asmspec
);
2845 clear_storage_libcall_fn (int for_call
)
2847 static bool emitted_extern
;
2849 if (!block_clear_fn
)
2850 init_block_clear_fn (NULL
);
2852 if (for_call
&& !emitted_extern
)
2854 emitted_extern
= true;
2855 make_decl_rtl (block_clear_fn
);
2858 return block_clear_fn
;
2861 /* Expand a setmem pattern; return true if successful. */
2864 set_storage_via_setmem (rtx object
, rtx size
, rtx val
, unsigned int align
,
2865 unsigned int expected_align
, HOST_WIDE_INT expected_size
)
2867 /* Try the most limited insn first, because there's no point
2868 including more than one in the machine description unless
2869 the more limited one has some advantage. */
2871 enum machine_mode mode
;
2873 if (expected_align
< align
)
2874 expected_align
= align
;
2876 for (mode
= GET_CLASS_NARROWEST_MODE (MODE_INT
); mode
!= VOIDmode
;
2877 mode
= GET_MODE_WIDER_MODE (mode
))
2879 enum insn_code code
= direct_optab_handler (setmem_optab
, mode
);
2881 if (code
!= CODE_FOR_nothing
2882 /* We don't need MODE to be narrower than
2883 BITS_PER_HOST_WIDE_INT here because if SIZE is less than
2884 the mode mask, as it is returned by the macro, it will
2885 definitely be less than the actual mode mask. */
2886 && ((CONST_INT_P (size
)
2887 && ((unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT
) INTVAL (size
)
2888 <= (GET_MODE_MASK (mode
) >> 1)))
2889 || GET_MODE_BITSIZE (mode
) >= BITS_PER_WORD
))
2891 struct expand_operand ops
[6];
2894 nops
= insn_data
[(int) code
].n_generator_args
;
2895 gcc_assert (nops
== 4 || nops
== 6);
2897 create_fixed_operand (&ops
[0], object
);
2898 /* The check above guarantees that this size conversion is valid. */
2899 create_convert_operand_to (&ops
[1], size
, mode
, true);
2900 create_convert_operand_from (&ops
[2], val
, byte_mode
, true);
2901 create_integer_operand (&ops
[3], align
/ BITS_PER_UNIT
);
2904 create_integer_operand (&ops
[4], expected_align
/ BITS_PER_UNIT
);
2905 create_integer_operand (&ops
[5], expected_size
);
2907 if (maybe_expand_insn (code
, nops
, ops
))
2916 /* Write to one of the components of the complex value CPLX. Write VAL to
2917 the real part if IMAG_P is false, and the imaginary part if its true. */
2920 write_complex_part (rtx cplx
, rtx val
, bool imag_p
)
2922 enum machine_mode cmode
;
2923 enum machine_mode imode
;
2926 if (GET_CODE (cplx
) == CONCAT
)
2928 emit_move_insn (XEXP (cplx
, imag_p
), val
);
2932 cmode
= GET_MODE (cplx
);
2933 imode
= GET_MODE_INNER (cmode
);
2934 ibitsize
= GET_MODE_BITSIZE (imode
);
2936 /* For MEMs simplify_gen_subreg may generate an invalid new address
2937 because, e.g., the original address is considered mode-dependent
2938 by the target, which restricts simplify_subreg from invoking
2939 adjust_address_nv. Instead of preparing fallback support for an
2940 invalid address, we call adjust_address_nv directly. */
2943 emit_move_insn (adjust_address_nv (cplx
, imode
,
2944 imag_p
? GET_MODE_SIZE (imode
) : 0),
2949 /* If the sub-object is at least word sized, then we know that subregging
2950 will work. This special case is important, since store_bit_field
2951 wants to operate on integer modes, and there's rarely an OImode to
2952 correspond to TCmode. */
2953 if (ibitsize
>= BITS_PER_WORD
2954 /* For hard regs we have exact predicates. Assume we can split
2955 the original object if it spans an even number of hard regs.
2956 This special case is important for SCmode on 64-bit platforms
2957 where the natural size of floating-point regs is 32-bit. */
2959 && REGNO (cplx
) < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER
2960 && hard_regno_nregs
[REGNO (cplx
)][cmode
] % 2 == 0))
2962 rtx part
= simplify_gen_subreg (imode
, cplx
, cmode
,
2963 imag_p
? GET_MODE_SIZE (imode
) : 0);
2966 emit_move_insn (part
, val
);
2970 /* simplify_gen_subreg may fail for sub-word MEMs. */
2971 gcc_assert (MEM_P (cplx
) && ibitsize
< BITS_PER_WORD
);
2974 store_bit_field (cplx
, ibitsize
, imag_p
? ibitsize
: 0, 0, 0, imode
, val
);
2977 /* Extract one of the components of the complex value CPLX. Extract the
2978 real part if IMAG_P is false, and the imaginary part if it's true. */
2981 read_complex_part (rtx cplx
, bool imag_p
)
2983 enum machine_mode cmode
, imode
;
2986 if (GET_CODE (cplx
) == CONCAT
)
2987 return XEXP (cplx
, imag_p
);
2989 cmode
= GET_MODE (cplx
);
2990 imode
= GET_MODE_INNER (cmode
);
2991 ibitsize
= GET_MODE_BITSIZE (imode
);
2993 /* Special case reads from complex constants that got spilled to memory. */
2994 if (MEM_P (cplx
) && GET_CODE (XEXP (cplx
, 0)) == SYMBOL_REF
)
2996 tree decl
= SYMBOL_REF_DECL (XEXP (cplx
, 0));
2997 if (decl
&& TREE_CODE (decl
) == COMPLEX_CST
)
2999 tree part
= imag_p
? TREE_IMAGPART (decl
) : TREE_REALPART (decl
);
3000 if (CONSTANT_CLASS_P (part
))
3001 return expand_expr (part
, NULL_RTX
, imode
, EXPAND_NORMAL
);
3005 /* For MEMs simplify_gen_subreg may generate an invalid new address
3006 because, e.g., the original address is considered mode-dependent
3007 by the target, which restricts simplify_subreg from invoking
3008 adjust_address_nv. Instead of preparing fallback support for an
3009 invalid address, we call adjust_address_nv directly. */
3011 return adjust_address_nv (cplx
, imode
,
3012 imag_p
? GET_MODE_SIZE (imode
) : 0);
3014 /* If the sub-object is at least word sized, then we know that subregging
3015 will work. This special case is important, since extract_bit_field
3016 wants to operate on integer modes, and there's rarely an OImode to
3017 correspond to TCmode. */
3018 if (ibitsize
>= BITS_PER_WORD
3019 /* For hard regs we have exact predicates. Assume we can split
3020 the original object if it spans an even number of hard regs.
3021 This special case is important for SCmode on 64-bit platforms
3022 where the natural size of floating-point regs is 32-bit. */
3024 && REGNO (cplx
) < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER
3025 && hard_regno_nregs
[REGNO (cplx
)][cmode
] % 2 == 0))
3027 rtx ret
= simplify_gen_subreg (imode
, cplx
, cmode
,
3028 imag_p
? GET_MODE_SIZE (imode
) : 0);
3032 /* simplify_gen_subreg may fail for sub-word MEMs. */
3033 gcc_assert (MEM_P (cplx
) && ibitsize
< BITS_PER_WORD
);
3036 return extract_bit_field (cplx
, ibitsize
, imag_p
? ibitsize
: 0,
3037 true, NULL_RTX
, imode
, imode
);
3040 /* A subroutine of emit_move_insn_1. Yet another lowpart generator.
3041 NEW_MODE and OLD_MODE are the same size. Return NULL if X cannot be
3042 represented in NEW_MODE. If FORCE is true, this will never happen, as
3043 we'll force-create a SUBREG if needed. */
3046 emit_move_change_mode (enum machine_mode new_mode
,
3047 enum machine_mode old_mode
, rtx x
, bool force
)
3051 if (push_operand (x
, GET_MODE (x
)))
3053 ret
= gen_rtx_MEM (new_mode
, XEXP (x
, 0));
3054 MEM_COPY_ATTRIBUTES (ret
, x
);
3058 /* We don't have to worry about changing the address since the
3059 size in bytes is supposed to be the same. */
3060 if (reload_in_progress
)
3062 /* Copy the MEM to change the mode and move any
3063 substitutions from the old MEM to the new one. */
3064 ret
= adjust_address_nv (x
, new_mode
, 0);
3065 copy_replacements (x
, ret
);
3068 ret
= adjust_address (x
, new_mode
, 0);
3072 /* Note that we do want simplify_subreg's behavior of validating
3073 that the new mode is ok for a hard register. If we were to use
3074 simplify_gen_subreg, we would create the subreg, but would
3075 probably run into the target not being able to implement it. */
3076 /* Except, of course, when FORCE is true, when this is exactly what
3077 we want. Which is needed for CCmodes on some targets. */
3079 ret
= simplify_gen_subreg (new_mode
, x
, old_mode
, 0);
3081 ret
= simplify_subreg (new_mode
, x
, old_mode
, 0);
3087 /* A subroutine of emit_move_insn_1. Generate a move from Y into X using
3088 an integer mode of the same size as MODE. Returns the instruction
3089 emitted, or NULL if such a move could not be generated. */
3092 emit_move_via_integer (enum machine_mode mode
, rtx x
, rtx y
, bool force
)
3094 enum machine_mode imode
;
3095 enum insn_code code
;
3097 /* There must exist a mode of the exact size we require. */
3098 imode
= int_mode_for_mode (mode
);
3099 if (imode
== BLKmode
)
3102 /* The target must support moves in this mode. */
3103 code
= optab_handler (mov_optab
, imode
);
3104 if (code
== CODE_FOR_nothing
)
3107 x
= emit_move_change_mode (imode
, mode
, x
, force
);
3110 y
= emit_move_change_mode (imode
, mode
, y
, force
);
3113 return emit_insn (GEN_FCN (code
) (x
, y
));
3116 /* A subroutine of emit_move_insn_1. X is a push_operand in MODE.
3117 Return an equivalent MEM that does not use an auto-increment. */
3120 emit_move_resolve_push (enum machine_mode mode
, rtx x
)
3122 enum rtx_code code
= GET_CODE (XEXP (x
, 0));
3123 HOST_WIDE_INT adjust
;
3126 adjust
= GET_MODE_SIZE (mode
);
3127 #ifdef PUSH_ROUNDING
3128 adjust
= PUSH_ROUNDING (adjust
);
3130 if (code
== PRE_DEC
|| code
== POST_DEC
)
3132 else if (code
== PRE_MODIFY
|| code
== POST_MODIFY
)
3134 rtx expr
= XEXP (XEXP (x
, 0), 1);
3137 gcc_assert (GET_CODE (expr
) == PLUS
|| GET_CODE (expr
) == MINUS
);
3138 gcc_assert (CONST_INT_P (XEXP (expr
, 1)));
3139 val
= INTVAL (XEXP (expr
, 1));
3140 if (GET_CODE (expr
) == MINUS
)
3142 gcc_assert (adjust
== val
|| adjust
== -val
);
3146 /* Do not use anti_adjust_stack, since we don't want to update
3147 stack_pointer_delta. */
3148 temp
= expand_simple_binop (Pmode
, PLUS
, stack_pointer_rtx
,
3149 gen_int_mode (adjust
, Pmode
), stack_pointer_rtx
,
3150 0, OPTAB_LIB_WIDEN
);
3151 if (temp
!= stack_pointer_rtx
)
3152 emit_move_insn (stack_pointer_rtx
, temp
);
3159 temp
= stack_pointer_rtx
;
3164 temp
= plus_constant (Pmode
, stack_pointer_rtx
, -adjust
);
3170 return replace_equiv_address (x
, temp
);
3173 /* A subroutine of emit_move_complex. Generate a move from Y into X.
3174 X is known to satisfy push_operand, and MODE is known to be complex.
3175 Returns the last instruction emitted. */
3178 emit_move_complex_push (enum machine_mode mode
, rtx x
, rtx y
)
3180 enum machine_mode submode
= GET_MODE_INNER (mode
);
3183 #ifdef PUSH_ROUNDING
3184 unsigned int submodesize
= GET_MODE_SIZE (submode
);
3186 /* In case we output to the stack, but the size is smaller than the
3187 machine can push exactly, we need to use move instructions. */
3188 if (PUSH_ROUNDING (submodesize
) != submodesize
)
3190 x
= emit_move_resolve_push (mode
, x
);
3191 return emit_move_insn (x
, y
);
3195 /* Note that the real part always precedes the imag part in memory
3196 regardless of machine's endianness. */
3197 switch (GET_CODE (XEXP (x
, 0)))
3211 emit_move_insn (gen_rtx_MEM (submode
, XEXP (x
, 0)),
3212 read_complex_part (y
, imag_first
));
3213 return emit_move_insn (gen_rtx_MEM (submode
, XEXP (x
, 0)),
3214 read_complex_part (y
, !imag_first
));
3217 /* A subroutine of emit_move_complex. Perform the move from Y to X
3218 via two moves of the parts. Returns the last instruction emitted. */
3221 emit_move_complex_parts (rtx x
, rtx y
)
3223 /* Show the output dies here. This is necessary for SUBREGs
3224 of pseudos since we cannot track their lifetimes correctly;
3225 hard regs shouldn't appear here except as return values. */
3226 if (!reload_completed
&& !reload_in_progress
3227 && REG_P (x
) && !reg_overlap_mentioned_p (x
, y
))
3230 write_complex_part (x
, read_complex_part (y
, false), false);
3231 write_complex_part (x
, read_complex_part (y
, true), true);
3233 return get_last_insn ();
3236 /* A subroutine of emit_move_insn_1. Generate a move from Y into X.
3237 MODE is known to be complex. Returns the last instruction emitted. */
3240 emit_move_complex (enum machine_mode mode
, rtx x
, rtx y
)
3244 /* Need to take special care for pushes, to maintain proper ordering
3245 of the data, and possibly extra padding. */
3246 if (push_operand (x
, mode
))
3247 return emit_move_complex_push (mode
, x
, y
);
3249 /* See if we can coerce the target into moving both values at once, except
3250 for floating point where we favor moving as parts if this is easy. */
3251 if (GET_MODE_CLASS (mode
) == MODE_COMPLEX_FLOAT
3252 && optab_handler (mov_optab
, GET_MODE_INNER (mode
)) != CODE_FOR_nothing
3254 && HARD_REGISTER_P (x
)
3255 && hard_regno_nregs
[REGNO (x
)][mode
] == 1)
3257 && HARD_REGISTER_P (y
)
3258 && hard_regno_nregs
[REGNO (y
)][mode
] == 1))
3260 /* Not possible if the values are inherently not adjacent. */
3261 else if (GET_CODE (x
) == CONCAT
|| GET_CODE (y
) == CONCAT
)
3263 /* Is possible if both are registers (or subregs of registers). */
3264 else if (register_operand (x
, mode
) && register_operand (y
, mode
))
3266 /* If one of the operands is a memory, and alignment constraints
3267 are friendly enough, we may be able to do combined memory operations.
3268 We do not attempt this if Y is a constant because that combination is
3269 usually better with the by-parts thing below. */
3270 else if ((MEM_P (x
) ? !CONSTANT_P (y
) : MEM_P (y
))
3271 && (!STRICT_ALIGNMENT
3272 || get_mode_alignment (mode
) == BIGGEST_ALIGNMENT
))
3281 /* For memory to memory moves, optimal behavior can be had with the
3282 existing block move logic. */
3283 if (MEM_P (x
) && MEM_P (y
))
3285 emit_block_move (x
, y
, GEN_INT (GET_MODE_SIZE (mode
)),
3286 BLOCK_OP_NO_LIBCALL
);
3287 return get_last_insn ();
3290 ret
= emit_move_via_integer (mode
, x
, y
, true);
3295 return emit_move_complex_parts (x
, y
);
3298 /* A subroutine of emit_move_insn_1. Generate a move from Y into X.
3299 MODE is known to be MODE_CC. Returns the last instruction emitted. */
3302 emit_move_ccmode (enum machine_mode mode
, rtx x
, rtx y
)
3306 /* Assume all MODE_CC modes are equivalent; if we have movcc, use it. */
3309 enum insn_code code
= optab_handler (mov_optab
, CCmode
);
3310 if (code
!= CODE_FOR_nothing
)
3312 x
= emit_move_change_mode (CCmode
, mode
, x
, true);
3313 y
= emit_move_change_mode (CCmode
, mode
, y
, true);
3314 return emit_insn (GEN_FCN (code
) (x
, y
));
3318 /* Otherwise, find the MODE_INT mode of the same width. */
3319 ret
= emit_move_via_integer (mode
, x
, y
, false);
3320 gcc_assert (ret
!= NULL
);
3324 /* Return true if word I of OP lies entirely in the
3325 undefined bits of a paradoxical subreg. */
3328 undefined_operand_subword_p (const_rtx op
, int i
)
3330 enum machine_mode innermode
, innermostmode
;
3332 if (GET_CODE (op
) != SUBREG
)
3334 innermode
= GET_MODE (op
);
3335 innermostmode
= GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (op
));
3336 offset
= i
* UNITS_PER_WORD
+ SUBREG_BYTE (op
);
3337 /* The SUBREG_BYTE represents offset, as if the value were stored in
3338 memory, except for a paradoxical subreg where we define
3339 SUBREG_BYTE to be 0; undo this exception as in
3341 if (SUBREG_BYTE (op
) == 0
3342 && GET_MODE_SIZE (innermostmode
) < GET_MODE_SIZE (innermode
))
3344 int difference
= (GET_MODE_SIZE (innermostmode
) - GET_MODE_SIZE (innermode
));
3345 if (WORDS_BIG_ENDIAN
)
3346 offset
+= (difference
/ UNITS_PER_WORD
) * UNITS_PER_WORD
;
3347 if (BYTES_BIG_ENDIAN
)
3348 offset
+= difference
% UNITS_PER_WORD
;
3350 if (offset
>= GET_MODE_SIZE (innermostmode
)
3351 || offset
<= -GET_MODE_SIZE (word_mode
))
3356 /* A subroutine of emit_move_insn_1. Generate a move from Y into X.
3357 MODE is any multi-word or full-word mode that lacks a move_insn
3358 pattern. Note that you will get better code if you define such
3359 patterns, even if they must turn into multiple assembler instructions. */
3362 emit_move_multi_word (enum machine_mode mode
, rtx x
, rtx y
)
3369 gcc_assert (GET_MODE_SIZE (mode
) >= UNITS_PER_WORD
);
3371 /* If X is a push on the stack, do the push now and replace
3372 X with a reference to the stack pointer. */
3373 if (push_operand (x
, mode
))
3374 x
= emit_move_resolve_push (mode
, x
);
3376 /* If we are in reload, see if either operand is a MEM whose address
3377 is scheduled for replacement. */
3378 if (reload_in_progress
&& MEM_P (x
)
3379 && (inner
= find_replacement (&XEXP (x
, 0))) != XEXP (x
, 0))
3380 x
= replace_equiv_address_nv (x
, inner
);
3381 if (reload_in_progress
&& MEM_P (y
)
3382 && (inner
= find_replacement (&XEXP (y
, 0))) != XEXP (y
, 0))
3383 y
= replace_equiv_address_nv (y
, inner
);
3387 need_clobber
= false;
3389 i
< (GET_MODE_SIZE (mode
) + (UNITS_PER_WORD
- 1)) / UNITS_PER_WORD
;
3392 rtx xpart
= operand_subword (x
, i
, 1, mode
);
3395 /* Do not generate code for a move if it would come entirely
3396 from the undefined bits of a paradoxical subreg. */
3397 if (undefined_operand_subword_p (y
, i
))
3400 ypart
= operand_subword (y
, i
, 1, mode
);
3402 /* If we can't get a part of Y, put Y into memory if it is a
3403 constant. Otherwise, force it into a register. Then we must
3404 be able to get a part of Y. */
3405 if (ypart
== 0 && CONSTANT_P (y
))
3407 y
= use_anchored_address (force_const_mem (mode
, y
));
3408 ypart
= operand_subword (y
, i
, 1, mode
);
3410 else if (ypart
== 0)
3411 ypart
= operand_subword_force (y
, i
, mode
);
3413 gcc_assert (xpart
&& ypart
);
3415 need_clobber
|= (GET_CODE (xpart
) == SUBREG
);
3417 last_insn
= emit_move_insn (xpart
, ypart
);
3423 /* Show the output dies here. This is necessary for SUBREGs
3424 of pseudos since we cannot track their lifetimes correctly;
3425 hard regs shouldn't appear here except as return values.
3426 We never want to emit such a clobber after reload. */
3428 && ! (reload_in_progress
|| reload_completed
)
3429 && need_clobber
!= 0)
3437 /* Low level part of emit_move_insn.
3438 Called just like emit_move_insn, but assumes X and Y
3439 are basically valid. */
3442 emit_move_insn_1 (rtx x
, rtx y
)
3444 enum machine_mode mode
= GET_MODE (x
);
3445 enum insn_code code
;
3447 gcc_assert ((unsigned int) mode
< (unsigned int) MAX_MACHINE_MODE
);
3449 code
= optab_handler (mov_optab
, mode
);
3450 if (code
!= CODE_FOR_nothing
)
3451 return emit_insn (GEN_FCN (code
) (x
, y
));
3453 /* Expand complex moves by moving real part and imag part. */
3454 if (COMPLEX_MODE_P (mode
))
3455 return emit_move_complex (mode
, x
, y
);
3457 if (GET_MODE_CLASS (mode
) == MODE_DECIMAL_FLOAT
3458 || ALL_FIXED_POINT_MODE_P (mode
))
3460 rtx result
= emit_move_via_integer (mode
, x
, y
, true);
3462 /* If we can't find an integer mode, use multi words. */
3466 return emit_move_multi_word (mode
, x
, y
);
3469 if (GET_MODE_CLASS (mode
) == MODE_CC
)
3470 return emit_move_ccmode (mode
, x
, y
);
3472 /* Try using a move pattern for the corresponding integer mode. This is
3473 only safe when simplify_subreg can convert MODE constants into integer
3474 constants. At present, it can only do this reliably if the value
3475 fits within a HOST_WIDE_INT. */
3476 if (!CONSTANT_P (y
) || GET_MODE_BITSIZE (mode
) <= HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT
)
3478 rtx ret
= emit_move_via_integer (mode
, x
, y
, lra_in_progress
);
3482 if (! lra_in_progress
|| recog (PATTERN (ret
), ret
, 0) >= 0)
3487 return emit_move_multi_word (mode
, x
, y
);
3490 /* Generate code to copy Y into X.
3491 Both Y and X must have the same mode, except that
3492 Y can be a constant with VOIDmode.
3493 This mode cannot be BLKmode; use emit_block_move for that.
3495 Return the last instruction emitted. */
3498 emit_move_insn (rtx x
, rtx y
)
3500 enum machine_mode mode
= GET_MODE (x
);
3501 rtx y_cst
= NULL_RTX
;
3504 gcc_assert (mode
!= BLKmode
3505 && (GET_MODE (y
) == mode
|| GET_MODE (y
) == VOIDmode
));
3510 && SCALAR_FLOAT_MODE_P (GET_MODE (x
))
3511 && (last_insn
= compress_float_constant (x
, y
)))
3516 if (!targetm
.legitimate_constant_p (mode
, y
))
3518 y
= force_const_mem (mode
, y
);
3520 /* If the target's cannot_force_const_mem prevented the spill,
3521 assume that the target's move expanders will also take care
3522 of the non-legitimate constant. */
3526 y
= use_anchored_address (y
);
3530 /* If X or Y are memory references, verify that their addresses are valid
3533 && (! memory_address_addr_space_p (GET_MODE (x
), XEXP (x
, 0),
3535 && ! push_operand (x
, GET_MODE (x
))))
3536 x
= validize_mem (x
);
3539 && ! memory_address_addr_space_p (GET_MODE (y
), XEXP (y
, 0),
3540 MEM_ADDR_SPACE (y
)))
3541 y
= validize_mem (y
);
3543 gcc_assert (mode
!= BLKmode
);
3545 last_insn
= emit_move_insn_1 (x
, y
);
3547 if (y_cst
&& REG_P (x
)
3548 && (set
= single_set (last_insn
)) != NULL_RTX
3549 && SET_DEST (set
) == x
3550 && ! rtx_equal_p (y_cst
, SET_SRC (set
)))
3551 set_unique_reg_note (last_insn
, REG_EQUAL
, copy_rtx (y_cst
));
3556 /* If Y is representable exactly in a narrower mode, and the target can
3557 perform the extension directly from constant or memory, then emit the
3558 move as an extension. */
3561 compress_float_constant (rtx x
, rtx y
)
3563 enum machine_mode dstmode
= GET_MODE (x
);
3564 enum machine_mode orig_srcmode
= GET_MODE (y
);
3565 enum machine_mode srcmode
;
3567 int oldcost
, newcost
;
3568 bool speed
= optimize_insn_for_speed_p ();
3570 REAL_VALUE_FROM_CONST_DOUBLE (r
, y
);
3572 if (targetm
.legitimate_constant_p (dstmode
, y
))
3573 oldcost
= set_src_cost (y
, speed
);
3575 oldcost
= set_src_cost (force_const_mem (dstmode
, y
), speed
);
3577 for (srcmode
= GET_CLASS_NARROWEST_MODE (GET_MODE_CLASS (orig_srcmode
));
3578 srcmode
!= orig_srcmode
;
3579 srcmode
= GET_MODE_WIDER_MODE (srcmode
))
3582 rtx trunc_y
, last_insn
;
3584 /* Skip if the target can't extend this way. */
3585 ic
= can_extend_p (dstmode
, srcmode
, 0);
3586 if (ic
== CODE_FOR_nothing
)
3589 /* Skip if the narrowed value isn't exact. */
3590 if (! exact_real_truncate (srcmode
, &r
))
3593 trunc_y
= CONST_DOUBLE_FROM_REAL_VALUE (r
, srcmode
);
3595 if (targetm
.legitimate_constant_p (srcmode
, trunc_y
))
3597 /* Skip if the target needs extra instructions to perform
3599 if (!insn_operand_matches (ic
, 1, trunc_y
))
3601 /* This is valid, but may not be cheaper than the original. */
3602 newcost
= set_src_cost (gen_rtx_FLOAT_EXTEND (dstmode
, trunc_y
),
3604 if (oldcost
< newcost
)
3607 else if (float_extend_from_mem
[dstmode
][srcmode
])
3609 trunc_y
= force_const_mem (srcmode
, trunc_y
);
3610 /* This is valid, but may not be cheaper than the original. */
3611 newcost
= set_src_cost (gen_rtx_FLOAT_EXTEND (dstmode
, trunc_y
),
3613 if (oldcost
< newcost
)
3615 trunc_y
= validize_mem (trunc_y
);
3620 /* For CSE's benefit, force the compressed constant pool entry
3621 into a new pseudo. This constant may be used in different modes,
3622 and if not, combine will put things back together for us. */
3623 trunc_y
= force_reg (srcmode
, trunc_y
);
3624 emit_unop_insn (ic
, x
, trunc_y
, UNKNOWN
);
3625 last_insn
= get_last_insn ();
3628 set_unique_reg_note (last_insn
, REG_EQUAL
, y
);
3636 /* Pushing data onto the stack. */
3638 /* Push a block of length SIZE (perhaps variable)
3639 and return an rtx to address the beginning of the block.
3640 The value may be virtual_outgoing_args_rtx.
3642 EXTRA is the number of bytes of padding to push in addition to SIZE.
3643 BELOW nonzero means this padding comes at low addresses;
3644 otherwise, the padding comes at high addresses. */
3647 push_block (rtx size
, int extra
, int below
)
3651 size
= convert_modes (Pmode
, ptr_mode
, size
, 1);
3652 if (CONSTANT_P (size
))
3653 anti_adjust_stack (plus_constant (Pmode
, size
, extra
));
3654 else if (REG_P (size
) && extra
== 0)
3655 anti_adjust_stack (size
);
3658 temp
= copy_to_mode_reg (Pmode
, size
);
3660 temp
= expand_binop (Pmode
, add_optab
, temp
,
3661 gen_int_mode (extra
, Pmode
),
3662 temp
, 0, OPTAB_LIB_WIDEN
);
3663 anti_adjust_stack (temp
);
3666 #ifndef STACK_GROWS_DOWNWARD
3672 temp
= virtual_outgoing_args_rtx
;
3673 if (extra
!= 0 && below
)
3674 temp
= plus_constant (Pmode
, temp
, extra
);
3678 if (CONST_INT_P (size
))
3679 temp
= plus_constant (Pmode
, virtual_outgoing_args_rtx
,
3680 -INTVAL (size
) - (below
? 0 : extra
));
3681 else if (extra
!= 0 && !below
)
3682 temp
= gen_rtx_PLUS (Pmode
, virtual_outgoing_args_rtx
,
3683 negate_rtx (Pmode
, plus_constant (Pmode
, size
,
3686 temp
= gen_rtx_PLUS (Pmode
, virtual_outgoing_args_rtx
,
3687 negate_rtx (Pmode
, size
));
3690 return memory_address (GET_CLASS_NARROWEST_MODE (MODE_INT
), temp
);
3693 /* A utility routine that returns the base of an auto-inc memory, or NULL. */
3696 mem_autoinc_base (rtx mem
)
3700 rtx addr
= XEXP (mem
, 0);
3701 if (GET_RTX_CLASS (GET_CODE (addr
)) == RTX_AUTOINC
)
3702 return XEXP (addr
, 0);
3707 /* A utility routine used here, in reload, and in try_split. The insns
3708 after PREV up to and including LAST are known to adjust the stack,
3709 with a final value of END_ARGS_SIZE. Iterate backward from LAST
3710 placing notes as appropriate. PREV may be NULL, indicating the
3711 entire insn sequence prior to LAST should be scanned.
3713 The set of allowed stack pointer modifications is small:
3714 (1) One or more auto-inc style memory references (aka pushes),
3715 (2) One or more addition/subtraction with the SP as destination,
3716 (3) A single move insn with the SP as destination,
3717 (4) A call_pop insn,
3718 (5) Noreturn call insns if !ACCUMULATE_OUTGOING_ARGS.
3720 Insns in the sequence that do not modify the SP are ignored,
3721 except for noreturn calls.
3723 The return value is the amount of adjustment that can be trivially
3724 verified, via immediate operand or auto-inc. If the adjustment
3725 cannot be trivially extracted, the return value is INT_MIN. */
3728 find_args_size_adjust (rtx insn
)
3733 pat
= PATTERN (insn
);
3736 /* Look for a call_pop pattern. */
3739 /* We have to allow non-call_pop patterns for the case
3740 of emit_single_push_insn of a TLS address. */
3741 if (GET_CODE (pat
) != PARALLEL
)
3744 /* All call_pop have a stack pointer adjust in the parallel.
3745 The call itself is always first, and the stack adjust is
3746 usually last, so search from the end. */
3747 for (i
= XVECLEN (pat
, 0) - 1; i
> 0; --i
)
3749 set
= XVECEXP (pat
, 0, i
);
3750 if (GET_CODE (set
) != SET
)
3752 dest
= SET_DEST (set
);
3753 if (dest
== stack_pointer_rtx
)
3756 /* We'd better have found the stack pointer adjust. */
3759 /* Fall through to process the extracted SET and DEST
3760 as if it was a standalone insn. */
3762 else if (GET_CODE (pat
) == SET
)
3764 else if ((set
= single_set (insn
)) != NULL
)
3766 else if (GET_CODE (pat
) == PARALLEL
)
3768 /* ??? Some older ports use a parallel with a stack adjust
3769 and a store for a PUSH_ROUNDING pattern, rather than a
3770 PRE/POST_MODIFY rtx. Don't force them to update yet... */
3771 /* ??? See h8300 and m68k, pushqi1. */
3772 for (i
= XVECLEN (pat
, 0) - 1; i
>= 0; --i
)
3774 set
= XVECEXP (pat
, 0, i
);
3775 if (GET_CODE (set
) != SET
)
3777 dest
= SET_DEST (set
);
3778 if (dest
== stack_pointer_rtx
)
3781 /* We do not expect an auto-inc of the sp in the parallel. */
3782 gcc_checking_assert (mem_autoinc_base (dest
) != stack_pointer_rtx
);
3783 gcc_checking_assert (mem_autoinc_base (SET_SRC (set
))
3784 != stack_pointer_rtx
);
3792 dest
= SET_DEST (set
);
3794 /* Look for direct modifications of the stack pointer. */
3795 if (REG_P (dest
) && REGNO (dest
) == STACK_POINTER_REGNUM
)
3797 /* Look for a trivial adjustment, otherwise assume nothing. */
3798 /* Note that the SPU restore_stack_block pattern refers to
3799 the stack pointer in V4SImode. Consider that non-trivial. */
3800 if (SCALAR_INT_MODE_P (GET_MODE (dest
))
3801 && GET_CODE (SET_SRC (set
)) == PLUS
3802 && XEXP (SET_SRC (set
), 0) == stack_pointer_rtx
3803 && CONST_INT_P (XEXP (SET_SRC (set
), 1)))
3804 return INTVAL (XEXP (SET_SRC (set
), 1));
3805 /* ??? Reload can generate no-op moves, which will be cleaned
3806 up later. Recognize it and continue searching. */
3807 else if (rtx_equal_p (dest
, SET_SRC (set
)))
3810 return HOST_WIDE_INT_MIN
;
3816 /* Otherwise only think about autoinc patterns. */
3817 if (mem_autoinc_base (dest
) == stack_pointer_rtx
)
3820 gcc_checking_assert (mem_autoinc_base (SET_SRC (set
))
3821 != stack_pointer_rtx
);
3823 else if (mem_autoinc_base (SET_SRC (set
)) == stack_pointer_rtx
)
3824 mem
= SET_SRC (set
);
3828 addr
= XEXP (mem
, 0);
3829 switch (GET_CODE (addr
))
3833 return GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (mem
));
3836 return -GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (mem
));
3839 addr
= XEXP (addr
, 1);
3840 gcc_assert (GET_CODE (addr
) == PLUS
);
3841 gcc_assert (XEXP (addr
, 0) == stack_pointer_rtx
);
3842 gcc_assert (CONST_INT_P (XEXP (addr
, 1)));
3843 return INTVAL (XEXP (addr
, 1));
3851 fixup_args_size_notes (rtx prev
, rtx last
, int end_args_size
)
3853 int args_size
= end_args_size
;
3854 bool saw_unknown
= false;
3857 for (insn
= last
; insn
!= prev
; insn
= PREV_INSN (insn
))
3859 HOST_WIDE_INT this_delta
;
3861 if (!NONDEBUG_INSN_P (insn
))
3864 this_delta
= find_args_size_adjust (insn
);
3865 if (this_delta
== 0)
3868 || ACCUMULATE_OUTGOING_ARGS
3869 || find_reg_note (insn
, REG_NORETURN
, NULL_RTX
) == NULL_RTX
)
3873 gcc_assert (!saw_unknown
);
3874 if (this_delta
== HOST_WIDE_INT_MIN
)
3877 add_reg_note (insn
, REG_ARGS_SIZE
, GEN_INT (args_size
));
3878 #ifdef STACK_GROWS_DOWNWARD
3879 this_delta
= -(unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT
) this_delta
;
3881 args_size
-= this_delta
;
3884 return saw_unknown
? INT_MIN
: args_size
;
3887 #ifdef PUSH_ROUNDING
3888 /* Emit single push insn. */
3891 emit_single_push_insn_1 (enum machine_mode mode
, rtx x
, tree type
)
3894 unsigned rounded_size
= PUSH_ROUNDING (GET_MODE_SIZE (mode
));
3896 enum insn_code icode
;
3898 stack_pointer_delta
+= PUSH_ROUNDING (GET_MODE_SIZE (mode
));
3899 /* If there is push pattern, use it. Otherwise try old way of throwing
3900 MEM representing push operation to move expander. */
3901 icode
= optab_handler (push_optab
, mode
);
3902 if (icode
!= CODE_FOR_nothing
)
3904 struct expand_operand ops
[1];
3906 create_input_operand (&ops
[0], x
, mode
);
3907 if (maybe_expand_insn (icode
, 1, ops
))
3910 if (GET_MODE_SIZE (mode
) == rounded_size
)
3911 dest_addr
= gen_rtx_fmt_e (STACK_PUSH_CODE
, Pmode
, stack_pointer_rtx
);
3912 /* If we are to pad downward, adjust the stack pointer first and
3913 then store X into the stack location using an offset. This is
3914 because emit_move_insn does not know how to pad; it does not have
3916 else if (FUNCTION_ARG_PADDING (mode
, type
) == downward
)
3918 unsigned padding_size
= rounded_size
- GET_MODE_SIZE (mode
);
3919 HOST_WIDE_INT offset
;
3921 emit_move_insn (stack_pointer_rtx
,
3922 expand_binop (Pmode
,
3923 #ifdef STACK_GROWS_DOWNWARD
3929 gen_int_mode (rounded_size
, Pmode
),
3930 NULL_RTX
, 0, OPTAB_LIB_WIDEN
));
3932 offset
= (HOST_WIDE_INT
) padding_size
;
3933 #ifdef STACK_GROWS_DOWNWARD
3934 if (STACK_PUSH_CODE
== POST_DEC
)
3935 /* We have already decremented the stack pointer, so get the
3937 offset
+= (HOST_WIDE_INT
) rounded_size
;
3939 if (STACK_PUSH_CODE
== POST_INC
)
3940 /* We have already incremented the stack pointer, so get the
3942 offset
-= (HOST_WIDE_INT
) rounded_size
;
3944 dest_addr
= gen_rtx_PLUS (Pmode
, stack_pointer_rtx
,
3945 gen_int_mode (offset
, Pmode
));
3949 #ifdef STACK_GROWS_DOWNWARD
3950 /* ??? This seems wrong if STACK_PUSH_CODE == POST_DEC. */
3951 dest_addr
= gen_rtx_PLUS (Pmode
, stack_pointer_rtx
,
3952 gen_int_mode (-(HOST_WIDE_INT
) rounded_size
,
3955 /* ??? This seems wrong if STACK_PUSH_CODE == POST_INC. */
3956 dest_addr
= gen_rtx_PLUS (Pmode
, stack_pointer_rtx
,
3957 gen_int_mode (rounded_size
, Pmode
));
3959 dest_addr
= gen_rtx_PRE_MODIFY (Pmode
, stack_pointer_rtx
, dest_addr
);
3962 dest
= gen_rtx_MEM (mode
, dest_addr
);
3966 set_mem_attributes (dest
, type
, 1);
3968 if (flag_optimize_sibling_calls
)
3969 /* Function incoming arguments may overlap with sibling call
3970 outgoing arguments and we cannot allow reordering of reads
3971 from function arguments with stores to outgoing arguments
3972 of sibling calls. */
3973 set_mem_alias_set (dest
, 0);
3975 emit_move_insn (dest
, x
);
3978 /* Emit and annotate a single push insn. */
3981 emit_single_push_insn (enum machine_mode mode
, rtx x
, tree type
)
3983 int delta
, old_delta
= stack_pointer_delta
;
3984 rtx prev
= get_last_insn ();
3987 emit_single_push_insn_1 (mode
, x
, type
);
3989 last
= get_last_insn ();
3991 /* Notice the common case where we emitted exactly one insn. */
3992 if (PREV_INSN (last
) == prev
)
3994 add_reg_note (last
, REG_ARGS_SIZE
, GEN_INT (stack_pointer_delta
));
3998 delta
= fixup_args_size_notes (prev
, last
, stack_pointer_delta
);
3999 gcc_assert (delta
== INT_MIN
|| delta
== old_delta
);
4003 /* Generate code to push X onto the stack, assuming it has mode MODE and
4005 MODE is redundant except when X is a CONST_INT (since they don't
4007 SIZE is an rtx for the size of data to be copied (in bytes),
4008 needed only if X is BLKmode.
4010 ALIGN (in bits) is maximum alignment we can assume.
4012 If PARTIAL and REG are both nonzero, then copy that many of the first
4013 bytes of X into registers starting with REG, and push the rest of X.
4014 The amount of space pushed is decreased by PARTIAL bytes.
4015 REG must be a hard register in this case.
4016 If REG is zero but PARTIAL is not, take any all others actions for an
4017 argument partially in registers, but do not actually load any
4020 EXTRA is the amount in bytes of extra space to leave next to this arg.
4021 This is ignored if an argument block has already been allocated.
4023 On a machine that lacks real push insns, ARGS_ADDR is the address of
4024 the bottom of the argument block for this call. We use indexing off there
4025 to store the arg. On machines with push insns, ARGS_ADDR is 0 when a
4026 argument block has not been preallocated.
4028 ARGS_SO_FAR is the size of args previously pushed for this call.
4030 REG_PARM_STACK_SPACE is nonzero if functions require stack space
4031 for arguments passed in registers. If nonzero, it will be the number
4032 of bytes required. */
4035 emit_push_insn (rtx x
, enum machine_mode mode
, tree type
, rtx size
,
4036 unsigned int align
, int partial
, rtx reg
, int extra
,
4037 rtx args_addr
, rtx args_so_far
, int reg_parm_stack_space
,
4041 enum direction stack_direction
4042 #ifdef STACK_GROWS_DOWNWARD
4048 /* Decide where to pad the argument: `downward' for below,
4049 `upward' for above, or `none' for don't pad it.
4050 Default is below for small data on big-endian machines; else above. */
4051 enum direction where_pad
= FUNCTION_ARG_PADDING (mode
, type
);
4053 /* Invert direction if stack is post-decrement.
4055 if (STACK_PUSH_CODE
== POST_DEC
)
4056 if (where_pad
!= none
)
4057 where_pad
= (where_pad
== downward
? upward
: downward
);
4062 || (STRICT_ALIGNMENT
&& align
< GET_MODE_ALIGNMENT (mode
)))
4064 /* Copy a block into the stack, entirely or partially. */
4071 offset
= partial
% (PARM_BOUNDARY
/ BITS_PER_UNIT
);
4072 used
= partial
- offset
;
4074 if (mode
!= BLKmode
)
4076 /* A value is to be stored in an insufficiently aligned
4077 stack slot; copy via a suitably aligned slot if
4079 size
= GEN_INT (GET_MODE_SIZE (mode
));
4080 if (!MEM_P (xinner
))
4082 temp
= assign_temp (type
, 1, 1);
4083 emit_move_insn (temp
, xinner
);
4090 /* USED is now the # of bytes we need not copy to the stack
4091 because registers will take care of them. */
4094 xinner
= adjust_address (xinner
, BLKmode
, used
);
4096 /* If the partial register-part of the arg counts in its stack size,
4097 skip the part of stack space corresponding to the registers.
4098 Otherwise, start copying to the beginning of the stack space,
4099 by setting SKIP to 0. */
4100 skip
= (reg_parm_stack_space
== 0) ? 0 : used
;
4102 #ifdef PUSH_ROUNDING
4103 /* Do it with several push insns if that doesn't take lots of insns
4104 and if there is no difficulty with push insns that skip bytes
4105 on the stack for alignment purposes. */
4108 && CONST_INT_P (size
)
4110 && MEM_ALIGN (xinner
) >= align
4111 && (MOVE_BY_PIECES_P ((unsigned) INTVAL (size
) - used
, align
))
4112 /* Here we avoid the case of a structure whose weak alignment
4113 forces many pushes of a small amount of data,
4114 and such small pushes do rounding that causes trouble. */
4115 && ((! SLOW_UNALIGNED_ACCESS (word_mode
, align
))
4116 || align
>= BIGGEST_ALIGNMENT
4117 || (PUSH_ROUNDING (align
/ BITS_PER_UNIT
)
4118 == (align
/ BITS_PER_UNIT
)))
4119 && (HOST_WIDE_INT
) PUSH_ROUNDING (INTVAL (size
)) == INTVAL (size
))
4121 /* Push padding now if padding above and stack grows down,
4122 or if padding below and stack grows up.
4123 But if space already allocated, this has already been done. */
4124 if (extra
&& args_addr
== 0
4125 && where_pad
!= none
&& where_pad
!= stack_direction
)
4126 anti_adjust_stack (GEN_INT (extra
));
4128 move_by_pieces (NULL
, xinner
, INTVAL (size
) - used
, align
, 0);
4131 #endif /* PUSH_ROUNDING */
4135 /* Otherwise make space on the stack and copy the data
4136 to the address of that space. */
4138 /* Deduct words put into registers from the size we must copy. */
4141 if (CONST_INT_P (size
))
4142 size
= GEN_INT (INTVAL (size
) - used
);
4144 size
= expand_binop (GET_MODE (size
), sub_optab
, size
,
4145 gen_int_mode (used
, GET_MODE (size
)),
4146 NULL_RTX
, 0, OPTAB_LIB_WIDEN
);
4149 /* Get the address of the stack space.
4150 In this case, we do not deal with EXTRA separately.
4151 A single stack adjust will do. */
4154 temp
= push_block (size
, extra
, where_pad
== downward
);
4157 else if (CONST_INT_P (args_so_far
))
4158 temp
= memory_address (BLKmode
,
4159 plus_constant (Pmode
, args_addr
,
4160 skip
+ INTVAL (args_so_far
)));
4162 temp
= memory_address (BLKmode
,
4163 plus_constant (Pmode
,
4164 gen_rtx_PLUS (Pmode
,
4169 if (!ACCUMULATE_OUTGOING_ARGS
)
4171 /* If the source is referenced relative to the stack pointer,
4172 copy it to another register to stabilize it. We do not need
4173 to do this if we know that we won't be changing sp. */
4175 if (reg_mentioned_p (virtual_stack_dynamic_rtx
, temp
)
4176 || reg_mentioned_p (virtual_outgoing_args_rtx
, temp
))
4177 temp
= copy_to_reg (temp
);
4180 target
= gen_rtx_MEM (BLKmode
, temp
);
4182 /* We do *not* set_mem_attributes here, because incoming arguments
4183 may overlap with sibling call outgoing arguments and we cannot
4184 allow reordering of reads from function arguments with stores
4185 to outgoing arguments of sibling calls. We do, however, want
4186 to record the alignment of the stack slot. */
4187 /* ALIGN may well be better aligned than TYPE, e.g. due to
4188 PARM_BOUNDARY. Assume the caller isn't lying. */
4189 set_mem_align (target
, align
);
4191 emit_block_move (target
, xinner
, size
, BLOCK_OP_CALL_PARM
);
4194 else if (partial
> 0)
4196 /* Scalar partly in registers. */
4198 int size
= GET_MODE_SIZE (mode
) / UNITS_PER_WORD
;
4201 /* # bytes of start of argument
4202 that we must make space for but need not store. */
4203 int offset
= partial
% (PARM_BOUNDARY
/ BITS_PER_UNIT
);
4204 int args_offset
= INTVAL (args_so_far
);
4207 /* Push padding now if padding above and stack grows down,
4208 or if padding below and stack grows up.
4209 But if space already allocated, this has already been done. */
4210 if (extra
&& args_addr
== 0
4211 && where_pad
!= none
&& where_pad
!= stack_direction
)
4212 anti_adjust_stack (GEN_INT (extra
));
4214 /* If we make space by pushing it, we might as well push
4215 the real data. Otherwise, we can leave OFFSET nonzero
4216 and leave the space uninitialized. */
4220 /* Now NOT_STACK gets the number of words that we don't need to
4221 allocate on the stack. Convert OFFSET to words too. */
4222 not_stack
= (partial
- offset
) / UNITS_PER_WORD
;
4223 offset
/= UNITS_PER_WORD
;
4225 /* If the partial register-part of the arg counts in its stack size,
4226 skip the part of stack space corresponding to the registers.
4227 Otherwise, start copying to the beginning of the stack space,
4228 by setting SKIP to 0. */
4229 skip
= (reg_parm_stack_space
== 0) ? 0 : not_stack
;
4231 if (CONSTANT_P (x
) && !targetm
.legitimate_constant_p (mode
, x
))
4232 x
= validize_mem (force_const_mem (mode
, x
));
4234 /* If X is a hard register in a non-integer mode, copy it into a pseudo;
4235 SUBREGs of such registers are not allowed. */
4236 if ((REG_P (x
) && REGNO (x
) < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER
4237 && GET_MODE_CLASS (GET_MODE (x
)) != MODE_INT
))
4238 x
= copy_to_reg (x
);
4240 /* Loop over all the words allocated on the stack for this arg. */
4241 /* We can do it by words, because any scalar bigger than a word
4242 has a size a multiple of a word. */
4243 #ifndef PUSH_ARGS_REVERSED
4244 for (i
= not_stack
; i
< size
; i
++)
4246 for (i
= size
- 1; i
>= not_stack
; i
--)
4248 if (i
>= not_stack
+ offset
)
4249 emit_push_insn (operand_subword_force (x
, i
, mode
),
4250 word_mode
, NULL_TREE
, NULL_RTX
, align
, 0, NULL_RTX
,
4252 GEN_INT (args_offset
+ ((i
- not_stack
+ skip
)
4254 reg_parm_stack_space
, alignment_pad
);
4261 /* Push padding now if padding above and stack grows down,
4262 or if padding below and stack grows up.
4263 But if space already allocated, this has already been done. */
4264 if (extra
&& args_addr
== 0
4265 && where_pad
!= none
&& where_pad
!= stack_direction
)
4266 anti_adjust_stack (GEN_INT (extra
));
4268 #ifdef PUSH_ROUNDING
4269 if (args_addr
== 0 && PUSH_ARGS
)
4270 emit_single_push_insn (mode
, x
, type
);
4274 if (CONST_INT_P (args_so_far
))
4276 = memory_address (mode
,
4277 plus_constant (Pmode
, args_addr
,
4278 INTVAL (args_so_far
)));
4280 addr
= memory_address (mode
, gen_rtx_PLUS (Pmode
, args_addr
,
4282 dest
= gen_rtx_MEM (mode
, addr
);
4284 /* We do *not* set_mem_attributes here, because incoming arguments
4285 may overlap with sibling call outgoing arguments and we cannot
4286 allow reordering of reads from function arguments with stores
4287 to outgoing arguments of sibling calls. We do, however, want
4288 to record the alignment of the stack slot. */
4289 /* ALIGN may well be better aligned than TYPE, e.g. due to
4290 PARM_BOUNDARY. Assume the caller isn't lying. */
4291 set_mem_align (dest
, align
);
4293 emit_move_insn (dest
, x
);
4297 /* If part should go in registers, copy that part
4298 into the appropriate registers. Do this now, at the end,
4299 since mem-to-mem copies above may do function calls. */
4300 if (partial
> 0 && reg
!= 0)
4302 /* Handle calls that pass values in multiple non-contiguous locations.
4303 The Irix 6 ABI has examples of this. */
4304 if (GET_CODE (reg
) == PARALLEL
)
4305 emit_group_load (reg
, x
, type
, -1);
4308 gcc_assert (partial
% UNITS_PER_WORD
== 0);
4309 move_block_to_reg (REGNO (reg
), x
, partial
/ UNITS_PER_WORD
, mode
);
4313 if (extra
&& args_addr
== 0 && where_pad
== stack_direction
)
4314 anti_adjust_stack (GEN_INT (extra
));
4316 if (alignment_pad
&& args_addr
== 0)
4317 anti_adjust_stack (alignment_pad
);
4320 /* Return X if X can be used as a subtarget in a sequence of arithmetic
4324 get_subtarget (rtx x
)
4328 /* Only registers can be subtargets. */
4330 /* Don't use hard regs to avoid extending their life. */
4331 || REGNO (x
) < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER
4335 /* A subroutine of expand_assignment. Optimize FIELD op= VAL, where
4336 FIELD is a bitfield. Returns true if the optimization was successful,
4337 and there's nothing else to do. */
4340 optimize_bitfield_assignment_op (unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT bitsize
,
4341 unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT bitpos
,
4342 unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT bitregion_start
,
4343 unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT bitregion_end
,
4344 enum machine_mode mode1
, rtx str_rtx
,
4347 enum machine_mode str_mode
= GET_MODE (str_rtx
);
4348 unsigned int str_bitsize
= GET_MODE_BITSIZE (str_mode
);
4353 enum tree_code code
;
4355 if (mode1
!= VOIDmode
4356 || bitsize
>= BITS_PER_WORD
4357 || str_bitsize
> BITS_PER_WORD
4358 || TREE_SIDE_EFFECTS (to
)
4359 || TREE_THIS_VOLATILE (to
))
4363 if (TREE_CODE (src
) != SSA_NAME
)
4365 if (TREE_CODE (TREE_TYPE (src
)) != INTEGER_TYPE
)
4368 srcstmt
= get_gimple_for_ssa_name (src
);
4370 || TREE_CODE_CLASS (gimple_assign_rhs_code (srcstmt
)) != tcc_binary
)
4373 code
= gimple_assign_rhs_code (srcstmt
);
4375 op0
= gimple_assign_rhs1 (srcstmt
);
4377 /* If OP0 is an SSA_NAME, then we want to walk the use-def chain
4378 to find its initialization. Hopefully the initialization will
4379 be from a bitfield load. */
4380 if (TREE_CODE (op0
) == SSA_NAME
)
4382 gimple op0stmt
= get_gimple_for_ssa_name (op0
);
4384 /* We want to eventually have OP0 be the same as TO, which
4385 should be a bitfield. */
4387 || !is_gimple_assign (op0stmt
)
4388 || gimple_assign_rhs_code (op0stmt
) != TREE_CODE (to
))
4390 op0
= gimple_assign_rhs1 (op0stmt
);
4393 op1
= gimple_assign_rhs2 (srcstmt
);
4395 if (!operand_equal_p (to
, op0
, 0))
4398 if (MEM_P (str_rtx
))
4400 unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT offset1
;
4402 if (str_bitsize
== 0 || str_bitsize
> BITS_PER_WORD
)
4403 str_mode
= word_mode
;
4404 str_mode
= get_best_mode (bitsize
, bitpos
,
4405 bitregion_start
, bitregion_end
,
4406 MEM_ALIGN (str_rtx
), str_mode
, 0);
4407 if (str_mode
== VOIDmode
)
4409 str_bitsize
= GET_MODE_BITSIZE (str_mode
);
4412 bitpos
%= str_bitsize
;
4413 offset1
= (offset1
- bitpos
) / BITS_PER_UNIT
;
4414 str_rtx
= adjust_address (str_rtx
, str_mode
, offset1
);
4416 else if (!REG_P (str_rtx
) && GET_CODE (str_rtx
) != SUBREG
)
4419 /* If the bit field covers the whole REG/MEM, store_field
4420 will likely generate better code. */
4421 if (bitsize
>= str_bitsize
)
4424 /* We can't handle fields split across multiple entities. */
4425 if (bitpos
+ bitsize
> str_bitsize
)
4428 if (BYTES_BIG_ENDIAN
)
4429 bitpos
= str_bitsize
- bitpos
- bitsize
;
4435 /* For now, just optimize the case of the topmost bitfield
4436 where we don't need to do any masking and also
4437 1 bit bitfields where xor can be used.
4438 We might win by one instruction for the other bitfields
4439 too if insv/extv instructions aren't used, so that
4440 can be added later. */
4441 if (bitpos
+ bitsize
!= str_bitsize
4442 && (bitsize
!= 1 || TREE_CODE (op1
) != INTEGER_CST
))
4445 value
= expand_expr (op1
, NULL_RTX
, str_mode
, EXPAND_NORMAL
);
4446 value
= convert_modes (str_mode
,
4447 TYPE_MODE (TREE_TYPE (op1
)), value
,
4448 TYPE_UNSIGNED (TREE_TYPE (op1
)));
4450 /* We may be accessing data outside the field, which means
4451 we can alias adjacent data. */
4452 if (MEM_P (str_rtx
))
4454 str_rtx
= shallow_copy_rtx (str_rtx
);
4455 set_mem_alias_set (str_rtx
, 0);
4456 set_mem_expr (str_rtx
, 0);
4459 binop
= code
== PLUS_EXPR
? add_optab
: sub_optab
;
4460 if (bitsize
== 1 && bitpos
+ bitsize
!= str_bitsize
)
4462 value
= expand_and (str_mode
, value
, const1_rtx
, NULL
);
4465 value
= expand_shift (LSHIFT_EXPR
, str_mode
, value
, bitpos
, NULL_RTX
, 1);
4466 result
= expand_binop (str_mode
, binop
, str_rtx
,
4467 value
, str_rtx
, 1, OPTAB_WIDEN
);
4468 if (result
!= str_rtx
)
4469 emit_move_insn (str_rtx
, result
);
4474 if (TREE_CODE (op1
) != INTEGER_CST
)
4476 value
= expand_expr (op1
, NULL_RTX
, str_mode
, EXPAND_NORMAL
);
4477 value
= convert_modes (str_mode
,
4478 TYPE_MODE (TREE_TYPE (op1
)), value
,
4479 TYPE_UNSIGNED (TREE_TYPE (op1
)));
4481 /* We may be accessing data outside the field, which means
4482 we can alias adjacent data. */
4483 if (MEM_P (str_rtx
))
4485 str_rtx
= shallow_copy_rtx (str_rtx
);
4486 set_mem_alias_set (str_rtx
, 0);
4487 set_mem_expr (str_rtx
, 0);
4490 binop
= code
== BIT_IOR_EXPR
? ior_optab
: xor_optab
;
4491 if (bitpos
+ bitsize
!= str_bitsize
)
4493 rtx mask
= gen_int_mode (((unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT
) 1 << bitsize
) - 1,
4495 value
= expand_and (str_mode
, value
, mask
, NULL_RTX
);
4497 value
= expand_shift (LSHIFT_EXPR
, str_mode
, value
, bitpos
, NULL_RTX
, 1);
4498 result
= expand_binop (str_mode
, binop
, str_rtx
,
4499 value
, str_rtx
, 1, OPTAB_WIDEN
);
4500 if (result
!= str_rtx
)
4501 emit_move_insn (str_rtx
, result
);
4511 /* In the C++ memory model, consecutive bit fields in a structure are
4512 considered one memory location.
4514 Given a COMPONENT_REF EXP at position (BITPOS, OFFSET), this function
4515 returns the bit range of consecutive bits in which this COMPONENT_REF
4516 belongs. The values are returned in *BITSTART and *BITEND. *BITPOS
4517 and *OFFSET may be adjusted in the process.
4519 If the access does not need to be restricted, 0 is returned in both
4520 *BITSTART and *BITEND. */
4523 get_bit_range (unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT
*bitstart
,
4524 unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT
*bitend
,
4526 HOST_WIDE_INT
*bitpos
,
4529 HOST_WIDE_INT bitoffset
;
4532 gcc_assert (TREE_CODE (exp
) == COMPONENT_REF
);
4534 field
= TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 1);
4535 repr
= DECL_BIT_FIELD_REPRESENTATIVE (field
);
4536 /* If we do not have a DECL_BIT_FIELD_REPRESENTATIVE there is no
4537 need to limit the range we can access. */
4540 *bitstart
= *bitend
= 0;
4544 /* If we have a DECL_BIT_FIELD_REPRESENTATIVE but the enclosing record is
4545 part of a larger bit field, then the representative does not serve any
4546 useful purpose. This can occur in Ada. */
4547 if (handled_component_p (TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 0)))
4549 enum machine_mode rmode
;
4550 HOST_WIDE_INT rbitsize
, rbitpos
;
4554 get_inner_reference (TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 0), &rbitsize
, &rbitpos
,
4555 &roffset
, &rmode
, &unsignedp
, &volatilep
, false);
4556 if ((rbitpos
% BITS_PER_UNIT
) != 0)
4558 *bitstart
= *bitend
= 0;
4563 /* Compute the adjustment to bitpos from the offset of the field
4564 relative to the representative. DECL_FIELD_OFFSET of field and
4565 repr are the same by construction if they are not constants,
4566 see finish_bitfield_layout. */
4567 if (host_integerp (DECL_FIELD_OFFSET (field
), 1)
4568 && host_integerp (DECL_FIELD_OFFSET (repr
), 1))
4569 bitoffset
= (tree_low_cst (DECL_FIELD_OFFSET (field
), 1)
4570 - tree_low_cst (DECL_FIELD_OFFSET (repr
), 1)) * BITS_PER_UNIT
;
4573 bitoffset
+= (tree_low_cst (DECL_FIELD_BIT_OFFSET (field
), 1)
4574 - tree_low_cst (DECL_FIELD_BIT_OFFSET (repr
), 1));
4576 /* If the adjustment is larger than bitpos, we would have a negative bit
4577 position for the lower bound and this may wreak havoc later. This can
4578 occur only if we have a non-null offset, so adjust offset and bitpos
4579 to make the lower bound non-negative. */
4580 if (bitoffset
> *bitpos
)
4582 HOST_WIDE_INT adjust
= bitoffset
- *bitpos
;
4584 gcc_assert ((adjust
% BITS_PER_UNIT
) == 0);
4585 gcc_assert (*offset
!= NULL_TREE
);
4589 = size_binop (MINUS_EXPR
, *offset
, size_int (adjust
/ BITS_PER_UNIT
));
4593 *bitstart
= *bitpos
- bitoffset
;
4595 *bitend
= *bitstart
+ tree_low_cst (DECL_SIZE (repr
), 1) - 1;
4598 /* Returns true if ADDR is an ADDR_EXPR of a DECL that does not reside
4599 in memory and has non-BLKmode. DECL_RTL must not be a MEM; if
4600 DECL_RTL was not set yet, return NORTL. */
4603 addr_expr_of_non_mem_decl_p_1 (tree addr
, bool nortl
)
4605 if (TREE_CODE (addr
) != ADDR_EXPR
)
4608 tree base
= TREE_OPERAND (addr
, 0);
4611 || TREE_ADDRESSABLE (base
)
4612 || DECL_MODE (base
) == BLKmode
)
4615 if (!DECL_RTL_SET_P (base
))
4618 return (!MEM_P (DECL_RTL (base
)));
4621 /* Returns true if the MEM_REF REF refers to an object that does not
4622 reside in memory and has non-BLKmode. */
4625 mem_ref_refers_to_non_mem_p (tree ref
)
4627 tree base
= TREE_OPERAND (ref
, 0);
4628 return addr_expr_of_non_mem_decl_p_1 (base
, false);
4631 /* Return TRUE iff OP is an ADDR_EXPR of a DECL that's not
4632 addressable. This is very much like mem_ref_refers_to_non_mem_p,
4633 but instead of the MEM_REF, it takes its base, and it doesn't
4634 assume a DECL is in memory just because its RTL is not set yet. */
4637 addr_expr_of_non_mem_decl_p (tree op
)
4639 return addr_expr_of_non_mem_decl_p_1 (op
, true);
4642 /* Expand an assignment that stores the value of FROM into TO. If NONTEMPORAL
4643 is true, try generating a nontemporal store. */
4646 expand_assignment (tree to
, tree from
, bool nontemporal
)
4650 enum machine_mode mode
;
4652 enum insn_code icode
;
4654 /* Don't crash if the lhs of the assignment was erroneous. */
4655 if (TREE_CODE (to
) == ERROR_MARK
)
4657 expand_normal (from
);
4661 /* Optimize away no-op moves without side-effects. */
4662 if (operand_equal_p (to
, from
, 0))
4665 /* Handle misaligned stores. */
4666 mode
= TYPE_MODE (TREE_TYPE (to
));
4667 if ((TREE_CODE (to
) == MEM_REF
4668 || TREE_CODE (to
) == TARGET_MEM_REF
)
4670 && !mem_ref_refers_to_non_mem_p (to
)
4671 && ((align
= get_object_alignment (to
))
4672 < GET_MODE_ALIGNMENT (mode
))
4673 && (((icode
= optab_handler (movmisalign_optab
, mode
))
4674 != CODE_FOR_nothing
)
4675 || SLOW_UNALIGNED_ACCESS (mode
, align
)))
4679 reg
= expand_expr (from
, NULL_RTX
, VOIDmode
, EXPAND_NORMAL
);
4680 reg
= force_not_mem (reg
);
4681 mem
= expand_expr (to
, NULL_RTX
, VOIDmode
, EXPAND_WRITE
);
4683 if (icode
!= CODE_FOR_nothing
)
4685 struct expand_operand ops
[2];
4687 create_fixed_operand (&ops
[0], mem
);
4688 create_input_operand (&ops
[1], reg
, mode
);
4689 /* The movmisalign<mode> pattern cannot fail, else the assignment
4690 would silently be omitted. */
4691 expand_insn (icode
, 2, ops
);
4694 store_bit_field (mem
, GET_MODE_BITSIZE (mode
),
4695 0, 0, 0, mode
, reg
);
4699 /* Assignment of a structure component needs special treatment
4700 if the structure component's rtx is not simply a MEM.
4701 Assignment of an array element at a constant index, and assignment of
4702 an array element in an unaligned packed structure field, has the same
4703 problem. Same for (partially) storing into a non-memory object. */
4704 if (handled_component_p (to
)
4705 || (TREE_CODE (to
) == MEM_REF
4706 && mem_ref_refers_to_non_mem_p (to
))
4707 || TREE_CODE (TREE_TYPE (to
)) == ARRAY_TYPE
)
4709 enum machine_mode mode1
;
4710 HOST_WIDE_INT bitsize
, bitpos
;
4711 unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT bitregion_start
= 0;
4712 unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT bitregion_end
= 0;
4719 tem
= get_inner_reference (to
, &bitsize
, &bitpos
, &offset
, &mode1
,
4720 &unsignedp
, &volatilep
, true);
4722 if (TREE_CODE (to
) == COMPONENT_REF
4723 && DECL_BIT_FIELD_TYPE (TREE_OPERAND (to
, 1)))
4724 get_bit_range (&bitregion_start
, &bitregion_end
, to
, &bitpos
, &offset
);
4726 to_rtx
= expand_expr (tem
, NULL_RTX
, VOIDmode
, EXPAND_WRITE
);
4728 /* If the bitfield is volatile, we want to access it in the
4729 field's mode, not the computed mode.
4730 If a MEM has VOIDmode (external with incomplete type),
4731 use BLKmode for it instead. */
4734 if (volatilep
&& flag_strict_volatile_bitfields
> 0)
4735 to_rtx
= adjust_address (to_rtx
, mode1
, 0);
4736 else if (GET_MODE (to_rtx
) == VOIDmode
)
4737 to_rtx
= adjust_address (to_rtx
, BLKmode
, 0);
4742 enum machine_mode address_mode
;
4745 if (!MEM_P (to_rtx
))
4747 /* We can get constant negative offsets into arrays with broken
4748 user code. Translate this to a trap instead of ICEing. */
4749 gcc_assert (TREE_CODE (offset
) == INTEGER_CST
);
4750 expand_builtin_trap ();
4751 to_rtx
= gen_rtx_MEM (BLKmode
, const0_rtx
);
4754 offset_rtx
= expand_expr (offset
, NULL_RTX
, VOIDmode
, EXPAND_SUM
);
4755 address_mode
= get_address_mode (to_rtx
);
4756 if (GET_MODE (offset_rtx
) != address_mode
)
4757 offset_rtx
= convert_to_mode (address_mode
, offset_rtx
, 0);
4759 /* A constant address in TO_RTX can have VOIDmode, we must not try
4760 to call force_reg for that case. Avoid that case. */
4762 && GET_MODE (to_rtx
) == BLKmode
4763 && GET_MODE (XEXP (to_rtx
, 0)) != VOIDmode
4765 && (bitpos
% bitsize
) == 0
4766 && (bitsize
% GET_MODE_ALIGNMENT (mode1
)) == 0
4767 && MEM_ALIGN (to_rtx
) == GET_MODE_ALIGNMENT (mode1
))
4769 to_rtx
= adjust_address (to_rtx
, mode1
, bitpos
/ BITS_PER_UNIT
);
4773 to_rtx
= offset_address (to_rtx
, offset_rtx
,
4774 highest_pow2_factor_for_target (to
,
4778 /* No action is needed if the target is not a memory and the field
4779 lies completely outside that target. This can occur if the source
4780 code contains an out-of-bounds access to a small array. */
4782 && GET_MODE (to_rtx
) != BLKmode
4783 && (unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT
) bitpos
4784 >= GET_MODE_PRECISION (GET_MODE (to_rtx
)))
4786 expand_normal (from
);
4789 /* Handle expand_expr of a complex value returning a CONCAT. */
4790 else if (GET_CODE (to_rtx
) == CONCAT
)
4792 unsigned short mode_bitsize
= GET_MODE_BITSIZE (GET_MODE (to_rtx
));
4793 if (COMPLEX_MODE_P (TYPE_MODE (TREE_TYPE (from
)))
4795 && bitsize
== mode_bitsize
)
4796 result
= store_expr (from
, to_rtx
, false, nontemporal
);
4797 else if (bitsize
== mode_bitsize
/ 2
4798 && (bitpos
== 0 || bitpos
== mode_bitsize
/ 2))
4799 result
= store_expr (from
, XEXP (to_rtx
, bitpos
!= 0), false,
4801 else if (bitpos
+ bitsize
<= mode_bitsize
/ 2)
4802 result
= store_field (XEXP (to_rtx
, 0), bitsize
, bitpos
,
4803 bitregion_start
, bitregion_end
,
4805 get_alias_set (to
), nontemporal
);
4806 else if (bitpos
>= mode_bitsize
/ 2)
4807 result
= store_field (XEXP (to_rtx
, 1), bitsize
,
4808 bitpos
- mode_bitsize
/ 2,
4809 bitregion_start
, bitregion_end
,
4811 get_alias_set (to
), nontemporal
);
4812 else if (bitpos
== 0 && bitsize
== mode_bitsize
)
4815 result
= expand_normal (from
);
4816 from_rtx
= simplify_gen_subreg (GET_MODE (to_rtx
), result
,
4817 TYPE_MODE (TREE_TYPE (from
)), 0);
4818 emit_move_insn (XEXP (to_rtx
, 0),
4819 read_complex_part (from_rtx
, false));
4820 emit_move_insn (XEXP (to_rtx
, 1),
4821 read_complex_part (from_rtx
, true));
4825 rtx temp
= assign_stack_temp (GET_MODE (to_rtx
),
4826 GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (to_rtx
)));
4827 write_complex_part (temp
, XEXP (to_rtx
, 0), false);
4828 write_complex_part (temp
, XEXP (to_rtx
, 1), true);
4829 result
= store_field (temp
, bitsize
, bitpos
,
4830 bitregion_start
, bitregion_end
,
4832 get_alias_set (to
), nontemporal
);
4833 emit_move_insn (XEXP (to_rtx
, 0), read_complex_part (temp
, false));
4834 emit_move_insn (XEXP (to_rtx
, 1), read_complex_part (temp
, true));
4841 /* If the field is at offset zero, we could have been given the
4842 DECL_RTX of the parent struct. Don't munge it. */
4843 to_rtx
= shallow_copy_rtx (to_rtx
);
4844 set_mem_attributes_minus_bitpos (to_rtx
, to
, 0, bitpos
);
4846 MEM_VOLATILE_P (to_rtx
) = 1;
4849 if (optimize_bitfield_assignment_op (bitsize
, bitpos
,
4850 bitregion_start
, bitregion_end
,
4855 result
= store_field (to_rtx
, bitsize
, bitpos
,
4856 bitregion_start
, bitregion_end
,
4858 get_alias_set (to
), nontemporal
);
4862 preserve_temp_slots (result
);
4867 /* If the rhs is a function call and its value is not an aggregate,
4868 call the function before we start to compute the lhs.
4869 This is needed for correct code for cases such as
4870 val = setjmp (buf) on machines where reference to val
4871 requires loading up part of an address in a separate insn.
4873 Don't do this if TO is a VAR_DECL or PARM_DECL whose DECL_RTL is REG
4874 since it might be a promoted variable where the zero- or sign- extension
4875 needs to be done. Handling this in the normal way is safe because no
4876 computation is done before the call. The same is true for SSA names. */
4877 if (TREE_CODE (from
) == CALL_EXPR
&& ! aggregate_value_p (from
, from
)
4878 && COMPLETE_TYPE_P (TREE_TYPE (from
))
4879 && TREE_CODE (TYPE_SIZE (TREE_TYPE (from
))) == INTEGER_CST
4880 && ! (((TREE_CODE (to
) == VAR_DECL
4881 || TREE_CODE (to
) == PARM_DECL
4882 || TREE_CODE (to
) == RESULT_DECL
)
4883 && REG_P (DECL_RTL (to
)))
4884 || TREE_CODE (to
) == SSA_NAME
))
4889 value
= expand_normal (from
);
4891 to_rtx
= expand_expr (to
, NULL_RTX
, VOIDmode
, EXPAND_WRITE
);
4893 /* Handle calls that return values in multiple non-contiguous locations.
4894 The Irix 6 ABI has examples of this. */
4895 if (GET_CODE (to_rtx
) == PARALLEL
)
4897 if (GET_CODE (value
) == PARALLEL
)
4898 emit_group_move (to_rtx
, value
);
4900 emit_group_load (to_rtx
, value
, TREE_TYPE (from
),
4901 int_size_in_bytes (TREE_TYPE (from
)));
4903 else if (GET_CODE (value
) == PARALLEL
)
4904 emit_group_store (to_rtx
, value
, TREE_TYPE (from
),
4905 int_size_in_bytes (TREE_TYPE (from
)));
4906 else if (GET_MODE (to_rtx
) == BLKmode
)
4908 /* Handle calls that return BLKmode values in registers. */
4910 copy_blkmode_from_reg (to_rtx
, value
, TREE_TYPE (from
));
4912 emit_block_move (to_rtx
, value
, expr_size (from
), BLOCK_OP_NORMAL
);
4916 if (POINTER_TYPE_P (TREE_TYPE (to
)))
4917 value
= convert_memory_address_addr_space
4918 (GET_MODE (to_rtx
), value
,
4919 TYPE_ADDR_SPACE (TREE_TYPE (TREE_TYPE (to
))));
4921 emit_move_insn (to_rtx
, value
);
4923 preserve_temp_slots (to_rtx
);
4928 /* Ordinary treatment. Expand TO to get a REG or MEM rtx. */
4929 to_rtx
= expand_expr (to
, NULL_RTX
, VOIDmode
, EXPAND_WRITE
);
4931 /* Don't move directly into a return register. */
4932 if (TREE_CODE (to
) == RESULT_DECL
4933 && (REG_P (to_rtx
) || GET_CODE (to_rtx
) == PARALLEL
))
4939 /* If the source is itself a return value, it still is in a pseudo at
4940 this point so we can move it back to the return register directly. */
4942 && TYPE_MODE (TREE_TYPE (from
)) == BLKmode
4943 && TREE_CODE (from
) != CALL_EXPR
)
4944 temp
= copy_blkmode_to_reg (GET_MODE (to_rtx
), from
);
4946 temp
= expand_expr (from
, NULL_RTX
, GET_MODE (to_rtx
), EXPAND_NORMAL
);
4948 /* Handle calls that return values in multiple non-contiguous locations.
4949 The Irix 6 ABI has examples of this. */
4950 if (GET_CODE (to_rtx
) == PARALLEL
)
4952 if (GET_CODE (temp
) == PARALLEL
)
4953 emit_group_move (to_rtx
, temp
);
4955 emit_group_load (to_rtx
, temp
, TREE_TYPE (from
),
4956 int_size_in_bytes (TREE_TYPE (from
)));
4959 emit_move_insn (to_rtx
, temp
);
4961 preserve_temp_slots (to_rtx
);
4966 /* In case we are returning the contents of an object which overlaps
4967 the place the value is being stored, use a safe function when copying
4968 a value through a pointer into a structure value return block. */
4969 if (TREE_CODE (to
) == RESULT_DECL
4970 && TREE_CODE (from
) == INDIRECT_REF
4971 && ADDR_SPACE_GENERIC_P
4972 (TYPE_ADDR_SPACE (TREE_TYPE (TREE_TYPE (TREE_OPERAND (from
, 0)))))
4973 && refs_may_alias_p (to
, from
)
4974 && cfun
->returns_struct
4975 && !cfun
->returns_pcc_struct
)
4980 size
= expr_size (from
);
4981 from_rtx
= expand_normal (from
);
4983 emit_library_call (memmove_libfunc
, LCT_NORMAL
,
4984 VOIDmode
, 3, XEXP (to_rtx
, 0), Pmode
,
4985 XEXP (from_rtx
, 0), Pmode
,
4986 convert_to_mode (TYPE_MODE (sizetype
),
4987 size
, TYPE_UNSIGNED (sizetype
)),
4988 TYPE_MODE (sizetype
));
4990 preserve_temp_slots (to_rtx
);
4995 /* Compute FROM and store the value in the rtx we got. */
4998 result
= store_expr (from
, to_rtx
, 0, nontemporal
);
4999 preserve_temp_slots (result
);
5004 /* Emits nontemporal store insn that moves FROM to TO. Returns true if this
5005 succeeded, false otherwise. */
5008 emit_storent_insn (rtx to
, rtx from
)
5010 struct expand_operand ops
[2];
5011 enum machine_mode mode
= GET_MODE (to
);
5012 enum insn_code code
= optab_handler (storent_optab
, mode
);
5014 if (code
== CODE_FOR_nothing
)
5017 create_fixed_operand (&ops
[0], to
);
5018 create_input_operand (&ops
[1], from
, mode
);
5019 return maybe_expand_insn (code
, 2, ops
);
5022 /* Generate code for computing expression EXP,
5023 and storing the value into TARGET.
5025 If the mode is BLKmode then we may return TARGET itself.
5026 It turns out that in BLKmode it doesn't cause a problem.
5027 because C has no operators that could combine two different
5028 assignments into the same BLKmode object with different values
5029 with no sequence point. Will other languages need this to
5032 If CALL_PARAM_P is nonzero, this is a store into a call param on the
5033 stack, and block moves may need to be treated specially.
5035 If NONTEMPORAL is true, try using a nontemporal store instruction. */
5038 store_expr (tree exp
, rtx target
, int call_param_p
, bool nontemporal
)
5041 rtx alt_rtl
= NULL_RTX
;
5042 location_t loc
= curr_insn_location ();
5044 if (VOID_TYPE_P (TREE_TYPE (exp
)))
5046 /* C++ can generate ?: expressions with a throw expression in one
5047 branch and an rvalue in the other. Here, we resolve attempts to
5048 store the throw expression's nonexistent result. */
5049 gcc_assert (!call_param_p
);
5050 expand_expr (exp
, const0_rtx
, VOIDmode
, EXPAND_NORMAL
);
5053 if (TREE_CODE (exp
) == COMPOUND_EXPR
)
5055 /* Perform first part of compound expression, then assign from second
5057 expand_expr (TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 0), const0_rtx
, VOIDmode
,
5058 call_param_p
? EXPAND_STACK_PARM
: EXPAND_NORMAL
);
5059 return store_expr (TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 1), target
, call_param_p
,
5062 else if (TREE_CODE (exp
) == COND_EXPR
&& GET_MODE (target
) == BLKmode
)
5064 /* For conditional expression, get safe form of the target. Then
5065 test the condition, doing the appropriate assignment on either
5066 side. This avoids the creation of unnecessary temporaries.
5067 For non-BLKmode, it is more efficient not to do this. */
5069 rtx lab1
= gen_label_rtx (), lab2
= gen_label_rtx ();
5071 do_pending_stack_adjust ();
5073 jumpifnot (TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 0), lab1
, -1);
5074 store_expr (TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 1), target
, call_param_p
,
5076 emit_jump_insn (gen_jump (lab2
));
5079 store_expr (TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 2), target
, call_param_p
,
5086 else if (GET_CODE (target
) == SUBREG
&& SUBREG_PROMOTED_VAR_P (target
))
5087 /* If this is a scalar in a register that is stored in a wider mode
5088 than the declared mode, compute the result into its declared mode
5089 and then convert to the wider mode. Our value is the computed
5092 rtx inner_target
= 0;
5094 /* We can do the conversion inside EXP, which will often result
5095 in some optimizations. Do the conversion in two steps: first
5096 change the signedness, if needed, then the extend. But don't
5097 do this if the type of EXP is a subtype of something else
5098 since then the conversion might involve more than just
5099 converting modes. */
5100 if (INTEGRAL_TYPE_P (TREE_TYPE (exp
))
5101 && TREE_TYPE (TREE_TYPE (exp
)) == 0
5102 && GET_MODE_PRECISION (GET_MODE (target
))
5103 == TYPE_PRECISION (TREE_TYPE (exp
)))
5105 if (TYPE_UNSIGNED (TREE_TYPE (exp
))
5106 != SUBREG_PROMOTED_UNSIGNED_P (target
))
5108 /* Some types, e.g. Fortran's logical*4, won't have a signed
5109 version, so use the mode instead. */
5111 = (signed_or_unsigned_type_for
5112 (SUBREG_PROMOTED_UNSIGNED_P (target
), TREE_TYPE (exp
)));
5114 ntype
= lang_hooks
.types
.type_for_mode
5115 (TYPE_MODE (TREE_TYPE (exp
)),
5116 SUBREG_PROMOTED_UNSIGNED_P (target
));
5118 exp
= fold_convert_loc (loc
, ntype
, exp
);
5121 exp
= fold_convert_loc (loc
, lang_hooks
.types
.type_for_mode
5122 (GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (target
)),
5123 SUBREG_PROMOTED_UNSIGNED_P (target
)),
5126 inner_target
= SUBREG_REG (target
);
5129 temp
= expand_expr (exp
, inner_target
, VOIDmode
,
5130 call_param_p
? EXPAND_STACK_PARM
: EXPAND_NORMAL
);
5132 /* If TEMP is a VOIDmode constant, use convert_modes to make
5133 sure that we properly convert it. */
5134 if (CONSTANT_P (temp
) && GET_MODE (temp
) == VOIDmode
)
5136 temp
= convert_modes (GET_MODE (target
), TYPE_MODE (TREE_TYPE (exp
)),
5137 temp
, SUBREG_PROMOTED_UNSIGNED_P (target
));
5138 temp
= convert_modes (GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (target
)),
5139 GET_MODE (target
), temp
,
5140 SUBREG_PROMOTED_UNSIGNED_P (target
));
5143 convert_move (SUBREG_REG (target
), temp
,
5144 SUBREG_PROMOTED_UNSIGNED_P (target
));
5148 else if ((TREE_CODE (exp
) == STRING_CST
5149 || (TREE_CODE (exp
) == MEM_REF
5150 && TREE_CODE (TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 0)) == ADDR_EXPR
5151 && TREE_CODE (TREE_OPERAND (TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 0), 0))
5153 && integer_zerop (TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 1))))
5154 && !nontemporal
&& !call_param_p
5157 /* Optimize initialization of an array with a STRING_CST. */
5158 HOST_WIDE_INT exp_len
, str_copy_len
;
5160 tree str
= TREE_CODE (exp
) == STRING_CST
5161 ? exp
: TREE_OPERAND (TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 0), 0);
5163 exp_len
= int_expr_size (exp
);
5167 if (TREE_STRING_LENGTH (str
) <= 0)
5170 str_copy_len
= strlen (TREE_STRING_POINTER (str
));
5171 if (str_copy_len
< TREE_STRING_LENGTH (str
) - 1)
5174 str_copy_len
= TREE_STRING_LENGTH (str
);
5175 if ((STORE_MAX_PIECES
& (STORE_MAX_PIECES
- 1)) == 0
5176 && TREE_STRING_POINTER (str
)[TREE_STRING_LENGTH (str
) - 1] == '\0')
5178 str_copy_len
+= STORE_MAX_PIECES
- 1;
5179 str_copy_len
&= ~(STORE_MAX_PIECES
- 1);
5181 str_copy_len
= MIN (str_copy_len
, exp_len
);
5182 if (!can_store_by_pieces (str_copy_len
, builtin_strncpy_read_str
,
5183 CONST_CAST (char *, TREE_STRING_POINTER (str
)),
5184 MEM_ALIGN (target
), false))
5189 dest_mem
= store_by_pieces (dest_mem
,
5190 str_copy_len
, builtin_strncpy_read_str
,
5192 TREE_STRING_POINTER (str
)),
5193 MEM_ALIGN (target
), false,
5194 exp_len
> str_copy_len
? 1 : 0);
5195 if (exp_len
> str_copy_len
)
5196 clear_storage (adjust_address (dest_mem
, BLKmode
, 0),
5197 GEN_INT (exp_len
- str_copy_len
),
5206 /* If we want to use a nontemporal store, force the value to
5208 tmp_target
= nontemporal
? NULL_RTX
: target
;
5209 temp
= expand_expr_real (exp
, tmp_target
, GET_MODE (target
),
5211 ? EXPAND_STACK_PARM
: EXPAND_NORMAL
),
5215 /* If TEMP is a VOIDmode constant and the mode of the type of EXP is not
5216 the same as that of TARGET, adjust the constant. This is needed, for
5217 example, in case it is a CONST_DOUBLE and we want only a word-sized
5219 if (CONSTANT_P (temp
) && GET_MODE (temp
) == VOIDmode
5220 && TREE_CODE (exp
) != ERROR_MARK
5221 && GET_MODE (target
) != TYPE_MODE (TREE_TYPE (exp
)))
5222 temp
= convert_modes (GET_MODE (target
), TYPE_MODE (TREE_TYPE (exp
)),
5223 temp
, TYPE_UNSIGNED (TREE_TYPE (exp
)));
5225 /* If value was not generated in the target, store it there.
5226 Convert the value to TARGET's type first if necessary and emit the
5227 pending incrementations that have been queued when expanding EXP.
5228 Note that we cannot emit the whole queue blindly because this will
5229 effectively disable the POST_INC optimization later.
5231 If TEMP and TARGET compare equal according to rtx_equal_p, but
5232 one or both of them are volatile memory refs, we have to distinguish
5234 - expand_expr has used TARGET. In this case, we must not generate
5235 another copy. This can be detected by TARGET being equal according
5237 - expand_expr has not used TARGET - that means that the source just
5238 happens to have the same RTX form. Since temp will have been created
5239 by expand_expr, it will compare unequal according to == .
5240 We must generate a copy in this case, to reach the correct number
5241 of volatile memory references. */
5243 if ((! rtx_equal_p (temp
, target
)
5244 || (temp
!= target
&& (side_effects_p (temp
)
5245 || side_effects_p (target
))))
5246 && TREE_CODE (exp
) != ERROR_MARK
5247 /* If store_expr stores a DECL whose DECL_RTL(exp) == TARGET,
5248 but TARGET is not valid memory reference, TEMP will differ
5249 from TARGET although it is really the same location. */
5251 && rtx_equal_p (alt_rtl
, target
)
5252 && !side_effects_p (alt_rtl
)
5253 && !side_effects_p (target
))
5254 /* If there's nothing to copy, don't bother. Don't call
5255 expr_size unless necessary, because some front-ends (C++)
5256 expr_size-hook must not be given objects that are not
5257 supposed to be bit-copied or bit-initialized. */
5258 && expr_size (exp
) != const0_rtx
)
5260 if (GET_MODE (temp
) != GET_MODE (target
) && GET_MODE (temp
) != VOIDmode
)
5262 if (GET_MODE (target
) == BLKmode
)
5264 /* Handle calls that return BLKmode values in registers. */
5265 if (REG_P (temp
) && TREE_CODE (exp
) == CALL_EXPR
)
5266 copy_blkmode_from_reg (target
, temp
, TREE_TYPE (exp
));
5268 store_bit_field (target
,
5269 INTVAL (expr_size (exp
)) * BITS_PER_UNIT
,
5270 0, 0, 0, GET_MODE (temp
), temp
);
5273 convert_move (target
, temp
, TYPE_UNSIGNED (TREE_TYPE (exp
)));
5276 else if (GET_MODE (temp
) == BLKmode
&& TREE_CODE (exp
) == STRING_CST
)
5278 /* Handle copying a string constant into an array. The string
5279 constant may be shorter than the array. So copy just the string's
5280 actual length, and clear the rest. First get the size of the data
5281 type of the string, which is actually the size of the target. */
5282 rtx size
= expr_size (exp
);
5284 if (CONST_INT_P (size
)
5285 && INTVAL (size
) < TREE_STRING_LENGTH (exp
))
5286 emit_block_move (target
, temp
, size
,
5288 ? BLOCK_OP_CALL_PARM
: BLOCK_OP_NORMAL
));
5291 enum machine_mode pointer_mode
5292 = targetm
.addr_space
.pointer_mode (MEM_ADDR_SPACE (target
));
5293 enum machine_mode address_mode
= get_address_mode (target
);
5295 /* Compute the size of the data to copy from the string. */
5297 = size_binop_loc (loc
, MIN_EXPR
,
5298 make_tree (sizetype
, size
),
5299 size_int (TREE_STRING_LENGTH (exp
)));
5301 = expand_expr (copy_size
, NULL_RTX
, VOIDmode
,
5303 ? EXPAND_STACK_PARM
: EXPAND_NORMAL
));
5306 /* Copy that much. */
5307 copy_size_rtx
= convert_to_mode (pointer_mode
, copy_size_rtx
,
5308 TYPE_UNSIGNED (sizetype
));
5309 emit_block_move (target
, temp
, copy_size_rtx
,
5311 ? BLOCK_OP_CALL_PARM
: BLOCK_OP_NORMAL
));
5313 /* Figure out how much is left in TARGET that we have to clear.
5314 Do all calculations in pointer_mode. */
5315 if (CONST_INT_P (copy_size_rtx
))
5317 size
= plus_constant (address_mode
, size
,
5318 -INTVAL (copy_size_rtx
));
5319 target
= adjust_address (target
, BLKmode
,
5320 INTVAL (copy_size_rtx
));
5324 size
= expand_binop (TYPE_MODE (sizetype
), sub_optab
, size
,
5325 copy_size_rtx
, NULL_RTX
, 0,
5328 if (GET_MODE (copy_size_rtx
) != address_mode
)
5329 copy_size_rtx
= convert_to_mode (address_mode
,
5331 TYPE_UNSIGNED (sizetype
));
5333 target
= offset_address (target
, copy_size_rtx
,
5334 highest_pow2_factor (copy_size
));
5335 label
= gen_label_rtx ();
5336 emit_cmp_and_jump_insns (size
, const0_rtx
, LT
, NULL_RTX
,
5337 GET_MODE (size
), 0, label
);
5340 if (size
!= const0_rtx
)
5341 clear_storage (target
, size
, BLOCK_OP_NORMAL
);
5347 /* Handle calls that return values in multiple non-contiguous locations.
5348 The Irix 6 ABI has examples of this. */
5349 else if (GET_CODE (target
) == PARALLEL
)
5351 if (GET_CODE (temp
) == PARALLEL
)
5352 emit_group_move (target
, temp
);
5354 emit_group_load (target
, temp
, TREE_TYPE (exp
),
5355 int_size_in_bytes (TREE_TYPE (exp
)));
5357 else if (GET_CODE (temp
) == PARALLEL
)
5358 emit_group_store (target
, temp
, TREE_TYPE (exp
),
5359 int_size_in_bytes (TREE_TYPE (exp
)));
5360 else if (GET_MODE (temp
) == BLKmode
)
5361 emit_block_move (target
, temp
, expr_size (exp
),
5363 ? BLOCK_OP_CALL_PARM
: BLOCK_OP_NORMAL
));
5364 /* If we emit a nontemporal store, there is nothing else to do. */
5365 else if (nontemporal
&& emit_storent_insn (target
, temp
))
5369 temp
= force_operand (temp
, target
);
5371 emit_move_insn (target
, temp
);
5378 /* Return true if field F of structure TYPE is a flexible array. */
5381 flexible_array_member_p (const_tree f
, const_tree type
)
5386 return (DECL_CHAIN (f
) == NULL
5387 && TREE_CODE (tf
) == ARRAY_TYPE
5389 && TYPE_MIN_VALUE (TYPE_DOMAIN (tf
))
5390 && integer_zerop (TYPE_MIN_VALUE (TYPE_DOMAIN (tf
)))
5391 && !TYPE_MAX_VALUE (TYPE_DOMAIN (tf
))
5392 && int_size_in_bytes (type
) >= 0);
5395 /* If FOR_CTOR_P, return the number of top-level elements that a constructor
5396 must have in order for it to completely initialize a value of type TYPE.
5397 Return -1 if the number isn't known.
5399 If !FOR_CTOR_P, return an estimate of the number of scalars in TYPE. */
5401 static HOST_WIDE_INT
5402 count_type_elements (const_tree type
, bool for_ctor_p
)
5404 switch (TREE_CODE (type
))
5410 nelts
= array_type_nelts (type
);
5411 if (nelts
&& host_integerp (nelts
, 1))
5413 unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT n
;
5415 n
= tree_low_cst (nelts
, 1) + 1;
5416 if (n
== 0 || for_ctor_p
)
5419 return n
* count_type_elements (TREE_TYPE (type
), false);
5421 return for_ctor_p
? -1 : 1;
5426 unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT n
;
5430 for (f
= TYPE_FIELDS (type
); f
; f
= DECL_CHAIN (f
))
5431 if (TREE_CODE (f
) == FIELD_DECL
)
5434 n
+= count_type_elements (TREE_TYPE (f
), false);
5435 else if (!flexible_array_member_p (f
, type
))
5436 /* Don't count flexible arrays, which are not supposed
5437 to be initialized. */
5445 case QUAL_UNION_TYPE
:
5450 gcc_assert (!for_ctor_p
);
5451 /* Estimate the number of scalars in each field and pick the
5452 maximum. Other estimates would do instead; the idea is simply
5453 to make sure that the estimate is not sensitive to the ordering
5456 for (f
= TYPE_FIELDS (type
); f
; f
= DECL_CHAIN (f
))
5457 if (TREE_CODE (f
) == FIELD_DECL
)
5459 m
= count_type_elements (TREE_TYPE (f
), false);
5460 /* If the field doesn't span the whole union, add an extra
5461 scalar for the rest. */
5462 if (simple_cst_equal (TYPE_SIZE (TREE_TYPE (f
)),
5463 TYPE_SIZE (type
)) != 1)
5475 return TYPE_VECTOR_SUBPARTS (type
);
5479 case FIXED_POINT_TYPE
:
5484 case REFERENCE_TYPE
:
5500 /* Helper for categorize_ctor_elements. Identical interface. */
5503 categorize_ctor_elements_1 (const_tree ctor
, HOST_WIDE_INT
*p_nz_elts
,
5504 HOST_WIDE_INT
*p_init_elts
, bool *p_complete
)
5506 unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT idx
;
5507 HOST_WIDE_INT nz_elts
, init_elts
, num_fields
;
5508 tree value
, purpose
, elt_type
;
5510 /* Whether CTOR is a valid constant initializer, in accordance with what
5511 initializer_constant_valid_p does. If inferred from the constructor
5512 elements, true until proven otherwise. */
5513 bool const_from_elts_p
= constructor_static_from_elts_p (ctor
);
5514 bool const_p
= const_from_elts_p
? true : TREE_STATIC (ctor
);
5519 elt_type
= NULL_TREE
;
5521 FOR_EACH_CONSTRUCTOR_ELT (CONSTRUCTOR_ELTS (ctor
), idx
, purpose
, value
)
5523 HOST_WIDE_INT mult
= 1;
5525 if (purpose
&& TREE_CODE (purpose
) == RANGE_EXPR
)
5527 tree lo_index
= TREE_OPERAND (purpose
, 0);
5528 tree hi_index
= TREE_OPERAND (purpose
, 1);
5530 if (host_integerp (lo_index
, 1) && host_integerp (hi_index
, 1))
5531 mult
= (tree_low_cst (hi_index
, 1)
5532 - tree_low_cst (lo_index
, 1) + 1);
5535 elt_type
= TREE_TYPE (value
);
5537 switch (TREE_CODE (value
))
5541 HOST_WIDE_INT nz
= 0, ic
= 0;
5543 bool const_elt_p
= categorize_ctor_elements_1 (value
, &nz
, &ic
,
5546 nz_elts
+= mult
* nz
;
5547 init_elts
+= mult
* ic
;
5549 if (const_from_elts_p
&& const_p
)
5550 const_p
= const_elt_p
;
5557 if (!initializer_zerop (value
))
5563 nz_elts
+= mult
* TREE_STRING_LENGTH (value
);
5564 init_elts
+= mult
* TREE_STRING_LENGTH (value
);
5568 if (!initializer_zerop (TREE_REALPART (value
)))
5570 if (!initializer_zerop (TREE_IMAGPART (value
)))
5578 for (i
= 0; i
< VECTOR_CST_NELTS (value
); ++i
)
5580 tree v
= VECTOR_CST_ELT (value
, i
);
5581 if (!initializer_zerop (v
))
5590 HOST_WIDE_INT tc
= count_type_elements (elt_type
, false);
5591 nz_elts
+= mult
* tc
;
5592 init_elts
+= mult
* tc
;
5594 if (const_from_elts_p
&& const_p
)
5595 const_p
= initializer_constant_valid_p (value
, elt_type
)
5602 if (*p_complete
&& !complete_ctor_at_level_p (TREE_TYPE (ctor
),
5603 num_fields
, elt_type
))
5604 *p_complete
= false;
5606 *p_nz_elts
+= nz_elts
;
5607 *p_init_elts
+= init_elts
;
5612 /* Examine CTOR to discover:
5613 * how many scalar fields are set to nonzero values,
5614 and place it in *P_NZ_ELTS;
5615 * how many scalar fields in total are in CTOR,
5616 and place it in *P_ELT_COUNT.
5617 * whether the constructor is complete -- in the sense that every
5618 meaningful byte is explicitly given a value --
5619 and place it in *P_COMPLETE.
5621 Return whether or not CTOR is a valid static constant initializer, the same
5622 as "initializer_constant_valid_p (CTOR, TREE_TYPE (CTOR)) != 0". */
5625 categorize_ctor_elements (const_tree ctor
, HOST_WIDE_INT
*p_nz_elts
,
5626 HOST_WIDE_INT
*p_init_elts
, bool *p_complete
)
5632 return categorize_ctor_elements_1 (ctor
, p_nz_elts
, p_init_elts
, p_complete
);
5635 /* TYPE is initialized by a constructor with NUM_ELTS elements, the last
5636 of which had type LAST_TYPE. Each element was itself a complete
5637 initializer, in the sense that every meaningful byte was explicitly
5638 given a value. Return true if the same is true for the constructor
5642 complete_ctor_at_level_p (const_tree type
, HOST_WIDE_INT num_elts
,
5643 const_tree last_type
)
5645 if (TREE_CODE (type
) == UNION_TYPE
5646 || TREE_CODE (type
) == QUAL_UNION_TYPE
)
5651 gcc_assert (num_elts
== 1 && last_type
);
5653 /* ??? We could look at each element of the union, and find the
5654 largest element. Which would avoid comparing the size of the
5655 initialized element against any tail padding in the union.
5656 Doesn't seem worth the effort... */
5657 return simple_cst_equal (TYPE_SIZE (type
), TYPE_SIZE (last_type
)) == 1;
5660 return count_type_elements (type
, true) == num_elts
;
5663 /* Return 1 if EXP contains mostly (3/4) zeros. */
5666 mostly_zeros_p (const_tree exp
)
5668 if (TREE_CODE (exp
) == CONSTRUCTOR
)
5670 HOST_WIDE_INT nz_elts
, init_elts
;
5673 categorize_ctor_elements (exp
, &nz_elts
, &init_elts
, &complete_p
);
5674 return !complete_p
|| nz_elts
< init_elts
/ 4;
5677 return initializer_zerop (exp
);
5680 /* Return 1 if EXP contains all zeros. */
5683 all_zeros_p (const_tree exp
)
5685 if (TREE_CODE (exp
) == CONSTRUCTOR
)
5687 HOST_WIDE_INT nz_elts
, init_elts
;
5690 categorize_ctor_elements (exp
, &nz_elts
, &init_elts
, &complete_p
);
5691 return nz_elts
== 0;
5694 return initializer_zerop (exp
);
5697 /* Helper function for store_constructor.
5698 TARGET, BITSIZE, BITPOS, MODE, EXP are as for store_field.
5699 CLEARED is as for store_constructor.
5700 ALIAS_SET is the alias set to use for any stores.
5702 This provides a recursive shortcut back to store_constructor when it isn't
5703 necessary to go through store_field. This is so that we can pass through
5704 the cleared field to let store_constructor know that we may not have to
5705 clear a substructure if the outer structure has already been cleared. */
5708 store_constructor_field (rtx target
, unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT bitsize
,
5709 HOST_WIDE_INT bitpos
, enum machine_mode mode
,
5710 tree exp
, int cleared
, alias_set_type alias_set
)
5712 if (TREE_CODE (exp
) == CONSTRUCTOR
5713 /* We can only call store_constructor recursively if the size and
5714 bit position are on a byte boundary. */
5715 && bitpos
% BITS_PER_UNIT
== 0
5716 && (bitsize
> 0 && bitsize
% BITS_PER_UNIT
== 0)
5717 /* If we have a nonzero bitpos for a register target, then we just
5718 let store_field do the bitfield handling. This is unlikely to
5719 generate unnecessary clear instructions anyways. */
5720 && (bitpos
== 0 || MEM_P (target
)))
5724 = adjust_address (target
,
5725 GET_MODE (target
) == BLKmode
5727 % GET_MODE_ALIGNMENT (GET_MODE (target
)))
5728 ? BLKmode
: VOIDmode
, bitpos
/ BITS_PER_UNIT
);
5731 /* Update the alias set, if required. */
5732 if (MEM_P (target
) && ! MEM_KEEP_ALIAS_SET_P (target
)
5733 && MEM_ALIAS_SET (target
) != 0)
5735 target
= copy_rtx (target
);
5736 set_mem_alias_set (target
, alias_set
);
5739 store_constructor (exp
, target
, cleared
, bitsize
/ BITS_PER_UNIT
);
5742 store_field (target
, bitsize
, bitpos
, 0, 0, mode
, exp
, alias_set
, false);
5745 /* Store the value of constructor EXP into the rtx TARGET.
5746 TARGET is either a REG or a MEM; we know it cannot conflict, since
5747 safe_from_p has been called.
5748 CLEARED is true if TARGET is known to have been zero'd.
5749 SIZE is the number of bytes of TARGET we are allowed to modify: this
5750 may not be the same as the size of EXP if we are assigning to a field
5751 which has been packed to exclude padding bits. */
5754 store_constructor (tree exp
, rtx target
, int cleared
, HOST_WIDE_INT size
)
5756 tree type
= TREE_TYPE (exp
);
5757 #ifdef WORD_REGISTER_OPERATIONS
5758 HOST_WIDE_INT exp_size
= int_size_in_bytes (type
);
5761 switch (TREE_CODE (type
))
5765 case QUAL_UNION_TYPE
:
5767 unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT idx
;
5770 /* If size is zero or the target is already cleared, do nothing. */
5771 if (size
== 0 || cleared
)
5773 /* We either clear the aggregate or indicate the value is dead. */
5774 else if ((TREE_CODE (type
) == UNION_TYPE
5775 || TREE_CODE (type
) == QUAL_UNION_TYPE
)
5776 && ! CONSTRUCTOR_ELTS (exp
))
5777 /* If the constructor is empty, clear the union. */
5779 clear_storage (target
, expr_size (exp
), BLOCK_OP_NORMAL
);
5783 /* If we are building a static constructor into a register,
5784 set the initial value as zero so we can fold the value into
5785 a constant. But if more than one register is involved,
5786 this probably loses. */
5787 else if (REG_P (target
) && TREE_STATIC (exp
)
5788 && GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (target
)) <= UNITS_PER_WORD
)
5790 emit_move_insn (target
, CONST0_RTX (GET_MODE (target
)));
5794 /* If the constructor has fewer fields than the structure or
5795 if we are initializing the structure to mostly zeros, clear
5796 the whole structure first. Don't do this if TARGET is a
5797 register whose mode size isn't equal to SIZE since
5798 clear_storage can't handle this case. */
5800 && (((int)vec_safe_length (CONSTRUCTOR_ELTS (exp
))
5801 != fields_length (type
))
5802 || mostly_zeros_p (exp
))
5804 || ((HOST_WIDE_INT
) GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (target
))
5807 clear_storage (target
, GEN_INT (size
), BLOCK_OP_NORMAL
);
5811 if (REG_P (target
) && !cleared
)
5812 emit_clobber (target
);
5814 /* Store each element of the constructor into the
5815 corresponding field of TARGET. */
5816 FOR_EACH_CONSTRUCTOR_ELT (CONSTRUCTOR_ELTS (exp
), idx
, field
, value
)
5818 enum machine_mode mode
;
5819 HOST_WIDE_INT bitsize
;
5820 HOST_WIDE_INT bitpos
= 0;
5822 rtx to_rtx
= target
;
5824 /* Just ignore missing fields. We cleared the whole
5825 structure, above, if any fields are missing. */
5829 if (cleared
&& initializer_zerop (value
))
5832 if (host_integerp (DECL_SIZE (field
), 1))
5833 bitsize
= tree_low_cst (DECL_SIZE (field
), 1);
5837 mode
= DECL_MODE (field
);
5838 if (DECL_BIT_FIELD (field
))
5841 offset
= DECL_FIELD_OFFSET (field
);
5842 if (host_integerp (offset
, 0)
5843 && host_integerp (bit_position (field
), 0))
5845 bitpos
= int_bit_position (field
);
5849 bitpos
= tree_low_cst (DECL_FIELD_BIT_OFFSET (field
), 0);
5853 enum machine_mode address_mode
;
5857 = SUBSTITUTE_PLACEHOLDER_IN_EXPR (offset
,
5858 make_tree (TREE_TYPE (exp
),
5861 offset_rtx
= expand_normal (offset
);
5862 gcc_assert (MEM_P (to_rtx
));
5864 address_mode
= get_address_mode (to_rtx
);
5865 if (GET_MODE (offset_rtx
) != address_mode
)
5866 offset_rtx
= convert_to_mode (address_mode
, offset_rtx
, 0);
5868 to_rtx
= offset_address (to_rtx
, offset_rtx
,
5869 highest_pow2_factor (offset
));
5872 #ifdef WORD_REGISTER_OPERATIONS
5873 /* If this initializes a field that is smaller than a
5874 word, at the start of a word, try to widen it to a full
5875 word. This special case allows us to output C++ member
5876 function initializations in a form that the optimizers
5879 && bitsize
< BITS_PER_WORD
5880 && bitpos
% BITS_PER_WORD
== 0
5881 && GET_MODE_CLASS (mode
) == MODE_INT
5882 && TREE_CODE (value
) == INTEGER_CST
5884 && bitpos
+ BITS_PER_WORD
<= exp_size
* BITS_PER_UNIT
)
5886 tree type
= TREE_TYPE (value
);
5888 if (TYPE_PRECISION (type
) < BITS_PER_WORD
)
5890 type
= lang_hooks
.types
.type_for_mode
5891 (word_mode
, TYPE_UNSIGNED (type
));
5892 value
= fold_convert (type
, value
);
5895 if (BYTES_BIG_ENDIAN
)
5897 = fold_build2 (LSHIFT_EXPR
, type
, value
,
5898 build_int_cst (type
,
5899 BITS_PER_WORD
- bitsize
));
5900 bitsize
= BITS_PER_WORD
;
5905 if (MEM_P (to_rtx
) && !MEM_KEEP_ALIAS_SET_P (to_rtx
)
5906 && DECL_NONADDRESSABLE_P (field
))
5908 to_rtx
= copy_rtx (to_rtx
);
5909 MEM_KEEP_ALIAS_SET_P (to_rtx
) = 1;
5912 store_constructor_field (to_rtx
, bitsize
, bitpos
, mode
,
5914 get_alias_set (TREE_TYPE (field
)));
5921 unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT i
;
5924 tree elttype
= TREE_TYPE (type
);
5926 HOST_WIDE_INT minelt
= 0;
5927 HOST_WIDE_INT maxelt
= 0;
5929 domain
= TYPE_DOMAIN (type
);
5930 const_bounds_p
= (TYPE_MIN_VALUE (domain
)
5931 && TYPE_MAX_VALUE (domain
)
5932 && host_integerp (TYPE_MIN_VALUE (domain
), 0)
5933 && host_integerp (TYPE_MAX_VALUE (domain
), 0));
5935 /* If we have constant bounds for the range of the type, get them. */
5938 minelt
= tree_low_cst (TYPE_MIN_VALUE (domain
), 0);
5939 maxelt
= tree_low_cst (TYPE_MAX_VALUE (domain
), 0);
5942 /* If the constructor has fewer elements than the array, clear
5943 the whole array first. Similarly if this is static
5944 constructor of a non-BLKmode object. */
5947 else if (REG_P (target
) && TREE_STATIC (exp
))
5951 unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT idx
;
5953 HOST_WIDE_INT count
= 0, zero_count
= 0;
5954 need_to_clear
= ! const_bounds_p
;
5956 /* This loop is a more accurate version of the loop in
5957 mostly_zeros_p (it handles RANGE_EXPR in an index). It
5958 is also needed to check for missing elements. */
5959 FOR_EACH_CONSTRUCTOR_ELT (CONSTRUCTOR_ELTS (exp
), idx
, index
, value
)
5961 HOST_WIDE_INT this_node_count
;
5966 if (index
!= NULL_TREE
&& TREE_CODE (index
) == RANGE_EXPR
)
5968 tree lo_index
= TREE_OPERAND (index
, 0);
5969 tree hi_index
= TREE_OPERAND (index
, 1);
5971 if (! host_integerp (lo_index
, 1)
5972 || ! host_integerp (hi_index
, 1))
5978 this_node_count
= (tree_low_cst (hi_index
, 1)
5979 - tree_low_cst (lo_index
, 1) + 1);
5982 this_node_count
= 1;
5984 count
+= this_node_count
;
5985 if (mostly_zeros_p (value
))
5986 zero_count
+= this_node_count
;
5989 /* Clear the entire array first if there are any missing
5990 elements, or if the incidence of zero elements is >=
5993 && (count
< maxelt
- minelt
+ 1
5994 || 4 * zero_count
>= 3 * count
))
5998 if (need_to_clear
&& size
> 0)
6001 emit_move_insn (target
, CONST0_RTX (GET_MODE (target
)));
6003 clear_storage (target
, GEN_INT (size
), BLOCK_OP_NORMAL
);
6007 if (!cleared
&& REG_P (target
))
6008 /* Inform later passes that the old value is dead. */
6009 emit_clobber (target
);
6011 /* Store each element of the constructor into the
6012 corresponding element of TARGET, determined by counting the
6014 FOR_EACH_CONSTRUCTOR_ELT (CONSTRUCTOR_ELTS (exp
), i
, index
, value
)
6016 enum machine_mode mode
;
6017 HOST_WIDE_INT bitsize
;
6018 HOST_WIDE_INT bitpos
;
6019 rtx xtarget
= target
;
6021 if (cleared
&& initializer_zerop (value
))
6024 mode
= TYPE_MODE (elttype
);
6025 if (mode
== BLKmode
)
6026 bitsize
= (host_integerp (TYPE_SIZE (elttype
), 1)
6027 ? tree_low_cst (TYPE_SIZE (elttype
), 1)
6030 bitsize
= GET_MODE_BITSIZE (mode
);
6032 if (index
!= NULL_TREE
&& TREE_CODE (index
) == RANGE_EXPR
)
6034 tree lo_index
= TREE_OPERAND (index
, 0);
6035 tree hi_index
= TREE_OPERAND (index
, 1);
6036 rtx index_r
, pos_rtx
;
6037 HOST_WIDE_INT lo
, hi
, count
;
6040 /* If the range is constant and "small", unroll the loop. */
6042 && host_integerp (lo_index
, 0)
6043 && host_integerp (hi_index
, 0)
6044 && (lo
= tree_low_cst (lo_index
, 0),
6045 hi
= tree_low_cst (hi_index
, 0),
6046 count
= hi
- lo
+ 1,
6049 || (host_integerp (TYPE_SIZE (elttype
), 1)
6050 && (tree_low_cst (TYPE_SIZE (elttype
), 1) * count
6053 lo
-= minelt
; hi
-= minelt
;
6054 for (; lo
<= hi
; lo
++)
6056 bitpos
= lo
* tree_low_cst (TYPE_SIZE (elttype
), 0);
6059 && !MEM_KEEP_ALIAS_SET_P (target
)
6060 && TREE_CODE (type
) == ARRAY_TYPE
6061 && TYPE_NONALIASED_COMPONENT (type
))
6063 target
= copy_rtx (target
);
6064 MEM_KEEP_ALIAS_SET_P (target
) = 1;
6067 store_constructor_field
6068 (target
, bitsize
, bitpos
, mode
, value
, cleared
,
6069 get_alias_set (elttype
));
6074 rtx loop_start
= gen_label_rtx ();
6075 rtx loop_end
= gen_label_rtx ();
6078 expand_normal (hi_index
);
6080 index
= build_decl (EXPR_LOCATION (exp
),
6081 VAR_DECL
, NULL_TREE
, domain
);
6082 index_r
= gen_reg_rtx (promote_decl_mode (index
, NULL
));
6083 SET_DECL_RTL (index
, index_r
);
6084 store_expr (lo_index
, index_r
, 0, false);
6086 /* Build the head of the loop. */
6087 do_pending_stack_adjust ();
6088 emit_label (loop_start
);
6090 /* Assign value to element index. */
6092 fold_convert (ssizetype
,
6093 fold_build2 (MINUS_EXPR
,
6096 TYPE_MIN_VALUE (domain
)));
6099 size_binop (MULT_EXPR
, position
,
6100 fold_convert (ssizetype
,
6101 TYPE_SIZE_UNIT (elttype
)));
6103 pos_rtx
= expand_normal (position
);
6104 xtarget
= offset_address (target
, pos_rtx
,
6105 highest_pow2_factor (position
));
6106 xtarget
= adjust_address (xtarget
, mode
, 0);
6107 if (TREE_CODE (value
) == CONSTRUCTOR
)
6108 store_constructor (value
, xtarget
, cleared
,
6109 bitsize
/ BITS_PER_UNIT
);
6111 store_expr (value
, xtarget
, 0, false);
6113 /* Generate a conditional jump to exit the loop. */
6114 exit_cond
= build2 (LT_EXPR
, integer_type_node
,
6116 jumpif (exit_cond
, loop_end
, -1);
6118 /* Update the loop counter, and jump to the head of
6120 expand_assignment (index
,
6121 build2 (PLUS_EXPR
, TREE_TYPE (index
),
6122 index
, integer_one_node
),
6125 emit_jump (loop_start
);
6127 /* Build the end of the loop. */
6128 emit_label (loop_end
);
6131 else if ((index
!= 0 && ! host_integerp (index
, 0))
6132 || ! host_integerp (TYPE_SIZE (elttype
), 1))
6137 index
= ssize_int (1);
6140 index
= fold_convert (ssizetype
,
6141 fold_build2 (MINUS_EXPR
,
6144 TYPE_MIN_VALUE (domain
)));
6147 size_binop (MULT_EXPR
, index
,
6148 fold_convert (ssizetype
,
6149 TYPE_SIZE_UNIT (elttype
)));
6150 xtarget
= offset_address (target
,
6151 expand_normal (position
),
6152 highest_pow2_factor (position
));
6153 xtarget
= adjust_address (xtarget
, mode
, 0);
6154 store_expr (value
, xtarget
, 0, false);
6159 bitpos
= ((tree_low_cst (index
, 0) - minelt
)
6160 * tree_low_cst (TYPE_SIZE (elttype
), 1));
6162 bitpos
= (i
* tree_low_cst (TYPE_SIZE (elttype
), 1));
6164 if (MEM_P (target
) && !MEM_KEEP_ALIAS_SET_P (target
)
6165 && TREE_CODE (type
) == ARRAY_TYPE
6166 && TYPE_NONALIASED_COMPONENT (type
))
6168 target
= copy_rtx (target
);
6169 MEM_KEEP_ALIAS_SET_P (target
) = 1;
6171 store_constructor_field (target
, bitsize
, bitpos
, mode
, value
,
6172 cleared
, get_alias_set (elttype
));
6180 unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT idx
;
6181 constructor_elt
*ce
;
6184 int icode
= CODE_FOR_nothing
;
6185 tree elttype
= TREE_TYPE (type
);
6186 int elt_size
= tree_low_cst (TYPE_SIZE (elttype
), 1);
6187 enum machine_mode eltmode
= TYPE_MODE (elttype
);
6188 HOST_WIDE_INT bitsize
;
6189 HOST_WIDE_INT bitpos
;
6190 rtvec vector
= NULL
;
6192 alias_set_type alias
;
6194 gcc_assert (eltmode
!= BLKmode
);
6196 n_elts
= TYPE_VECTOR_SUBPARTS (type
);
6197 if (REG_P (target
) && VECTOR_MODE_P (GET_MODE (target
)))
6199 enum machine_mode mode
= GET_MODE (target
);
6201 icode
= (int) optab_handler (vec_init_optab
, mode
);
6202 if (icode
!= CODE_FOR_nothing
)
6206 vector
= rtvec_alloc (n_elts
);
6207 for (i
= 0; i
< n_elts
; i
++)
6208 RTVEC_ELT (vector
, i
) = CONST0_RTX (GET_MODE_INNER (mode
));
6212 /* If the constructor has fewer elements than the vector,
6213 clear the whole array first. Similarly if this is static
6214 constructor of a non-BLKmode object. */
6217 else if (REG_P (target
) && TREE_STATIC (exp
))
6221 unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT count
= 0, zero_count
= 0;
6224 FOR_EACH_CONSTRUCTOR_VALUE (CONSTRUCTOR_ELTS (exp
), idx
, value
)
6226 int n_elts_here
= tree_low_cst
6227 (int_const_binop (TRUNC_DIV_EXPR
,
6228 TYPE_SIZE (TREE_TYPE (value
)),
6229 TYPE_SIZE (elttype
)), 1);
6231 count
+= n_elts_here
;
6232 if (mostly_zeros_p (value
))
6233 zero_count
+= n_elts_here
;
6236 /* Clear the entire vector first if there are any missing elements,
6237 or if the incidence of zero elements is >= 75%. */
6238 need_to_clear
= (count
< n_elts
|| 4 * zero_count
>= 3 * count
);
6241 if (need_to_clear
&& size
> 0 && !vector
)
6244 emit_move_insn (target
, CONST0_RTX (GET_MODE (target
)));
6246 clear_storage (target
, GEN_INT (size
), BLOCK_OP_NORMAL
);
6250 /* Inform later passes that the old value is dead. */
6251 if (!cleared
&& !vector
&& REG_P (target
))
6252 emit_move_insn (target
, CONST0_RTX (GET_MODE (target
)));
6255 alias
= MEM_ALIAS_SET (target
);
6257 alias
= get_alias_set (elttype
);
6259 /* Store each element of the constructor into the corresponding
6260 element of TARGET, determined by counting the elements. */
6261 for (idx
= 0, i
= 0;
6262 vec_safe_iterate (CONSTRUCTOR_ELTS (exp
), idx
, &ce
);
6263 idx
++, i
+= bitsize
/ elt_size
)
6265 HOST_WIDE_INT eltpos
;
6266 tree value
= ce
->value
;
6268 bitsize
= tree_low_cst (TYPE_SIZE (TREE_TYPE (value
)), 1);
6269 if (cleared
&& initializer_zerop (value
))
6273 eltpos
= tree_low_cst (ce
->index
, 1);
6279 /* Vector CONSTRUCTORs should only be built from smaller
6280 vectors in the case of BLKmode vectors. */
6281 gcc_assert (TREE_CODE (TREE_TYPE (value
)) != VECTOR_TYPE
);
6282 RTVEC_ELT (vector
, eltpos
)
6283 = expand_normal (value
);
6287 enum machine_mode value_mode
=
6288 TREE_CODE (TREE_TYPE (value
)) == VECTOR_TYPE
6289 ? TYPE_MODE (TREE_TYPE (value
))
6291 bitpos
= eltpos
* elt_size
;
6292 store_constructor_field (target
, bitsize
, bitpos
, value_mode
,
6293 value
, cleared
, alias
);
6298 emit_insn (GEN_FCN (icode
)
6300 gen_rtx_PARALLEL (GET_MODE (target
), vector
)));
6309 /* Store the value of EXP (an expression tree)
6310 into a subfield of TARGET which has mode MODE and occupies
6311 BITSIZE bits, starting BITPOS bits from the start of TARGET.
6312 If MODE is VOIDmode, it means that we are storing into a bit-field.
6314 BITREGION_START is bitpos of the first bitfield in this region.
6315 BITREGION_END is the bitpos of the ending bitfield in this region.
6316 These two fields are 0, if the C++ memory model does not apply,
6317 or we are not interested in keeping track of bitfield regions.
6319 Always return const0_rtx unless we have something particular to
6322 ALIAS_SET is the alias set for the destination. This value will
6323 (in general) be different from that for TARGET, since TARGET is a
6324 reference to the containing structure.
6326 If NONTEMPORAL is true, try generating a nontemporal store. */
6329 store_field (rtx target
, HOST_WIDE_INT bitsize
, HOST_WIDE_INT bitpos
,
6330 unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT bitregion_start
,
6331 unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT bitregion_end
,
6332 enum machine_mode mode
, tree exp
,
6333 alias_set_type alias_set
, bool nontemporal
)
6335 if (TREE_CODE (exp
) == ERROR_MARK
)
6338 /* If we have nothing to store, do nothing unless the expression has
6341 return expand_expr (exp
, const0_rtx
, VOIDmode
, EXPAND_NORMAL
);
6343 if (GET_CODE (target
) == CONCAT
)
6345 /* We're storing into a struct containing a single __complex. */
6347 gcc_assert (!bitpos
);
6348 return store_expr (exp
, target
, 0, nontemporal
);
6351 /* If the structure is in a register or if the component
6352 is a bit field, we cannot use addressing to access it.
6353 Use bit-field techniques or SUBREG to store in it. */
6355 if (mode
== VOIDmode
6356 || (mode
!= BLKmode
&& ! direct_store
[(int) mode
]
6357 && GET_MODE_CLASS (mode
) != MODE_COMPLEX_INT
6358 && GET_MODE_CLASS (mode
) != MODE_COMPLEX_FLOAT
)
6360 || GET_CODE (target
) == SUBREG
6361 /* If the field isn't aligned enough to store as an ordinary memref,
6362 store it as a bit field. */
6364 && ((((MEM_ALIGN (target
) < GET_MODE_ALIGNMENT (mode
))
6365 || bitpos
% GET_MODE_ALIGNMENT (mode
))
6366 && SLOW_UNALIGNED_ACCESS (mode
, MEM_ALIGN (target
)))
6367 || (bitpos
% BITS_PER_UNIT
!= 0)))
6368 || (bitsize
>= 0 && mode
!= BLKmode
6369 && GET_MODE_BITSIZE (mode
) > bitsize
)
6370 /* If the RHS and field are a constant size and the size of the
6371 RHS isn't the same size as the bitfield, we must use bitfield
6374 && TREE_CODE (TYPE_SIZE (TREE_TYPE (exp
))) == INTEGER_CST
6375 && compare_tree_int (TYPE_SIZE (TREE_TYPE (exp
)), bitsize
) != 0)
6376 /* If we are expanding a MEM_REF of a non-BLKmode non-addressable
6377 decl we must use bitfield operations. */
6379 && TREE_CODE (exp
) == MEM_REF
6380 && TREE_CODE (TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 0)) == ADDR_EXPR
6381 && DECL_P (TREE_OPERAND (TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 0), 0))
6382 && !TREE_ADDRESSABLE (TREE_OPERAND (TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 0),0 ))
6383 && DECL_MODE (TREE_OPERAND (TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 0), 0)) != BLKmode
))
6388 /* If EXP is a NOP_EXPR of precision less than its mode, then that
6389 implies a mask operation. If the precision is the same size as
6390 the field we're storing into, that mask is redundant. This is
6391 particularly common with bit field assignments generated by the
6393 nop_def
= get_def_for_expr (exp
, NOP_EXPR
);
6396 tree type
= TREE_TYPE (exp
);
6397 if (INTEGRAL_TYPE_P (type
)
6398 && TYPE_PRECISION (type
) < GET_MODE_BITSIZE (TYPE_MODE (type
))
6399 && bitsize
== TYPE_PRECISION (type
))
6401 tree op
= gimple_assign_rhs1 (nop_def
);
6402 type
= TREE_TYPE (op
);
6403 if (INTEGRAL_TYPE_P (type
) && TYPE_PRECISION (type
) >= bitsize
)
6408 temp
= expand_normal (exp
);
6410 /* If BITSIZE is narrower than the size of the type of EXP
6411 we will be narrowing TEMP. Normally, what's wanted are the
6412 low-order bits. However, if EXP's type is a record and this is
6413 big-endian machine, we want the upper BITSIZE bits. */
6414 if (BYTES_BIG_ENDIAN
&& GET_MODE_CLASS (GET_MODE (temp
)) == MODE_INT
6415 && bitsize
< (HOST_WIDE_INT
) GET_MODE_BITSIZE (GET_MODE (temp
))
6416 && TREE_CODE (TREE_TYPE (exp
)) == RECORD_TYPE
)
6417 temp
= expand_shift (RSHIFT_EXPR
, GET_MODE (temp
), temp
,
6418 GET_MODE_BITSIZE (GET_MODE (temp
)) - bitsize
,
6421 /* Unless MODE is VOIDmode or BLKmode, convert TEMP to MODE. */
6422 if (mode
!= VOIDmode
&& mode
!= BLKmode
6423 && mode
!= TYPE_MODE (TREE_TYPE (exp
)))
6424 temp
= convert_modes (mode
, TYPE_MODE (TREE_TYPE (exp
)), temp
, 1);
6426 /* If the modes of TEMP and TARGET are both BLKmode, both
6427 must be in memory and BITPOS must be aligned on a byte
6428 boundary. If so, we simply do a block copy. Likewise
6429 for a BLKmode-like TARGET. */
6430 if (GET_MODE (temp
) == BLKmode
6431 && (GET_MODE (target
) == BLKmode
6433 && GET_MODE_CLASS (GET_MODE (target
)) == MODE_INT
6434 && (bitpos
% BITS_PER_UNIT
) == 0
6435 && (bitsize
% BITS_PER_UNIT
) == 0)))
6437 gcc_assert (MEM_P (target
) && MEM_P (temp
)
6438 && (bitpos
% BITS_PER_UNIT
) == 0);
6440 target
= adjust_address (target
, VOIDmode
, bitpos
/ BITS_PER_UNIT
);
6441 emit_block_move (target
, temp
,
6442 GEN_INT ((bitsize
+ BITS_PER_UNIT
- 1)
6449 /* Handle calls that return values in multiple non-contiguous locations.
6450 The Irix 6 ABI has examples of this. */
6451 if (GET_CODE (temp
) == PARALLEL
)
6453 HOST_WIDE_INT size
= int_size_in_bytes (TREE_TYPE (exp
));
6455 if (mode
== BLKmode
)
6456 mode
= smallest_mode_for_size (size
* BITS_PER_UNIT
, MODE_INT
);
6457 temp_target
= gen_reg_rtx (mode
);
6458 emit_group_store (temp_target
, temp
, TREE_TYPE (exp
), size
);
6461 else if (mode
== BLKmode
)
6463 /* Handle calls that return BLKmode values in registers. */
6464 if (REG_P (temp
) && TREE_CODE (exp
) == CALL_EXPR
)
6466 rtx temp_target
= gen_reg_rtx (GET_MODE (temp
));
6467 copy_blkmode_from_reg (temp_target
, temp
, TREE_TYPE (exp
));
6472 HOST_WIDE_INT size
= int_size_in_bytes (TREE_TYPE (exp
));
6474 mode
= smallest_mode_for_size (size
* BITS_PER_UNIT
, MODE_INT
);
6475 temp_target
= gen_reg_rtx (mode
);
6477 = extract_bit_field (temp
, size
* BITS_PER_UNIT
, 0, 1,
6478 temp_target
, mode
, mode
);
6483 /* Store the value in the bitfield. */
6484 store_bit_field (target
, bitsize
, bitpos
,
6485 bitregion_start
, bitregion_end
,
6492 /* Now build a reference to just the desired component. */
6493 rtx to_rtx
= adjust_address (target
, mode
, bitpos
/ BITS_PER_UNIT
);
6495 if (to_rtx
== target
)
6496 to_rtx
= copy_rtx (to_rtx
);
6498 if (!MEM_KEEP_ALIAS_SET_P (to_rtx
) && MEM_ALIAS_SET (to_rtx
) != 0)
6499 set_mem_alias_set (to_rtx
, alias_set
);
6501 return store_expr (exp
, to_rtx
, 0, nontemporal
);
6505 /* Given an expression EXP that may be a COMPONENT_REF, a BIT_FIELD_REF,
6506 an ARRAY_REF, or an ARRAY_RANGE_REF, look for nested operations of these
6507 codes and find the ultimate containing object, which we return.
6509 We set *PBITSIZE to the size in bits that we want, *PBITPOS to the
6510 bit position, and *PUNSIGNEDP to the signedness of the field.
6511 If the position of the field is variable, we store a tree
6512 giving the variable offset (in units) in *POFFSET.
6513 This offset is in addition to the bit position.
6514 If the position is not variable, we store 0 in *POFFSET.
6516 If any of the extraction expressions is volatile,
6517 we store 1 in *PVOLATILEP. Otherwise we don't change that.
6519 If the field is a non-BLKmode bit-field, *PMODE is set to VOIDmode.
6520 Otherwise, it is a mode that can be used to access the field.
6522 If the field describes a variable-sized object, *PMODE is set to
6523 BLKmode and *PBITSIZE is set to -1. An access cannot be made in
6524 this case, but the address of the object can be found.
6526 If KEEP_ALIGNING is true and the target is STRICT_ALIGNMENT, we don't
6527 look through nodes that serve as markers of a greater alignment than
6528 the one that can be deduced from the expression. These nodes make it
6529 possible for front-ends to prevent temporaries from being created by
6530 the middle-end on alignment considerations. For that purpose, the
6531 normal operating mode at high-level is to always pass FALSE so that
6532 the ultimate containing object is really returned; moreover, the
6533 associated predicate handled_component_p will always return TRUE
6534 on these nodes, thus indicating that they are essentially handled
6535 by get_inner_reference. TRUE should only be passed when the caller
6536 is scanning the expression in order to build another representation
6537 and specifically knows how to handle these nodes; as such, this is
6538 the normal operating mode in the RTL expanders. */
6541 get_inner_reference (tree exp
, HOST_WIDE_INT
*pbitsize
,
6542 HOST_WIDE_INT
*pbitpos
, tree
*poffset
,
6543 enum machine_mode
*pmode
, int *punsignedp
,
6544 int *pvolatilep
, bool keep_aligning
)
6547 enum machine_mode mode
= VOIDmode
;
6548 bool blkmode_bitfield
= false;
6549 tree offset
= size_zero_node
;
6550 double_int bit_offset
= double_int_zero
;
6552 /* First get the mode, signedness, and size. We do this from just the
6553 outermost expression. */
6555 if (TREE_CODE (exp
) == COMPONENT_REF
)
6557 tree field
= TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 1);
6558 size_tree
= DECL_SIZE (field
);
6559 if (flag_strict_volatile_bitfields
> 0
6560 && TREE_THIS_VOLATILE (exp
)
6561 && DECL_BIT_FIELD_TYPE (field
)
6562 && DECL_MODE (field
) != BLKmode
)
6563 /* Volatile bitfields should be accessed in the mode of the
6564 field's type, not the mode computed based on the bit
6566 mode
= TYPE_MODE (DECL_BIT_FIELD_TYPE (field
));
6567 else if (!DECL_BIT_FIELD (field
))
6568 mode
= DECL_MODE (field
);
6569 else if (DECL_MODE (field
) == BLKmode
)
6570 blkmode_bitfield
= true;
6572 *punsignedp
= DECL_UNSIGNED (field
);
6574 else if (TREE_CODE (exp
) == BIT_FIELD_REF
)
6576 size_tree
= TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 1);
6577 *punsignedp
= (! INTEGRAL_TYPE_P (TREE_TYPE (exp
))
6578 || TYPE_UNSIGNED (TREE_TYPE (exp
)));
6580 /* For vector types, with the correct size of access, use the mode of
6582 if (TREE_CODE (TREE_TYPE (TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 0))) == VECTOR_TYPE
6583 && TREE_TYPE (exp
) == TREE_TYPE (TREE_TYPE (TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 0)))
6584 && tree_int_cst_equal (size_tree
, TYPE_SIZE (TREE_TYPE (exp
))))
6585 mode
= TYPE_MODE (TREE_TYPE (exp
));
6589 mode
= TYPE_MODE (TREE_TYPE (exp
));
6590 *punsignedp
= TYPE_UNSIGNED (TREE_TYPE (exp
));
6592 if (mode
== BLKmode
)
6593 size_tree
= TYPE_SIZE (TREE_TYPE (exp
));
6595 *pbitsize
= GET_MODE_BITSIZE (mode
);
6600 if (! host_integerp (size_tree
, 1))
6601 mode
= BLKmode
, *pbitsize
= -1;
6603 *pbitsize
= tree_low_cst (size_tree
, 1);
6606 /* Compute cumulative bit-offset for nested component-refs and array-refs,
6607 and find the ultimate containing object. */
6610 switch (TREE_CODE (exp
))
6613 bit_offset
+= tree_to_double_int (TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 2));
6618 tree field
= TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 1);
6619 tree this_offset
= component_ref_field_offset (exp
);
6621 /* If this field hasn't been filled in yet, don't go past it.
6622 This should only happen when folding expressions made during
6623 type construction. */
6624 if (this_offset
== 0)
6627 offset
= size_binop (PLUS_EXPR
, offset
, this_offset
);
6628 bit_offset
+= tree_to_double_int (DECL_FIELD_BIT_OFFSET (field
));
6630 /* ??? Right now we don't do anything with DECL_OFFSET_ALIGN. */
6635 case ARRAY_RANGE_REF
:
6637 tree index
= TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 1);
6638 tree low_bound
= array_ref_low_bound (exp
);
6639 tree unit_size
= array_ref_element_size (exp
);
6641 /* We assume all arrays have sizes that are a multiple of a byte.
6642 First subtract the lower bound, if any, in the type of the
6643 index, then convert to sizetype and multiply by the size of
6644 the array element. */
6645 if (! integer_zerop (low_bound
))
6646 index
= fold_build2 (MINUS_EXPR
, TREE_TYPE (index
),
6649 offset
= size_binop (PLUS_EXPR
, offset
,
6650 size_binop (MULT_EXPR
,
6651 fold_convert (sizetype
, index
),
6660 bit_offset
+= double_int::from_uhwi (*pbitsize
);
6663 case VIEW_CONVERT_EXPR
:
6664 if (keep_aligning
&& STRICT_ALIGNMENT
6665 && (TYPE_ALIGN (TREE_TYPE (exp
))
6666 > TYPE_ALIGN (TREE_TYPE (TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 0))))
6667 && (TYPE_ALIGN (TREE_TYPE (TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 0)))
6668 < BIGGEST_ALIGNMENT
)
6669 && (TYPE_ALIGN_OK (TREE_TYPE (exp
))
6670 || TYPE_ALIGN_OK (TREE_TYPE (TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 0)))))
6675 /* Hand back the decl for MEM[&decl, off]. */
6676 if (TREE_CODE (TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 0)) == ADDR_EXPR
)
6678 tree off
= TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 1);
6679 if (!integer_zerop (off
))
6681 double_int boff
, coff
= mem_ref_offset (exp
);
6682 boff
= coff
.lshift (BITS_PER_UNIT
== 8
6683 ? 3 : exact_log2 (BITS_PER_UNIT
));
6686 exp
= TREE_OPERAND (TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 0), 0);
6694 /* If any reference in the chain is volatile, the effect is volatile. */
6695 if (TREE_THIS_VOLATILE (exp
))
6698 exp
= TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 0);
6702 /* If OFFSET is constant, see if we can return the whole thing as a
6703 constant bit position. Make sure to handle overflow during
6705 if (TREE_CODE (offset
) == INTEGER_CST
)
6707 double_int tem
= tree_to_double_int (offset
);
6708 tem
= tem
.sext (TYPE_PRECISION (sizetype
));
6709 tem
= tem
.lshift (BITS_PER_UNIT
== 8 ? 3 : exact_log2 (BITS_PER_UNIT
));
6711 if (tem
.fits_shwi ())
6713 *pbitpos
= tem
.to_shwi ();
6714 *poffset
= offset
= NULL_TREE
;
6718 /* Otherwise, split it up. */
6721 /* Avoid returning a negative bitpos as this may wreak havoc later. */
6722 if (bit_offset
.is_negative ())
6725 = double_int::mask (BITS_PER_UNIT
== 8
6726 ? 3 : exact_log2 (BITS_PER_UNIT
));
6727 double_int tem
= bit_offset
.and_not (mask
);
6728 /* TEM is the bitpos rounded to BITS_PER_UNIT towards -Inf.
6729 Subtract it to BIT_OFFSET and add it (scaled) to OFFSET. */
6731 tem
= tem
.arshift (BITS_PER_UNIT
== 8
6732 ? 3 : exact_log2 (BITS_PER_UNIT
),
6733 HOST_BITS_PER_DOUBLE_INT
);
6734 offset
= size_binop (PLUS_EXPR
, offset
,
6735 double_int_to_tree (sizetype
, tem
));
6738 *pbitpos
= bit_offset
.to_shwi ();
6742 /* We can use BLKmode for a byte-aligned BLKmode bitfield. */
6743 if (mode
== VOIDmode
6745 && (*pbitpos
% BITS_PER_UNIT
) == 0
6746 && (*pbitsize
% BITS_PER_UNIT
) == 0)
6754 /* Return a tree of sizetype representing the size, in bytes, of the element
6755 of EXP, an ARRAY_REF or an ARRAY_RANGE_REF. */
6758 array_ref_element_size (tree exp
)
6760 tree aligned_size
= TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 3);
6761 tree elmt_type
= TREE_TYPE (TREE_TYPE (TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 0)));
6762 location_t loc
= EXPR_LOCATION (exp
);
6764 /* If a size was specified in the ARRAY_REF, it's the size measured
6765 in alignment units of the element type. So multiply by that value. */
6768 /* ??? tree_ssa_useless_type_conversion will eliminate casts to
6769 sizetype from another type of the same width and signedness. */
6770 if (TREE_TYPE (aligned_size
) != sizetype
)
6771 aligned_size
= fold_convert_loc (loc
, sizetype
, aligned_size
);
6772 return size_binop_loc (loc
, MULT_EXPR
, aligned_size
,
6773 size_int (TYPE_ALIGN_UNIT (elmt_type
)));
6776 /* Otherwise, take the size from that of the element type. Substitute
6777 any PLACEHOLDER_EXPR that we have. */
6779 return SUBSTITUTE_PLACEHOLDER_IN_EXPR (TYPE_SIZE_UNIT (elmt_type
), exp
);
6782 /* Return a tree representing the lower bound of the array mentioned in
6783 EXP, an ARRAY_REF or an ARRAY_RANGE_REF. */
6786 array_ref_low_bound (tree exp
)
6788 tree domain_type
= TYPE_DOMAIN (TREE_TYPE (TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 0)));
6790 /* If a lower bound is specified in EXP, use it. */
6791 if (TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 2))
6792 return TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 2);
6794 /* Otherwise, if there is a domain type and it has a lower bound, use it,
6795 substituting for a PLACEHOLDER_EXPR as needed. */
6796 if (domain_type
&& TYPE_MIN_VALUE (domain_type
))
6797 return SUBSTITUTE_PLACEHOLDER_IN_EXPR (TYPE_MIN_VALUE (domain_type
), exp
);
6799 /* Otherwise, return a zero of the appropriate type. */
6800 return build_int_cst (TREE_TYPE (TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 1)), 0);
6803 /* Returns true if REF is an array reference to an array at the end of
6804 a structure. If this is the case, the array may be allocated larger
6805 than its upper bound implies. */
6808 array_at_struct_end_p (tree ref
)
6810 if (TREE_CODE (ref
) != ARRAY_REF
6811 && TREE_CODE (ref
) != ARRAY_RANGE_REF
)
6814 while (handled_component_p (ref
))
6816 /* If the reference chain contains a component reference to a
6817 non-union type and there follows another field the reference
6818 is not at the end of a structure. */
6819 if (TREE_CODE (ref
) == COMPONENT_REF
6820 && TREE_CODE (TREE_TYPE (TREE_OPERAND (ref
, 0))) == RECORD_TYPE
)
6822 tree nextf
= DECL_CHAIN (TREE_OPERAND (ref
, 1));
6823 while (nextf
&& TREE_CODE (nextf
) != FIELD_DECL
)
6824 nextf
= DECL_CHAIN (nextf
);
6829 ref
= TREE_OPERAND (ref
, 0);
6832 /* If the reference is based on a declared entity, the size of the array
6833 is constrained by its given domain. */
6840 /* Return a tree representing the upper bound of the array mentioned in
6841 EXP, an ARRAY_REF or an ARRAY_RANGE_REF. */
6844 array_ref_up_bound (tree exp
)
6846 tree domain_type
= TYPE_DOMAIN (TREE_TYPE (TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 0)));
6848 /* If there is a domain type and it has an upper bound, use it, substituting
6849 for a PLACEHOLDER_EXPR as needed. */
6850 if (domain_type
&& TYPE_MAX_VALUE (domain_type
))
6851 return SUBSTITUTE_PLACEHOLDER_IN_EXPR (TYPE_MAX_VALUE (domain_type
), exp
);
6853 /* Otherwise fail. */
6857 /* Return a tree representing the offset, in bytes, of the field referenced
6858 by EXP. This does not include any offset in DECL_FIELD_BIT_OFFSET. */
6861 component_ref_field_offset (tree exp
)
6863 tree aligned_offset
= TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 2);
6864 tree field
= TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 1);
6865 location_t loc
= EXPR_LOCATION (exp
);
6867 /* If an offset was specified in the COMPONENT_REF, it's the offset measured
6868 in units of DECL_OFFSET_ALIGN / BITS_PER_UNIT. So multiply by that
6872 /* ??? tree_ssa_useless_type_conversion will eliminate casts to
6873 sizetype from another type of the same width and signedness. */
6874 if (TREE_TYPE (aligned_offset
) != sizetype
)
6875 aligned_offset
= fold_convert_loc (loc
, sizetype
, aligned_offset
);
6876 return size_binop_loc (loc
, MULT_EXPR
, aligned_offset
,
6877 size_int (DECL_OFFSET_ALIGN (field
)
6881 /* Otherwise, take the offset from that of the field. Substitute
6882 any PLACEHOLDER_EXPR that we have. */
6884 return SUBSTITUTE_PLACEHOLDER_IN_EXPR (DECL_FIELD_OFFSET (field
), exp
);
6887 /* Alignment in bits the TARGET of an assignment may be assumed to have. */
6889 static unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT
6890 target_align (const_tree target
)
6892 /* We might have a chain of nested references with intermediate misaligning
6893 bitfields components, so need to recurse to find out. */
6895 unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT this_align
, outer_align
;
6897 switch (TREE_CODE (target
))
6903 this_align
= DECL_ALIGN (TREE_OPERAND (target
, 1));
6904 outer_align
= target_align (TREE_OPERAND (target
, 0));
6905 return MIN (this_align
, outer_align
);
6908 case ARRAY_RANGE_REF
:
6909 this_align
= TYPE_ALIGN (TREE_TYPE (target
));
6910 outer_align
= target_align (TREE_OPERAND (target
, 0));
6911 return MIN (this_align
, outer_align
);
6914 case NON_LVALUE_EXPR
:
6915 case VIEW_CONVERT_EXPR
:
6916 this_align
= TYPE_ALIGN (TREE_TYPE (target
));
6917 outer_align
= target_align (TREE_OPERAND (target
, 0));
6918 return MAX (this_align
, outer_align
);
6921 return TYPE_ALIGN (TREE_TYPE (target
));
6926 /* Given an rtx VALUE that may contain additions and multiplications, return
6927 an equivalent value that just refers to a register, memory, or constant.
6928 This is done by generating instructions to perform the arithmetic and
6929 returning a pseudo-register containing the value.
6931 The returned value may be a REG, SUBREG, MEM or constant. */
6934 force_operand (rtx value
, rtx target
)
6937 /* Use subtarget as the target for operand 0 of a binary operation. */
6938 rtx subtarget
= get_subtarget (target
);
6939 enum rtx_code code
= GET_CODE (value
);
6941 /* Check for subreg applied to an expression produced by loop optimizer. */
6943 && !REG_P (SUBREG_REG (value
))
6944 && !MEM_P (SUBREG_REG (value
)))
6947 = simplify_gen_subreg (GET_MODE (value
),
6948 force_reg (GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (value
)),
6949 force_operand (SUBREG_REG (value
),
6951 GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (value
)),
6952 SUBREG_BYTE (value
));
6953 code
= GET_CODE (value
);
6956 /* Check for a PIC address load. */
6957 if ((code
== PLUS
|| code
== MINUS
)
6958 && XEXP (value
, 0) == pic_offset_table_rtx
6959 && (GET_CODE (XEXP (value
, 1)) == SYMBOL_REF
6960 || GET_CODE (XEXP (value
, 1)) == LABEL_REF
6961 || GET_CODE (XEXP (value
, 1)) == CONST
))
6964 subtarget
= gen_reg_rtx (GET_MODE (value
));
6965 emit_move_insn (subtarget
, value
);
6969 if (ARITHMETIC_P (value
))
6971 op2
= XEXP (value
, 1);
6972 if (!CONSTANT_P (op2
) && !(REG_P (op2
) && op2
!= subtarget
))
6974 if (code
== MINUS
&& CONST_INT_P (op2
))
6977 op2
= negate_rtx (GET_MODE (value
), op2
);
6980 /* Check for an addition with OP2 a constant integer and our first
6981 operand a PLUS of a virtual register and something else. In that
6982 case, we want to emit the sum of the virtual register and the
6983 constant first and then add the other value. This allows virtual
6984 register instantiation to simply modify the constant rather than
6985 creating another one around this addition. */
6986 if (code
== PLUS
&& CONST_INT_P (op2
)
6987 && GET_CODE (XEXP (value
, 0)) == PLUS
6988 && REG_P (XEXP (XEXP (value
, 0), 0))
6989 && REGNO (XEXP (XEXP (value
, 0), 0)) >= FIRST_VIRTUAL_REGISTER
6990 && REGNO (XEXP (XEXP (value
, 0), 0)) <= LAST_VIRTUAL_REGISTER
)
6992 rtx temp
= expand_simple_binop (GET_MODE (value
), code
,
6993 XEXP (XEXP (value
, 0), 0), op2
,
6994 subtarget
, 0, OPTAB_LIB_WIDEN
);
6995 return expand_simple_binop (GET_MODE (value
), code
, temp
,
6996 force_operand (XEXP (XEXP (value
,
6998 target
, 0, OPTAB_LIB_WIDEN
);
7001 op1
= force_operand (XEXP (value
, 0), subtarget
);
7002 op2
= force_operand (op2
, NULL_RTX
);
7006 return expand_mult (GET_MODE (value
), op1
, op2
, target
, 1);
7008 if (!INTEGRAL_MODE_P (GET_MODE (value
)))
7009 return expand_simple_binop (GET_MODE (value
), code
, op1
, op2
,
7010 target
, 1, OPTAB_LIB_WIDEN
);
7012 return expand_divmod (0,
7013 FLOAT_MODE_P (GET_MODE (value
))
7014 ? RDIV_EXPR
: TRUNC_DIV_EXPR
,
7015 GET_MODE (value
), op1
, op2
, target
, 0);
7017 return expand_divmod (1, TRUNC_MOD_EXPR
, GET_MODE (value
), op1
, op2
,
7020 return expand_divmod (0, TRUNC_DIV_EXPR
, GET_MODE (value
), op1
, op2
,
7023 return expand_divmod (1, TRUNC_MOD_EXPR
, GET_MODE (value
), op1
, op2
,
7026 return expand_simple_binop (GET_MODE (value
), code
, op1
, op2
,
7027 target
, 0, OPTAB_LIB_WIDEN
);
7029 return expand_simple_binop (GET_MODE (value
), code
, op1
, op2
,
7030 target
, 1, OPTAB_LIB_WIDEN
);
7033 if (UNARY_P (value
))
7036 target
= gen_reg_rtx (GET_MODE (value
));
7037 op1
= force_operand (XEXP (value
, 0), NULL_RTX
);
7044 case FLOAT_TRUNCATE
:
7045 convert_move (target
, op1
, code
== ZERO_EXTEND
);
7050 expand_fix (target
, op1
, code
== UNSIGNED_FIX
);
7054 case UNSIGNED_FLOAT
:
7055 expand_float (target
, op1
, code
== UNSIGNED_FLOAT
);
7059 return expand_simple_unop (GET_MODE (value
), code
, op1
, target
, 0);
7063 #ifdef INSN_SCHEDULING
7064 /* On machines that have insn scheduling, we want all memory reference to be
7065 explicit, so we need to deal with such paradoxical SUBREGs. */
7066 if (paradoxical_subreg_p (value
) && MEM_P (SUBREG_REG (value
)))
7068 = simplify_gen_subreg (GET_MODE (value
),
7069 force_reg (GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (value
)),
7070 force_operand (SUBREG_REG (value
),
7072 GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (value
)),
7073 SUBREG_BYTE (value
));
7079 /* Subroutine of expand_expr: return nonzero iff there is no way that
7080 EXP can reference X, which is being modified. TOP_P is nonzero if this
7081 call is going to be used to determine whether we need a temporary
7082 for EXP, as opposed to a recursive call to this function.
7084 It is always safe for this routine to return zero since it merely
7085 searches for optimization opportunities. */
7088 safe_from_p (const_rtx x
, tree exp
, int top_p
)
7094 /* If EXP has varying size, we MUST use a target since we currently
7095 have no way of allocating temporaries of variable size
7096 (except for arrays that have TYPE_ARRAY_MAX_SIZE set).
7097 So we assume here that something at a higher level has prevented a
7098 clash. This is somewhat bogus, but the best we can do. Only
7099 do this when X is BLKmode and when we are at the top level. */
7100 || (top_p
&& TREE_TYPE (exp
) != 0 && COMPLETE_TYPE_P (TREE_TYPE (exp
))
7101 && TREE_CODE (TYPE_SIZE (TREE_TYPE (exp
))) != INTEGER_CST
7102 && (TREE_CODE (TREE_TYPE (exp
)) != ARRAY_TYPE
7103 || TYPE_ARRAY_MAX_SIZE (TREE_TYPE (exp
)) == NULL_TREE
7104 || TREE_CODE (TYPE_ARRAY_MAX_SIZE (TREE_TYPE (exp
)))
7106 && GET_MODE (x
) == BLKmode
)
7107 /* If X is in the outgoing argument area, it is always safe. */
7109 && (XEXP (x
, 0) == virtual_outgoing_args_rtx
7110 || (GET_CODE (XEXP (x
, 0)) == PLUS
7111 && XEXP (XEXP (x
, 0), 0) == virtual_outgoing_args_rtx
))))
7114 /* If this is a subreg of a hard register, declare it unsafe, otherwise,
7115 find the underlying pseudo. */
7116 if (GET_CODE (x
) == SUBREG
)
7119 if (REG_P (x
) && REGNO (x
) < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER
)
7123 /* Now look at our tree code and possibly recurse. */
7124 switch (TREE_CODE_CLASS (TREE_CODE (exp
)))
7126 case tcc_declaration
:
7127 exp_rtl
= DECL_RTL_IF_SET (exp
);
7133 case tcc_exceptional
:
7134 if (TREE_CODE (exp
) == TREE_LIST
)
7138 if (TREE_VALUE (exp
) && !safe_from_p (x
, TREE_VALUE (exp
), 0))
7140 exp
= TREE_CHAIN (exp
);
7143 if (TREE_CODE (exp
) != TREE_LIST
)
7144 return safe_from_p (x
, exp
, 0);
7147 else if (TREE_CODE (exp
) == CONSTRUCTOR
)
7149 constructor_elt
*ce
;
7150 unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT idx
;
7152 FOR_EACH_VEC_SAFE_ELT (CONSTRUCTOR_ELTS (exp
), idx
, ce
)
7153 if ((ce
->index
!= NULL_TREE
&& !safe_from_p (x
, ce
->index
, 0))
7154 || !safe_from_p (x
, ce
->value
, 0))
7158 else if (TREE_CODE (exp
) == ERROR_MARK
)
7159 return 1; /* An already-visited SAVE_EXPR? */
7164 /* The only case we look at here is the DECL_INITIAL inside a
7166 return (TREE_CODE (exp
) != DECL_EXPR
7167 || TREE_CODE (DECL_EXPR_DECL (exp
)) != VAR_DECL
7168 || !DECL_INITIAL (DECL_EXPR_DECL (exp
))
7169 || safe_from_p (x
, DECL_INITIAL (DECL_EXPR_DECL (exp
)), 0));
7172 case tcc_comparison
:
7173 if (!safe_from_p (x
, TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 1), 0))
7178 return safe_from_p (x
, TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 0), 0);
7180 case tcc_expression
:
7183 /* Now do code-specific tests. EXP_RTL is set to any rtx we find in
7184 the expression. If it is set, we conflict iff we are that rtx or
7185 both are in memory. Otherwise, we check all operands of the
7186 expression recursively. */
7188 switch (TREE_CODE (exp
))
7191 /* If the operand is static or we are static, we can't conflict.
7192 Likewise if we don't conflict with the operand at all. */
7193 if (staticp (TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 0))
7194 || TREE_STATIC (exp
)
7195 || safe_from_p (x
, TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 0), 0))
7198 /* Otherwise, the only way this can conflict is if we are taking
7199 the address of a DECL a that address if part of X, which is
7201 exp
= TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 0);
7204 if (!DECL_RTL_SET_P (exp
)
7205 || !MEM_P (DECL_RTL (exp
)))
7208 exp_rtl
= XEXP (DECL_RTL (exp
), 0);
7214 && alias_sets_conflict_p (MEM_ALIAS_SET (x
),
7215 get_alias_set (exp
)))
7220 /* Assume that the call will clobber all hard registers and
7222 if ((REG_P (x
) && REGNO (x
) < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER
)
7227 case WITH_CLEANUP_EXPR
:
7228 case CLEANUP_POINT_EXPR
:
7229 /* Lowered by gimplify.c. */
7233 return safe_from_p (x
, TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 0), 0);
7239 /* If we have an rtx, we do not need to scan our operands. */
7243 nops
= TREE_OPERAND_LENGTH (exp
);
7244 for (i
= 0; i
< nops
; i
++)
7245 if (TREE_OPERAND (exp
, i
) != 0
7246 && ! safe_from_p (x
, TREE_OPERAND (exp
, i
), 0))
7252 /* Should never get a type here. */
7256 /* If we have an rtl, find any enclosed object. Then see if we conflict
7260 if (GET_CODE (exp_rtl
) == SUBREG
)
7262 exp_rtl
= SUBREG_REG (exp_rtl
);
7264 && REGNO (exp_rtl
) < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER
)
7268 /* If the rtl is X, then it is not safe. Otherwise, it is unless both
7269 are memory and they conflict. */
7270 return ! (rtx_equal_p (x
, exp_rtl
)
7271 || (MEM_P (x
) && MEM_P (exp_rtl
)
7272 && true_dependence (exp_rtl
, VOIDmode
, x
)));
7275 /* If we reach here, it is safe. */
7280 /* Return the highest power of two that EXP is known to be a multiple of.
7281 This is used in updating alignment of MEMs in array references. */
7283 unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT
7284 highest_pow2_factor (const_tree exp
)
7286 unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT c0
, c1
;
7288 switch (TREE_CODE (exp
))
7291 /* We can find the lowest bit that's a one. If the low
7292 HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT bits are zero, return BIGGEST_ALIGNMENT.
7293 We need to handle this case since we can find it in a COND_EXPR,
7294 a MIN_EXPR, or a MAX_EXPR. If the constant overflows, we have an
7295 erroneous program, so return BIGGEST_ALIGNMENT to avoid any
7297 if (TREE_OVERFLOW (exp
))
7298 return BIGGEST_ALIGNMENT
;
7301 /* Note: tree_low_cst is intentionally not used here,
7302 we don't care about the upper bits. */
7303 c0
= TREE_INT_CST_LOW (exp
);
7305 return c0
? c0
: BIGGEST_ALIGNMENT
;
7309 case PLUS_EXPR
: case MINUS_EXPR
: case MIN_EXPR
: case MAX_EXPR
:
7310 c0
= highest_pow2_factor (TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 0));
7311 c1
= highest_pow2_factor (TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 1));
7312 return MIN (c0
, c1
);
7315 c0
= highest_pow2_factor (TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 0));
7316 c1
= highest_pow2_factor (TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 1));
7319 case ROUND_DIV_EXPR
: case TRUNC_DIV_EXPR
: case FLOOR_DIV_EXPR
:
7321 if (integer_pow2p (TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 1))
7322 && host_integerp (TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 1), 1))
7324 c0
= highest_pow2_factor (TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 0));
7325 c1
= tree_low_cst (TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 1), 1);
7326 return MAX (1, c0
/ c1
);
7331 /* The highest power of two of a bit-and expression is the maximum of
7332 that of its operands. We typically get here for a complex LHS and
7333 a constant negative power of two on the RHS to force an explicit
7334 alignment, so don't bother looking at the LHS. */
7335 return highest_pow2_factor (TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 1));
7339 return highest_pow2_factor (TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 0));
7342 return highest_pow2_factor (TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 1));
7345 c0
= highest_pow2_factor (TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 1));
7346 c1
= highest_pow2_factor (TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 2));
7347 return MIN (c0
, c1
);
7356 /* Similar, except that the alignment requirements of TARGET are
7357 taken into account. Assume it is at least as aligned as its
7358 type, unless it is a COMPONENT_REF in which case the layout of
7359 the structure gives the alignment. */
7361 static unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT
7362 highest_pow2_factor_for_target (const_tree target
, const_tree exp
)
7364 unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT talign
= target_align (target
) / BITS_PER_UNIT
;
7365 unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT factor
= highest_pow2_factor (exp
);
7367 return MAX (factor
, talign
);
7370 #ifdef HAVE_conditional_move
7371 /* Convert the tree comparison code TCODE to the rtl one where the
7372 signedness is UNSIGNEDP. */
7374 static enum rtx_code
7375 convert_tree_comp_to_rtx (enum tree_code tcode
, int unsignedp
)
7387 code
= unsignedp
? LTU
: LT
;
7390 code
= unsignedp
? LEU
: LE
;
7393 code
= unsignedp
? GTU
: GT
;
7396 code
= unsignedp
? GEU
: GE
;
7398 case UNORDERED_EXPR
:
7430 /* Subroutine of expand_expr. Expand the two operands of a binary
7431 expression EXP0 and EXP1 placing the results in OP0 and OP1.
7432 The value may be stored in TARGET if TARGET is nonzero. The
7433 MODIFIER argument is as documented by expand_expr. */
7436 expand_operands (tree exp0
, tree exp1
, rtx target
, rtx
*op0
, rtx
*op1
,
7437 enum expand_modifier modifier
)
7439 if (! safe_from_p (target
, exp1
, 1))
7441 if (operand_equal_p (exp0
, exp1
, 0))
7443 *op0
= expand_expr (exp0
, target
, VOIDmode
, modifier
);
7444 *op1
= copy_rtx (*op0
);
7448 /* If we need to preserve evaluation order, copy exp0 into its own
7449 temporary variable so that it can't be clobbered by exp1. */
7450 if (flag_evaluation_order
&& TREE_SIDE_EFFECTS (exp1
))
7451 exp0
= save_expr (exp0
);
7452 *op0
= expand_expr (exp0
, target
, VOIDmode
, modifier
);
7453 *op1
= expand_expr (exp1
, NULL_RTX
, VOIDmode
, modifier
);
7458 /* Return a MEM that contains constant EXP. DEFER is as for
7459 output_constant_def and MODIFIER is as for expand_expr. */
7462 expand_expr_constant (tree exp
, int defer
, enum expand_modifier modifier
)
7466 mem
= output_constant_def (exp
, defer
);
7467 if (modifier
!= EXPAND_INITIALIZER
)
7468 mem
= use_anchored_address (mem
);
7472 /* A subroutine of expand_expr_addr_expr. Evaluate the address of EXP.
7473 The TARGET, TMODE and MODIFIER arguments are as for expand_expr. */
7476 expand_expr_addr_expr_1 (tree exp
, rtx target
, enum machine_mode tmode
,
7477 enum expand_modifier modifier
, addr_space_t as
)
7479 rtx result
, subtarget
;
7481 HOST_WIDE_INT bitsize
, bitpos
;
7482 int volatilep
, unsignedp
;
7483 enum machine_mode mode1
;
7485 /* If we are taking the address of a constant and are at the top level,
7486 we have to use output_constant_def since we can't call force_const_mem
7488 /* ??? This should be considered a front-end bug. We should not be
7489 generating ADDR_EXPR of something that isn't an LVALUE. The only
7490 exception here is STRING_CST. */
7491 if (CONSTANT_CLASS_P (exp
))
7493 result
= XEXP (expand_expr_constant (exp
, 0, modifier
), 0);
7494 if (modifier
< EXPAND_SUM
)
7495 result
= force_operand (result
, target
);
7499 /* Everything must be something allowed by is_gimple_addressable. */
7500 switch (TREE_CODE (exp
))
7503 /* This case will happen via recursion for &a->b. */
7504 return expand_expr (TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 0), target
, tmode
, modifier
);
7508 tree tem
= TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 0);
7509 if (!integer_zerop (TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 1)))
7510 tem
= fold_build_pointer_plus (tem
, TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 1));
7511 return expand_expr (tem
, target
, tmode
, modifier
);
7515 /* Expand the initializer like constants above. */
7516 result
= XEXP (expand_expr_constant (DECL_INITIAL (exp
),
7518 if (modifier
< EXPAND_SUM
)
7519 result
= force_operand (result
, target
);
7523 /* The real part of the complex number is always first, therefore
7524 the address is the same as the address of the parent object. */
7527 inner
= TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 0);
7531 /* The imaginary part of the complex number is always second.
7532 The expression is therefore always offset by the size of the
7535 bitpos
= GET_MODE_BITSIZE (TYPE_MODE (TREE_TYPE (exp
)));
7536 inner
= TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 0);
7539 case COMPOUND_LITERAL_EXPR
:
7540 /* Allow COMPOUND_LITERAL_EXPR in initializers, if e.g.
7541 rtl_for_decl_init is called on DECL_INITIAL with
7542 COMPOUNT_LITERAL_EXPRs in it, they aren't gimplified. */
7543 if (modifier
== EXPAND_INITIALIZER
7544 && COMPOUND_LITERAL_EXPR_DECL (exp
))
7545 return expand_expr_addr_expr_1 (COMPOUND_LITERAL_EXPR_DECL (exp
),
7546 target
, tmode
, modifier
, as
);
7549 /* If the object is a DECL, then expand it for its rtl. Don't bypass
7550 expand_expr, as that can have various side effects; LABEL_DECLs for
7551 example, may not have their DECL_RTL set yet. Expand the rtl of
7552 CONSTRUCTORs too, which should yield a memory reference for the
7553 constructor's contents. Assume language specific tree nodes can
7554 be expanded in some interesting way. */
7555 gcc_assert (TREE_CODE (exp
) < LAST_AND_UNUSED_TREE_CODE
);
7557 || TREE_CODE (exp
) == CONSTRUCTOR
7558 || TREE_CODE (exp
) == COMPOUND_LITERAL_EXPR
)
7560 result
= expand_expr (exp
, target
, tmode
,
7561 modifier
== EXPAND_INITIALIZER
7562 ? EXPAND_INITIALIZER
: EXPAND_CONST_ADDRESS
);
7564 /* If the DECL isn't in memory, then the DECL wasn't properly
7565 marked TREE_ADDRESSABLE, which will be either a front-end
7566 or a tree optimizer bug. */
7568 if (TREE_ADDRESSABLE (exp
)
7570 && ! targetm
.calls
.allocate_stack_slots_for_args ())
7572 error ("local frame unavailable (naked function?)");
7576 gcc_assert (MEM_P (result
));
7577 result
= XEXP (result
, 0);
7579 /* ??? Is this needed anymore? */
7581 TREE_USED (exp
) = 1;
7583 if (modifier
!= EXPAND_INITIALIZER
7584 && modifier
!= EXPAND_CONST_ADDRESS
7585 && modifier
!= EXPAND_SUM
)
7586 result
= force_operand (result
, target
);
7590 /* Pass FALSE as the last argument to get_inner_reference although
7591 we are expanding to RTL. The rationale is that we know how to
7592 handle "aligning nodes" here: we can just bypass them because
7593 they won't change the final object whose address will be returned
7594 (they actually exist only for that purpose). */
7595 inner
= get_inner_reference (exp
, &bitsize
, &bitpos
, &offset
,
7596 &mode1
, &unsignedp
, &volatilep
, false);
7600 /* We must have made progress. */
7601 gcc_assert (inner
!= exp
);
7603 subtarget
= offset
|| bitpos
? NULL_RTX
: target
;
7604 /* For VIEW_CONVERT_EXPR, where the outer alignment is bigger than
7605 inner alignment, force the inner to be sufficiently aligned. */
7606 if (CONSTANT_CLASS_P (inner
)
7607 && TYPE_ALIGN (TREE_TYPE (inner
)) < TYPE_ALIGN (TREE_TYPE (exp
)))
7609 inner
= copy_node (inner
);
7610 TREE_TYPE (inner
) = copy_node (TREE_TYPE (inner
));
7611 TYPE_ALIGN (TREE_TYPE (inner
)) = TYPE_ALIGN (TREE_TYPE (exp
));
7612 TYPE_USER_ALIGN (TREE_TYPE (inner
)) = 1;
7614 result
= expand_expr_addr_expr_1 (inner
, subtarget
, tmode
, modifier
, as
);
7620 if (modifier
!= EXPAND_NORMAL
)
7621 result
= force_operand (result
, NULL
);
7622 tmp
= expand_expr (offset
, NULL_RTX
, tmode
,
7623 modifier
== EXPAND_INITIALIZER
7624 ? EXPAND_INITIALIZER
: EXPAND_NORMAL
);
7626 result
= convert_memory_address_addr_space (tmode
, result
, as
);
7627 tmp
= convert_memory_address_addr_space (tmode
, tmp
, as
);
7629 if (modifier
== EXPAND_SUM
|| modifier
== EXPAND_INITIALIZER
)
7630 result
= simplify_gen_binary (PLUS
, tmode
, result
, tmp
);
7633 subtarget
= bitpos
? NULL_RTX
: target
;
7634 result
= expand_simple_binop (tmode
, PLUS
, result
, tmp
, subtarget
,
7635 1, OPTAB_LIB_WIDEN
);
7641 /* Someone beforehand should have rejected taking the address
7642 of such an object. */
7643 gcc_assert ((bitpos
% BITS_PER_UNIT
) == 0);
7645 result
= convert_memory_address_addr_space (tmode
, result
, as
);
7646 result
= plus_constant (tmode
, result
, bitpos
/ BITS_PER_UNIT
);
7647 if (modifier
< EXPAND_SUM
)
7648 result
= force_operand (result
, target
);
7654 /* A subroutine of expand_expr. Evaluate EXP, which is an ADDR_EXPR.
7655 The TARGET, TMODE and MODIFIER arguments are as for expand_expr. */
7658 expand_expr_addr_expr (tree exp
, rtx target
, enum machine_mode tmode
,
7659 enum expand_modifier modifier
)
7661 addr_space_t as
= ADDR_SPACE_GENERIC
;
7662 enum machine_mode address_mode
= Pmode
;
7663 enum machine_mode pointer_mode
= ptr_mode
;
7664 enum machine_mode rmode
;
7667 /* Target mode of VOIDmode says "whatever's natural". */
7668 if (tmode
== VOIDmode
)
7669 tmode
= TYPE_MODE (TREE_TYPE (exp
));
7671 if (POINTER_TYPE_P (TREE_TYPE (exp
)))
7673 as
= TYPE_ADDR_SPACE (TREE_TYPE (TREE_TYPE (exp
)));
7674 address_mode
= targetm
.addr_space
.address_mode (as
);
7675 pointer_mode
= targetm
.addr_space
.pointer_mode (as
);
7678 /* We can get called with some Weird Things if the user does silliness
7679 like "(short) &a". In that case, convert_memory_address won't do
7680 the right thing, so ignore the given target mode. */
7681 if (tmode
!= address_mode
&& tmode
!= pointer_mode
)
7682 tmode
= address_mode
;
7684 result
= expand_expr_addr_expr_1 (TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 0), target
,
7685 tmode
, modifier
, as
);
7687 /* Despite expand_expr claims concerning ignoring TMODE when not
7688 strictly convenient, stuff breaks if we don't honor it. Note
7689 that combined with the above, we only do this for pointer modes. */
7690 rmode
= GET_MODE (result
);
7691 if (rmode
== VOIDmode
)
7694 result
= convert_memory_address_addr_space (tmode
, result
, as
);
7699 /* Generate code for computing CONSTRUCTOR EXP.
7700 An rtx for the computed value is returned. If AVOID_TEMP_MEM
7701 is TRUE, instead of creating a temporary variable in memory
7702 NULL is returned and the caller needs to handle it differently. */
7705 expand_constructor (tree exp
, rtx target
, enum expand_modifier modifier
,
7706 bool avoid_temp_mem
)
7708 tree type
= TREE_TYPE (exp
);
7709 enum machine_mode mode
= TYPE_MODE (type
);
7711 /* Try to avoid creating a temporary at all. This is possible
7712 if all of the initializer is zero.
7713 FIXME: try to handle all [0..255] initializers we can handle
7715 if (TREE_STATIC (exp
)
7716 && !TREE_ADDRESSABLE (exp
)
7717 && target
!= 0 && mode
== BLKmode
7718 && all_zeros_p (exp
))
7720 clear_storage (target
, expr_size (exp
), BLOCK_OP_NORMAL
);
7724 /* All elts simple constants => refer to a constant in memory. But
7725 if this is a non-BLKmode mode, let it store a field at a time
7726 since that should make a CONST_INT or CONST_DOUBLE when we
7727 fold. Likewise, if we have a target we can use, it is best to
7728 store directly into the target unless the type is large enough
7729 that memcpy will be used. If we are making an initializer and
7730 all operands are constant, put it in memory as well.
7732 FIXME: Avoid trying to fill vector constructors piece-meal.
7733 Output them with output_constant_def below unless we're sure
7734 they're zeros. This should go away when vector initializers
7735 are treated like VECTOR_CST instead of arrays. */
7736 if ((TREE_STATIC (exp
)
7737 && ((mode
== BLKmode
7738 && ! (target
!= 0 && safe_from_p (target
, exp
, 1)))
7739 || TREE_ADDRESSABLE (exp
)
7740 || (host_integerp (TYPE_SIZE_UNIT (type
), 1)
7741 && (! MOVE_BY_PIECES_P
7742 (tree_low_cst (TYPE_SIZE_UNIT (type
), 1),
7744 && ! mostly_zeros_p (exp
))))
7745 || ((modifier
== EXPAND_INITIALIZER
|| modifier
== EXPAND_CONST_ADDRESS
)
7746 && TREE_CONSTANT (exp
)))
7753 constructor
= expand_expr_constant (exp
, 1, modifier
);
7755 if (modifier
!= EXPAND_CONST_ADDRESS
7756 && modifier
!= EXPAND_INITIALIZER
7757 && modifier
!= EXPAND_SUM
)
7758 constructor
= validize_mem (constructor
);
7763 /* Handle calls that pass values in multiple non-contiguous
7764 locations. The Irix 6 ABI has examples of this. */
7765 if (target
== 0 || ! safe_from_p (target
, exp
, 1)
7766 || GET_CODE (target
) == PARALLEL
|| modifier
== EXPAND_STACK_PARM
)
7772 = assign_temp (build_qualified_type (type
, (TYPE_QUALS (type
)
7773 | (TREE_READONLY (exp
)
7774 * TYPE_QUAL_CONST
))),
7775 TREE_ADDRESSABLE (exp
), 1);
7778 store_constructor (exp
, target
, 0, int_expr_size (exp
));
7783 /* expand_expr: generate code for computing expression EXP.
7784 An rtx for the computed value is returned. The value is never null.
7785 In the case of a void EXP, const0_rtx is returned.
7787 The value may be stored in TARGET if TARGET is nonzero.
7788 TARGET is just a suggestion; callers must assume that
7789 the rtx returned may not be the same as TARGET.
7791 If TARGET is CONST0_RTX, it means that the value will be ignored.
7793 If TMODE is not VOIDmode, it suggests generating the
7794 result in mode TMODE. But this is done only when convenient.
7795 Otherwise, TMODE is ignored and the value generated in its natural mode.
7796 TMODE is just a suggestion; callers must assume that
7797 the rtx returned may not have mode TMODE.
7799 Note that TARGET may have neither TMODE nor MODE. In that case, it
7800 probably will not be used.
7802 If MODIFIER is EXPAND_SUM then when EXP is an addition
7803 we can return an rtx of the form (MULT (REG ...) (CONST_INT ...))
7804 or a nest of (PLUS ...) and (MINUS ...) where the terms are
7805 products as above, or REG or MEM, or constant.
7806 Ordinarily in such cases we would output mul or add instructions
7807 and then return a pseudo reg containing the sum.
7809 EXPAND_INITIALIZER is much like EXPAND_SUM except that
7810 it also marks a label as absolutely required (it can't be dead).
7811 It also makes a ZERO_EXTEND or SIGN_EXTEND instead of emitting extend insns.
7812 This is used for outputting expressions used in initializers.
7814 EXPAND_CONST_ADDRESS says that it is okay to return a MEM
7815 with a constant address even if that address is not normally legitimate.
7816 EXPAND_INITIALIZER and EXPAND_SUM also have this effect.
7818 EXPAND_STACK_PARM is used when expanding to a TARGET on the stack for
7819 a call parameter. Such targets require special care as we haven't yet
7820 marked TARGET so that it's safe from being trashed by libcalls. We
7821 don't want to use TARGET for anything but the final result;
7822 Intermediate values must go elsewhere. Additionally, calls to
7823 emit_block_move will be flagged with BLOCK_OP_CALL_PARM.
7825 If EXP is a VAR_DECL whose DECL_RTL was a MEM with an invalid
7826 address, and ALT_RTL is non-NULL, then *ALT_RTL is set to the
7827 DECL_RTL of the VAR_DECL. *ALT_RTL is also set if EXP is a
7828 COMPOUND_EXPR whose second argument is such a VAR_DECL, and so on
7832 expand_expr_real (tree exp
, rtx target
, enum machine_mode tmode
,
7833 enum expand_modifier modifier
, rtx
*alt_rtl
)
7837 /* Handle ERROR_MARK before anybody tries to access its type. */
7838 if (TREE_CODE (exp
) == ERROR_MARK
7839 || (TREE_CODE (TREE_TYPE (exp
)) == ERROR_MARK
))
7841 ret
= CONST0_RTX (tmode
);
7842 return ret
? ret
: const0_rtx
;
7845 ret
= expand_expr_real_1 (exp
, target
, tmode
, modifier
, alt_rtl
);
7849 /* Try to expand the conditional expression which is represented by
7850 TREEOP0 ? TREEOP1 : TREEOP2 using conditonal moves. If succeseds
7851 return the rtl reg which repsents the result. Otherwise return
7855 expand_cond_expr_using_cmove (tree treeop0 ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED
,
7856 tree treeop1 ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED
,
7857 tree treeop2 ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED
)
7859 #ifdef HAVE_conditional_move
7861 rtx op00
, op01
, op1
, op2
;
7862 enum rtx_code comparison_code
;
7863 enum machine_mode comparison_mode
;
7866 tree type
= TREE_TYPE (treeop1
);
7867 int unsignedp
= TYPE_UNSIGNED (type
);
7868 enum machine_mode mode
= TYPE_MODE (type
);
7869 enum machine_mode orig_mode
= mode
;
7871 /* If we cannot do a conditional move on the mode, try doing it
7872 with the promoted mode. */
7873 if (!can_conditionally_move_p (mode
))
7875 mode
= promote_mode (type
, mode
, &unsignedp
);
7876 if (!can_conditionally_move_p (mode
))
7878 temp
= assign_temp (type
, 0, 0); /* Use promoted mode for temp. */
7881 temp
= assign_temp (type
, 0, 1);
7884 expand_operands (treeop1
, treeop2
,
7885 temp
, &op1
, &op2
, EXPAND_NORMAL
);
7887 if (TREE_CODE (treeop0
) == SSA_NAME
7888 && (srcstmt
= get_def_for_expr_class (treeop0
, tcc_comparison
)))
7890 tree type
= TREE_TYPE (gimple_assign_rhs1 (srcstmt
));
7891 enum tree_code cmpcode
= gimple_assign_rhs_code (srcstmt
);
7892 op00
= expand_normal (gimple_assign_rhs1 (srcstmt
));
7893 op01
= expand_normal (gimple_assign_rhs2 (srcstmt
));
7894 comparison_mode
= TYPE_MODE (type
);
7895 unsignedp
= TYPE_UNSIGNED (type
);
7896 comparison_code
= convert_tree_comp_to_rtx (cmpcode
, unsignedp
);
7898 else if (TREE_CODE_CLASS (TREE_CODE (treeop0
)) == tcc_comparison
)
7900 tree type
= TREE_TYPE (TREE_OPERAND (treeop0
, 0));
7901 enum tree_code cmpcode
= TREE_CODE (treeop0
);
7902 op00
= expand_normal (TREE_OPERAND (treeop0
, 0));
7903 op01
= expand_normal (TREE_OPERAND (treeop0
, 1));
7904 unsignedp
= TYPE_UNSIGNED (type
);
7905 comparison_mode
= TYPE_MODE (type
);
7906 comparison_code
= convert_tree_comp_to_rtx (cmpcode
, unsignedp
);
7910 op00
= expand_normal (treeop0
);
7912 comparison_code
= NE
;
7913 comparison_mode
= TYPE_MODE (TREE_TYPE (treeop0
));
7916 if (GET_MODE (op1
) != mode
)
7917 op1
= gen_lowpart (mode
, op1
);
7919 if (GET_MODE (op2
) != mode
)
7920 op2
= gen_lowpart (mode
, op2
);
7922 /* Try to emit the conditional move. */
7923 insn
= emit_conditional_move (temp
, comparison_code
,
7924 op00
, op01
, comparison_mode
,
7928 /* If we could do the conditional move, emit the sequence,
7932 rtx seq
= get_insns ();
7935 return convert_modes (orig_mode
, mode
, temp
, 0);
7938 /* Otherwise discard the sequence and fall back to code with
7946 expand_expr_real_2 (sepops ops
, rtx target
, enum machine_mode tmode
,
7947 enum expand_modifier modifier
)
7949 rtx op0
, op1
, op2
, temp
;
7952 enum machine_mode mode
;
7953 enum tree_code code
= ops
->code
;
7955 rtx subtarget
, original_target
;
7957 bool reduce_bit_field
;
7958 location_t loc
= ops
->location
;
7959 tree treeop0
, treeop1
, treeop2
;
7960 #define REDUCE_BIT_FIELD(expr) (reduce_bit_field \
7961 ? reduce_to_bit_field_precision ((expr), \
7967 mode
= TYPE_MODE (type
);
7968 unsignedp
= TYPE_UNSIGNED (type
);
7974 /* We should be called only on simple (binary or unary) expressions,
7975 exactly those that are valid in gimple expressions that aren't
7976 GIMPLE_SINGLE_RHS (or invalid). */
7977 gcc_assert (get_gimple_rhs_class (code
) == GIMPLE_UNARY_RHS
7978 || get_gimple_rhs_class (code
) == GIMPLE_BINARY_RHS
7979 || get_gimple_rhs_class (code
) == GIMPLE_TERNARY_RHS
);
7981 ignore
= (target
== const0_rtx
7982 || ((CONVERT_EXPR_CODE_P (code
)
7983 || code
== COND_EXPR
|| code
== VIEW_CONVERT_EXPR
)
7984 && TREE_CODE (type
) == VOID_TYPE
));
7986 /* We should be called only if we need the result. */
7987 gcc_assert (!ignore
);
7989 /* An operation in what may be a bit-field type needs the
7990 result to be reduced to the precision of the bit-field type,
7991 which is narrower than that of the type's mode. */
7992 reduce_bit_field
= (INTEGRAL_TYPE_P (type
)
7993 && GET_MODE_PRECISION (mode
) > TYPE_PRECISION (type
));
7995 if (reduce_bit_field
&& modifier
== EXPAND_STACK_PARM
)
7998 /* Use subtarget as the target for operand 0 of a binary operation. */
7999 subtarget
= get_subtarget (target
);
8000 original_target
= target
;
8004 case NON_LVALUE_EXPR
:
8007 if (treeop0
== error_mark_node
)
8010 if (TREE_CODE (type
) == UNION_TYPE
)
8012 tree valtype
= TREE_TYPE (treeop0
);
8014 /* If both input and output are BLKmode, this conversion isn't doing
8015 anything except possibly changing memory attribute. */
8016 if (mode
== BLKmode
&& TYPE_MODE (valtype
) == BLKmode
)
8018 rtx result
= expand_expr (treeop0
, target
, tmode
,
8021 result
= copy_rtx (result
);
8022 set_mem_attributes (result
, type
, 0);
8028 if (TYPE_MODE (type
) != BLKmode
)
8029 target
= gen_reg_rtx (TYPE_MODE (type
));
8031 target
= assign_temp (type
, 1, 1);
8035 /* Store data into beginning of memory target. */
8036 store_expr (treeop0
,
8037 adjust_address (target
, TYPE_MODE (valtype
), 0),
8038 modifier
== EXPAND_STACK_PARM
,
8043 gcc_assert (REG_P (target
));
8045 /* Store this field into a union of the proper type. */
8046 store_field (target
,
8047 MIN ((int_size_in_bytes (TREE_TYPE
8050 (HOST_WIDE_INT
) GET_MODE_BITSIZE (mode
)),
8051 0, 0, 0, TYPE_MODE (valtype
), treeop0
, 0, false);
8054 /* Return the entire union. */
8058 if (mode
== TYPE_MODE (TREE_TYPE (treeop0
)))
8060 op0
= expand_expr (treeop0
, target
, VOIDmode
,
8063 /* If the signedness of the conversion differs and OP0 is
8064 a promoted SUBREG, clear that indication since we now
8065 have to do the proper extension. */
8066 if (TYPE_UNSIGNED (TREE_TYPE (treeop0
)) != unsignedp
8067 && GET_CODE (op0
) == SUBREG
)
8068 SUBREG_PROMOTED_VAR_P (op0
) = 0;
8070 return REDUCE_BIT_FIELD (op0
);
8073 op0
= expand_expr (treeop0
, NULL_RTX
, mode
,
8074 modifier
== EXPAND_SUM
? EXPAND_NORMAL
: modifier
);
8075 if (GET_MODE (op0
) == mode
)
8078 /* If OP0 is a constant, just convert it into the proper mode. */
8079 else if (CONSTANT_P (op0
))
8081 tree inner_type
= TREE_TYPE (treeop0
);
8082 enum machine_mode inner_mode
= GET_MODE (op0
);
8084 if (inner_mode
== VOIDmode
)
8085 inner_mode
= TYPE_MODE (inner_type
);
8087 if (modifier
== EXPAND_INITIALIZER
)
8088 op0
= simplify_gen_subreg (mode
, op0
, inner_mode
,
8089 subreg_lowpart_offset (mode
,
8092 op0
= convert_modes (mode
, inner_mode
, op0
,
8093 TYPE_UNSIGNED (inner_type
));
8096 else if (modifier
== EXPAND_INITIALIZER
)
8097 op0
= gen_rtx_fmt_e (unsignedp
? ZERO_EXTEND
: SIGN_EXTEND
, mode
, op0
);
8099 else if (target
== 0)
8100 op0
= convert_to_mode (mode
, op0
,
8101 TYPE_UNSIGNED (TREE_TYPE
8105 convert_move (target
, op0
,
8106 TYPE_UNSIGNED (TREE_TYPE (treeop0
)));
8110 return REDUCE_BIT_FIELD (op0
);
8112 case ADDR_SPACE_CONVERT_EXPR
:
8114 tree treeop0_type
= TREE_TYPE (treeop0
);
8116 addr_space_t as_from
;
8118 gcc_assert (POINTER_TYPE_P (type
));
8119 gcc_assert (POINTER_TYPE_P (treeop0_type
));
8121 as_to
= TYPE_ADDR_SPACE (TREE_TYPE (type
));
8122 as_from
= TYPE_ADDR_SPACE (TREE_TYPE (treeop0_type
));
8124 /* Conversions between pointers to the same address space should
8125 have been implemented via CONVERT_EXPR / NOP_EXPR. */
8126 gcc_assert (as_to
!= as_from
);
8128 /* Ask target code to handle conversion between pointers
8129 to overlapping address spaces. */
8130 if (targetm
.addr_space
.subset_p (as_to
, as_from
)
8131 || targetm
.addr_space
.subset_p (as_from
, as_to
))
8133 op0
= expand_expr (treeop0
, NULL_RTX
, VOIDmode
, modifier
);
8134 op0
= targetm
.addr_space
.convert (op0
, treeop0_type
, type
);
8139 /* For disjoint address spaces, converting anything but
8140 a null pointer invokes undefined behaviour. We simply
8141 always return a null pointer here. */
8142 return CONST0_RTX (mode
);
8145 case POINTER_PLUS_EXPR
:
8146 /* Even though the sizetype mode and the pointer's mode can be different
8147 expand is able to handle this correctly and get the correct result out
8148 of the PLUS_EXPR code. */
8149 /* Make sure to sign-extend the sizetype offset in a POINTER_PLUS_EXPR
8150 if sizetype precision is smaller than pointer precision. */
8151 if (TYPE_PRECISION (sizetype
) < TYPE_PRECISION (type
))
8152 treeop1
= fold_convert_loc (loc
, type
,
8153 fold_convert_loc (loc
, ssizetype
,
8155 /* If sizetype precision is larger than pointer precision, truncate the
8156 offset to have matching modes. */
8157 else if (TYPE_PRECISION (sizetype
) > TYPE_PRECISION (type
))
8158 treeop1
= fold_convert_loc (loc
, type
, treeop1
);
8161 /* If we are adding a constant, a VAR_DECL that is sp, fp, or ap, and
8162 something else, make sure we add the register to the constant and
8163 then to the other thing. This case can occur during strength
8164 reduction and doing it this way will produce better code if the
8165 frame pointer or argument pointer is eliminated.
8167 fold-const.c will ensure that the constant is always in the inner
8168 PLUS_EXPR, so the only case we need to do anything about is if
8169 sp, ap, or fp is our second argument, in which case we must swap
8170 the innermost first argument and our second argument. */
8172 if (TREE_CODE (treeop0
) == PLUS_EXPR
8173 && TREE_CODE (TREE_OPERAND (treeop0
, 1)) == INTEGER_CST
8174 && TREE_CODE (treeop1
) == VAR_DECL
8175 && (DECL_RTL (treeop1
) == frame_pointer_rtx
8176 || DECL_RTL (treeop1
) == stack_pointer_rtx
8177 || DECL_RTL (treeop1
) == arg_pointer_rtx
))
8182 /* If the result is to be ptr_mode and we are adding an integer to
8183 something, we might be forming a constant. So try to use
8184 plus_constant. If it produces a sum and we can't accept it,
8185 use force_operand. This allows P = &ARR[const] to generate
8186 efficient code on machines where a SYMBOL_REF is not a valid
8189 If this is an EXPAND_SUM call, always return the sum. */
8190 if (modifier
== EXPAND_SUM
|| modifier
== EXPAND_INITIALIZER
8191 || (mode
== ptr_mode
&& (unsignedp
|| ! flag_trapv
)))
8193 if (modifier
== EXPAND_STACK_PARM
)
8195 if (TREE_CODE (treeop0
) == INTEGER_CST
8196 && GET_MODE_PRECISION (mode
) <= HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT
8197 && TREE_CONSTANT (treeop1
))
8201 op1
= expand_expr (treeop1
, subtarget
, VOIDmode
,
8203 /* Use immed_double_const to ensure that the constant is
8204 truncated according to the mode of OP1, then sign extended
8205 to a HOST_WIDE_INT. Using the constant directly can result
8206 in non-canonical RTL in a 64x32 cross compile. */
8208 = immed_double_const (TREE_INT_CST_LOW (treeop0
),
8210 TYPE_MODE (TREE_TYPE (treeop1
)));
8211 op1
= plus_constant (mode
, op1
, INTVAL (constant_part
));
8212 if (modifier
!= EXPAND_SUM
&& modifier
!= EXPAND_INITIALIZER
)
8213 op1
= force_operand (op1
, target
);
8214 return REDUCE_BIT_FIELD (op1
);
8217 else if (TREE_CODE (treeop1
) == INTEGER_CST
8218 && GET_MODE_PRECISION (mode
) <= HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT
8219 && TREE_CONSTANT (treeop0
))
8223 op0
= expand_expr (treeop0
, subtarget
, VOIDmode
,
8224 (modifier
== EXPAND_INITIALIZER
8225 ? EXPAND_INITIALIZER
: EXPAND_SUM
));
8226 if (! CONSTANT_P (op0
))
8228 op1
= expand_expr (treeop1
, NULL_RTX
,
8229 VOIDmode
, modifier
);
8230 /* Return a PLUS if modifier says it's OK. */
8231 if (modifier
== EXPAND_SUM
8232 || modifier
== EXPAND_INITIALIZER
)
8233 return simplify_gen_binary (PLUS
, mode
, op0
, op1
);
8236 /* Use immed_double_const to ensure that the constant is
8237 truncated according to the mode of OP1, then sign extended
8238 to a HOST_WIDE_INT. Using the constant directly can result
8239 in non-canonical RTL in a 64x32 cross compile. */
8241 = immed_double_const (TREE_INT_CST_LOW (treeop1
),
8243 TYPE_MODE (TREE_TYPE (treeop0
)));
8244 op0
= plus_constant (mode
, op0
, INTVAL (constant_part
));
8245 if (modifier
!= EXPAND_SUM
&& modifier
!= EXPAND_INITIALIZER
)
8246 op0
= force_operand (op0
, target
);
8247 return REDUCE_BIT_FIELD (op0
);
8251 /* Use TER to expand pointer addition of a negated value
8252 as pointer subtraction. */
8253 if ((POINTER_TYPE_P (TREE_TYPE (treeop0
))
8254 || (TREE_CODE (TREE_TYPE (treeop0
)) == VECTOR_TYPE
8255 && POINTER_TYPE_P (TREE_TYPE (TREE_TYPE (treeop0
)))))
8256 && TREE_CODE (treeop1
) == SSA_NAME
8257 && TYPE_MODE (TREE_TYPE (treeop0
))
8258 == TYPE_MODE (TREE_TYPE (treeop1
)))
8260 gimple def
= get_def_for_expr (treeop1
, NEGATE_EXPR
);
8263 treeop1
= gimple_assign_rhs1 (def
);
8269 /* No sense saving up arithmetic to be done
8270 if it's all in the wrong mode to form part of an address.
8271 And force_operand won't know whether to sign-extend or
8273 if ((modifier
!= EXPAND_SUM
&& modifier
!= EXPAND_INITIALIZER
)
8274 || mode
!= ptr_mode
)
8276 expand_operands (treeop0
, treeop1
,
8277 subtarget
, &op0
, &op1
, EXPAND_NORMAL
);
8278 if (op0
== const0_rtx
)
8280 if (op1
== const0_rtx
)
8285 expand_operands (treeop0
, treeop1
,
8286 subtarget
, &op0
, &op1
, modifier
);
8287 return REDUCE_BIT_FIELD (simplify_gen_binary (PLUS
, mode
, op0
, op1
));
8291 /* For initializers, we are allowed to return a MINUS of two
8292 symbolic constants. Here we handle all cases when both operands
8294 /* Handle difference of two symbolic constants,
8295 for the sake of an initializer. */
8296 if ((modifier
== EXPAND_SUM
|| modifier
== EXPAND_INITIALIZER
)
8297 && really_constant_p (treeop0
)
8298 && really_constant_p (treeop1
))
8300 expand_operands (treeop0
, treeop1
,
8301 NULL_RTX
, &op0
, &op1
, modifier
);
8303 /* If the last operand is a CONST_INT, use plus_constant of
8304 the negated constant. Else make the MINUS. */
8305 if (CONST_INT_P (op1
))
8306 return REDUCE_BIT_FIELD (plus_constant (mode
, op0
,
8309 return REDUCE_BIT_FIELD (gen_rtx_MINUS (mode
, op0
, op1
));
8312 /* No sense saving up arithmetic to be done
8313 if it's all in the wrong mode to form part of an address.
8314 And force_operand won't know whether to sign-extend or
8316 if ((modifier
!= EXPAND_SUM
&& modifier
!= EXPAND_INITIALIZER
)
8317 || mode
!= ptr_mode
)
8320 expand_operands (treeop0
, treeop1
,
8321 subtarget
, &op0
, &op1
, modifier
);
8323 /* Convert A - const to A + (-const). */
8324 if (CONST_INT_P (op1
))
8326 op1
= negate_rtx (mode
, op1
);
8327 return REDUCE_BIT_FIELD (simplify_gen_binary (PLUS
, mode
, op0
, op1
));
8332 case WIDEN_MULT_PLUS_EXPR
:
8333 case WIDEN_MULT_MINUS_EXPR
:
8334 expand_operands (treeop0
, treeop1
, NULL_RTX
, &op0
, &op1
, EXPAND_NORMAL
);
8335 op2
= expand_normal (treeop2
);
8336 target
= expand_widen_pattern_expr (ops
, op0
, op1
, op2
,
8340 case WIDEN_MULT_EXPR
:
8341 /* If first operand is constant, swap them.
8342 Thus the following special case checks need only
8343 check the second operand. */
8344 if (TREE_CODE (treeop0
) == INTEGER_CST
)
8351 /* First, check if we have a multiplication of one signed and one
8352 unsigned operand. */
8353 if (TREE_CODE (treeop1
) != INTEGER_CST
8354 && (TYPE_UNSIGNED (TREE_TYPE (treeop0
))
8355 != TYPE_UNSIGNED (TREE_TYPE (treeop1
))))
8357 enum machine_mode innermode
= TYPE_MODE (TREE_TYPE (treeop0
));
8358 this_optab
= usmul_widen_optab
;
8359 if (find_widening_optab_handler (this_optab
, mode
, innermode
, 0)
8360 != CODE_FOR_nothing
)
8362 if (TYPE_UNSIGNED (TREE_TYPE (treeop0
)))
8363 expand_operands (treeop0
, treeop1
, NULL_RTX
, &op0
, &op1
,
8366 expand_operands (treeop0
, treeop1
, NULL_RTX
, &op1
, &op0
,
8368 /* op0 and op1 might still be constant, despite the above
8369 != INTEGER_CST check. Handle it. */
8370 if (GET_MODE (op0
) == VOIDmode
&& GET_MODE (op1
) == VOIDmode
)
8372 op0
= convert_modes (innermode
, mode
, op0
, true);
8373 op1
= convert_modes (innermode
, mode
, op1
, false);
8374 return REDUCE_BIT_FIELD (expand_mult (mode
, op0
, op1
,
8375 target
, unsignedp
));
8380 /* Check for a multiplication with matching signedness. */
8381 else if ((TREE_CODE (treeop1
) == INTEGER_CST
8382 && int_fits_type_p (treeop1
, TREE_TYPE (treeop0
)))
8383 || (TYPE_UNSIGNED (TREE_TYPE (treeop1
))
8384 == TYPE_UNSIGNED (TREE_TYPE (treeop0
))))
8386 tree op0type
= TREE_TYPE (treeop0
);
8387 enum machine_mode innermode
= TYPE_MODE (op0type
);
8388 bool zextend_p
= TYPE_UNSIGNED (op0type
);
8389 optab other_optab
= zextend_p
? smul_widen_optab
: umul_widen_optab
;
8390 this_optab
= zextend_p
? umul_widen_optab
: smul_widen_optab
;
8392 if (TREE_CODE (treeop0
) != INTEGER_CST
)
8394 if (find_widening_optab_handler (this_optab
, mode
, innermode
, 0)
8395 != CODE_FOR_nothing
)
8397 expand_operands (treeop0
, treeop1
, NULL_RTX
, &op0
, &op1
,
8399 /* op0 and op1 might still be constant, despite the above
8400 != INTEGER_CST check. Handle it. */
8401 if (GET_MODE (op0
) == VOIDmode
&& GET_MODE (op1
) == VOIDmode
)
8404 op0
= convert_modes (innermode
, mode
, op0
, zextend_p
);
8406 = convert_modes (innermode
, mode
, op1
,
8407 TYPE_UNSIGNED (TREE_TYPE (treeop1
)));
8408 return REDUCE_BIT_FIELD (expand_mult (mode
, op0
, op1
,
8412 temp
= expand_widening_mult (mode
, op0
, op1
, target
,
8413 unsignedp
, this_optab
);
8414 return REDUCE_BIT_FIELD (temp
);
8416 if (find_widening_optab_handler (other_optab
, mode
, innermode
, 0)
8418 && innermode
== word_mode
)
8421 op0
= expand_normal (treeop0
);
8422 if (TREE_CODE (treeop1
) == INTEGER_CST
)
8423 op1
= convert_modes (innermode
, mode
,
8424 expand_normal (treeop1
),
8425 TYPE_UNSIGNED (TREE_TYPE (treeop1
)));
8427 op1
= expand_normal (treeop1
);
8428 /* op0 and op1 might still be constant, despite the above
8429 != INTEGER_CST check. Handle it. */
8430 if (GET_MODE (op0
) == VOIDmode
&& GET_MODE (op1
) == VOIDmode
)
8431 goto widen_mult_const
;
8432 temp
= expand_binop (mode
, other_optab
, op0
, op1
, target
,
8433 unsignedp
, OPTAB_LIB_WIDEN
);
8434 hipart
= gen_highpart (innermode
, temp
);
8435 htem
= expand_mult_highpart_adjust (innermode
, hipart
,
8439 emit_move_insn (hipart
, htem
);
8440 return REDUCE_BIT_FIELD (temp
);
8444 treeop0
= fold_build1 (CONVERT_EXPR
, type
, treeop0
);
8445 treeop1
= fold_build1 (CONVERT_EXPR
, type
, treeop1
);
8446 expand_operands (treeop0
, treeop1
, subtarget
, &op0
, &op1
, EXPAND_NORMAL
);
8447 return REDUCE_BIT_FIELD (expand_mult (mode
, op0
, op1
, target
, unsignedp
));
8451 optab opt
= fma_optab
;
8454 /* If there is no insn for FMA, emit it as __builtin_fma{,f,l}
8456 if (optab_handler (fma_optab
, mode
) == CODE_FOR_nothing
)
8458 tree fn
= mathfn_built_in (TREE_TYPE (treeop0
), BUILT_IN_FMA
);
8461 gcc_assert (fn
!= NULL_TREE
);
8462 call_expr
= build_call_expr (fn
, 3, treeop0
, treeop1
, treeop2
);
8463 return expand_builtin (call_expr
, target
, subtarget
, mode
, false);
8466 def0
= get_def_for_expr (treeop0
, NEGATE_EXPR
);
8467 def2
= get_def_for_expr (treeop2
, NEGATE_EXPR
);
8472 && optab_handler (fnms_optab
, mode
) != CODE_FOR_nothing
)
8475 op0
= expand_normal (gimple_assign_rhs1 (def0
));
8476 op2
= expand_normal (gimple_assign_rhs1 (def2
));
8479 && optab_handler (fnma_optab
, mode
) != CODE_FOR_nothing
)
8482 op0
= expand_normal (gimple_assign_rhs1 (def0
));
8485 && optab_handler (fms_optab
, mode
) != CODE_FOR_nothing
)
8488 op2
= expand_normal (gimple_assign_rhs1 (def2
));
8492 op0
= expand_expr (treeop0
, subtarget
, VOIDmode
, EXPAND_NORMAL
);
8494 op2
= expand_normal (treeop2
);
8495 op1
= expand_normal (treeop1
);
8497 return expand_ternary_op (TYPE_MODE (type
), opt
,
8498 op0
, op1
, op2
, target
, 0);
8502 /* If this is a fixed-point operation, then we cannot use the code
8503 below because "expand_mult" doesn't support sat/no-sat fixed-point
8505 if (ALL_FIXED_POINT_MODE_P (mode
))
8508 /* If first operand is constant, swap them.
8509 Thus the following special case checks need only
8510 check the second operand. */
8511 if (TREE_CODE (treeop0
) == INTEGER_CST
)
8518 /* Attempt to return something suitable for generating an
8519 indexed address, for machines that support that. */
8521 if (modifier
== EXPAND_SUM
&& mode
== ptr_mode
8522 && host_integerp (treeop1
, 0))
8524 tree exp1
= treeop1
;
8526 op0
= expand_expr (treeop0
, subtarget
, VOIDmode
,
8530 op0
= force_operand (op0
, NULL_RTX
);
8532 op0
= copy_to_mode_reg (mode
, op0
);
8534 return REDUCE_BIT_FIELD (gen_rtx_MULT (mode
, op0
,
8535 gen_int_mode (tree_low_cst (exp1
, 0),
8536 TYPE_MODE (TREE_TYPE (exp1
)))));
8539 if (modifier
== EXPAND_STACK_PARM
)
8542 expand_operands (treeop0
, treeop1
, subtarget
, &op0
, &op1
, EXPAND_NORMAL
);
8543 return REDUCE_BIT_FIELD (expand_mult (mode
, op0
, op1
, target
, unsignedp
));
8545 case TRUNC_DIV_EXPR
:
8546 case FLOOR_DIV_EXPR
:
8548 case ROUND_DIV_EXPR
:
8549 case EXACT_DIV_EXPR
:
8550 /* If this is a fixed-point operation, then we cannot use the code
8551 below because "expand_divmod" doesn't support sat/no-sat fixed-point
8553 if (ALL_FIXED_POINT_MODE_P (mode
))
8556 if (modifier
== EXPAND_STACK_PARM
)
8558 /* Possible optimization: compute the dividend with EXPAND_SUM
8559 then if the divisor is constant can optimize the case
8560 where some terms of the dividend have coeffs divisible by it. */
8561 expand_operands (treeop0
, treeop1
,
8562 subtarget
, &op0
, &op1
, EXPAND_NORMAL
);
8563 return expand_divmod (0, code
, mode
, op0
, op1
, target
, unsignedp
);
8568 case MULT_HIGHPART_EXPR
:
8569 expand_operands (treeop0
, treeop1
, subtarget
, &op0
, &op1
, EXPAND_NORMAL
);
8570 temp
= expand_mult_highpart (mode
, op0
, op1
, target
, unsignedp
);
8574 case TRUNC_MOD_EXPR
:
8575 case FLOOR_MOD_EXPR
:
8577 case ROUND_MOD_EXPR
:
8578 if (modifier
== EXPAND_STACK_PARM
)
8580 expand_operands (treeop0
, treeop1
,
8581 subtarget
, &op0
, &op1
, EXPAND_NORMAL
);
8582 return expand_divmod (1, code
, mode
, op0
, op1
, target
, unsignedp
);
8584 case FIXED_CONVERT_EXPR
:
8585 op0
= expand_normal (treeop0
);
8586 if (target
== 0 || modifier
== EXPAND_STACK_PARM
)
8587 target
= gen_reg_rtx (mode
);
8589 if ((TREE_CODE (TREE_TYPE (treeop0
)) == INTEGER_TYPE
8590 && TYPE_UNSIGNED (TREE_TYPE (treeop0
)))
8591 || (TREE_CODE (type
) == INTEGER_TYPE
&& TYPE_UNSIGNED (type
)))
8592 expand_fixed_convert (target
, op0
, 1, TYPE_SATURATING (type
));
8594 expand_fixed_convert (target
, op0
, 0, TYPE_SATURATING (type
));
8597 case FIX_TRUNC_EXPR
:
8598 op0
= expand_normal (treeop0
);
8599 if (target
== 0 || modifier
== EXPAND_STACK_PARM
)
8600 target
= gen_reg_rtx (mode
);
8601 expand_fix (target
, op0
, unsignedp
);
8605 op0
= expand_normal (treeop0
);
8606 if (target
== 0 || modifier
== EXPAND_STACK_PARM
)
8607 target
= gen_reg_rtx (mode
);
8608 /* expand_float can't figure out what to do if FROM has VOIDmode.
8609 So give it the correct mode. With -O, cse will optimize this. */
8610 if (GET_MODE (op0
) == VOIDmode
)
8611 op0
= copy_to_mode_reg (TYPE_MODE (TREE_TYPE (treeop0
)),
8613 expand_float (target
, op0
,
8614 TYPE_UNSIGNED (TREE_TYPE (treeop0
)));
8618 op0
= expand_expr (treeop0
, subtarget
,
8619 VOIDmode
, EXPAND_NORMAL
);
8620 if (modifier
== EXPAND_STACK_PARM
)
8622 temp
= expand_unop (mode
,
8623 optab_for_tree_code (NEGATE_EXPR
, type
,
8627 return REDUCE_BIT_FIELD (temp
);
8630 op0
= expand_expr (treeop0
, subtarget
,
8631 VOIDmode
, EXPAND_NORMAL
);
8632 if (modifier
== EXPAND_STACK_PARM
)
8635 /* ABS_EXPR is not valid for complex arguments. */
8636 gcc_assert (GET_MODE_CLASS (mode
) != MODE_COMPLEX_INT
8637 && GET_MODE_CLASS (mode
) != MODE_COMPLEX_FLOAT
);
8639 /* Unsigned abs is simply the operand. Testing here means we don't
8640 risk generating incorrect code below. */
8641 if (TYPE_UNSIGNED (type
))
8644 return expand_abs (mode
, op0
, target
, unsignedp
,
8645 safe_from_p (target
, treeop0
, 1));
8649 target
= original_target
;
8651 || modifier
== EXPAND_STACK_PARM
8652 || (MEM_P (target
) && MEM_VOLATILE_P (target
))
8653 || GET_MODE (target
) != mode
8655 && REGNO (target
) < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER
))
8656 target
= gen_reg_rtx (mode
);
8657 expand_operands (treeop0
, treeop1
,
8658 target
, &op0
, &op1
, EXPAND_NORMAL
);
8660 /* First try to do it with a special MIN or MAX instruction.
8661 If that does not win, use a conditional jump to select the proper
8663 this_optab
= optab_for_tree_code (code
, type
, optab_default
);
8664 temp
= expand_binop (mode
, this_optab
, op0
, op1
, target
, unsignedp
,
8669 /* At this point, a MEM target is no longer useful; we will get better
8672 if (! REG_P (target
))
8673 target
= gen_reg_rtx (mode
);
8675 /* If op1 was placed in target, swap op0 and op1. */
8676 if (target
!= op0
&& target
== op1
)
8683 /* We generate better code and avoid problems with op1 mentioning
8684 target by forcing op1 into a pseudo if it isn't a constant. */
8685 if (! CONSTANT_P (op1
))
8686 op1
= force_reg (mode
, op1
);
8689 enum rtx_code comparison_code
;
8692 if (code
== MAX_EXPR
)
8693 comparison_code
= unsignedp
? GEU
: GE
;
8695 comparison_code
= unsignedp
? LEU
: LE
;
8697 /* Canonicalize to comparisons against 0. */
8698 if (op1
== const1_rtx
)
8700 /* Converting (a >= 1 ? a : 1) into (a > 0 ? a : 1)
8701 or (a != 0 ? a : 1) for unsigned.
8702 For MIN we are safe converting (a <= 1 ? a : 1)
8703 into (a <= 0 ? a : 1) */
8704 cmpop1
= const0_rtx
;
8705 if (code
== MAX_EXPR
)
8706 comparison_code
= unsignedp
? NE
: GT
;
8708 if (op1
== constm1_rtx
&& !unsignedp
)
8710 /* Converting (a >= -1 ? a : -1) into (a >= 0 ? a : -1)
8711 and (a <= -1 ? a : -1) into (a < 0 ? a : -1) */
8712 cmpop1
= const0_rtx
;
8713 if (code
== MIN_EXPR
)
8714 comparison_code
= LT
;
8716 #ifdef HAVE_conditional_move
8717 /* Use a conditional move if possible. */
8718 if (can_conditionally_move_p (mode
))
8722 /* ??? Same problem as in expmed.c: emit_conditional_move
8723 forces a stack adjustment via compare_from_rtx, and we
8724 lose the stack adjustment if the sequence we are about
8725 to create is discarded. */
8726 do_pending_stack_adjust ();
8730 /* Try to emit the conditional move. */
8731 insn
= emit_conditional_move (target
, comparison_code
,
8736 /* If we could do the conditional move, emit the sequence,
8740 rtx seq
= get_insns ();
8746 /* Otherwise discard the sequence and fall back to code with
8752 emit_move_insn (target
, op0
);
8754 temp
= gen_label_rtx ();
8755 do_compare_rtx_and_jump (target
, cmpop1
, comparison_code
,
8756 unsignedp
, mode
, NULL_RTX
, NULL_RTX
, temp
,
8759 emit_move_insn (target
, op1
);
8764 op0
= expand_expr (treeop0
, subtarget
,
8765 VOIDmode
, EXPAND_NORMAL
);
8766 if (modifier
== EXPAND_STACK_PARM
)
8768 /* In case we have to reduce the result to bitfield precision
8769 for unsigned bitfield expand this as XOR with a proper constant
8771 if (reduce_bit_field
&& TYPE_UNSIGNED (type
))
8772 temp
= expand_binop (mode
, xor_optab
, op0
,
8773 immed_double_int_const
8774 (double_int::mask (TYPE_PRECISION (type
)), mode
),
8775 target
, 1, OPTAB_LIB_WIDEN
);
8777 temp
= expand_unop (mode
, one_cmpl_optab
, op0
, target
, 1);
8781 /* ??? Can optimize bitwise operations with one arg constant.
8782 Can optimize (a bitwise1 n) bitwise2 (a bitwise3 b)
8783 and (a bitwise1 b) bitwise2 b (etc)
8784 but that is probably not worth while. */
8793 gcc_assert (VECTOR_MODE_P (TYPE_MODE (type
))
8794 || (GET_MODE_PRECISION (TYPE_MODE (type
))
8795 == TYPE_PRECISION (type
)));
8800 /* If this is a fixed-point operation, then we cannot use the code
8801 below because "expand_shift" doesn't support sat/no-sat fixed-point
8803 if (ALL_FIXED_POINT_MODE_P (mode
))
8806 if (! safe_from_p (subtarget
, treeop1
, 1))
8808 if (modifier
== EXPAND_STACK_PARM
)
8810 op0
= expand_expr (treeop0
, subtarget
,
8811 VOIDmode
, EXPAND_NORMAL
);
8812 temp
= expand_variable_shift (code
, mode
, op0
, treeop1
, target
,
8814 if (code
== LSHIFT_EXPR
)
8815 temp
= REDUCE_BIT_FIELD (temp
);
8818 /* Could determine the answer when only additive constants differ. Also,
8819 the addition of one can be handled by changing the condition. */
8826 case UNORDERED_EXPR
:
8834 temp
= do_store_flag (ops
,
8835 modifier
!= EXPAND_STACK_PARM
? target
: NULL_RTX
,
8836 tmode
!= VOIDmode
? tmode
: mode
);
8840 /* Use a compare and a jump for BLKmode comparisons, or for function
8841 type comparisons is HAVE_canonicalize_funcptr_for_compare. */
8844 || modifier
== EXPAND_STACK_PARM
8845 || ! safe_from_p (target
, treeop0
, 1)
8846 || ! safe_from_p (target
, treeop1
, 1)
8847 /* Make sure we don't have a hard reg (such as function's return
8848 value) live across basic blocks, if not optimizing. */
8849 || (!optimize
&& REG_P (target
)
8850 && REGNO (target
) < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER
)))
8851 target
= gen_reg_rtx (tmode
!= VOIDmode
? tmode
: mode
);
8853 emit_move_insn (target
, const0_rtx
);
8855 op1
= gen_label_rtx ();
8856 jumpifnot_1 (code
, treeop0
, treeop1
, op1
, -1);
8858 if (TYPE_PRECISION (type
) == 1 && !TYPE_UNSIGNED (type
))
8859 emit_move_insn (target
, constm1_rtx
);
8861 emit_move_insn (target
, const1_rtx
);
8867 /* Get the rtx code of the operands. */
8868 op0
= expand_normal (treeop0
);
8869 op1
= expand_normal (treeop1
);
8872 target
= gen_reg_rtx (TYPE_MODE (type
));
8874 /* If target overlaps with op1, then either we need to force
8875 op1 into a pseudo (if target also overlaps with op0),
8876 or write the complex parts in reverse order. */
8877 switch (GET_CODE (target
))
8880 if (reg_overlap_mentioned_p (XEXP (target
, 0), op1
))
8882 if (reg_overlap_mentioned_p (XEXP (target
, 1), op0
))
8884 complex_expr_force_op1
:
8885 temp
= gen_reg_rtx (GET_MODE_INNER (GET_MODE (target
)));
8886 emit_move_insn (temp
, op1
);
8890 complex_expr_swap_order
:
8891 /* Move the imaginary (op1) and real (op0) parts to their
8893 write_complex_part (target
, op1
, true);
8894 write_complex_part (target
, op0
, false);
8900 temp
= adjust_address_nv (target
,
8901 GET_MODE_INNER (GET_MODE (target
)), 0);
8902 if (reg_overlap_mentioned_p (temp
, op1
))
8904 enum machine_mode imode
= GET_MODE_INNER (GET_MODE (target
));
8905 temp
= adjust_address_nv (target
, imode
,
8906 GET_MODE_SIZE (imode
));
8907 if (reg_overlap_mentioned_p (temp
, op0
))
8908 goto complex_expr_force_op1
;
8909 goto complex_expr_swap_order
;
8913 if (reg_overlap_mentioned_p (target
, op1
))
8915 if (reg_overlap_mentioned_p (target
, op0
))
8916 goto complex_expr_force_op1
;
8917 goto complex_expr_swap_order
;
8922 /* Move the real (op0) and imaginary (op1) parts to their location. */
8923 write_complex_part (target
, op0
, false);
8924 write_complex_part (target
, op1
, true);
8928 case WIDEN_SUM_EXPR
:
8930 tree oprnd0
= treeop0
;
8931 tree oprnd1
= treeop1
;
8933 expand_operands (oprnd0
, oprnd1
, NULL_RTX
, &op0
, &op1
, EXPAND_NORMAL
);
8934 target
= expand_widen_pattern_expr (ops
, op0
, NULL_RTX
, op1
,
8939 case REDUC_MAX_EXPR
:
8940 case REDUC_MIN_EXPR
:
8941 case REDUC_PLUS_EXPR
:
8943 op0
= expand_normal (treeop0
);
8944 this_optab
= optab_for_tree_code (code
, type
, optab_default
);
8945 temp
= expand_unop (mode
, this_optab
, op0
, target
, unsignedp
);
8950 case VEC_LSHIFT_EXPR
:
8951 case VEC_RSHIFT_EXPR
:
8953 target
= expand_vec_shift_expr (ops
, target
);
8957 case VEC_UNPACK_HI_EXPR
:
8958 case VEC_UNPACK_LO_EXPR
:
8960 op0
= expand_normal (treeop0
);
8961 temp
= expand_widen_pattern_expr (ops
, op0
, NULL_RTX
, NULL_RTX
,
8967 case VEC_UNPACK_FLOAT_HI_EXPR
:
8968 case VEC_UNPACK_FLOAT_LO_EXPR
:
8970 op0
= expand_normal (treeop0
);
8971 /* The signedness is determined from input operand. */
8972 temp
= expand_widen_pattern_expr
8973 (ops
, op0
, NULL_RTX
, NULL_RTX
,
8974 target
, TYPE_UNSIGNED (TREE_TYPE (treeop0
)));
8980 case VEC_WIDEN_MULT_HI_EXPR
:
8981 case VEC_WIDEN_MULT_LO_EXPR
:
8982 case VEC_WIDEN_MULT_EVEN_EXPR
:
8983 case VEC_WIDEN_MULT_ODD_EXPR
:
8984 case VEC_WIDEN_LSHIFT_HI_EXPR
:
8985 case VEC_WIDEN_LSHIFT_LO_EXPR
:
8986 expand_operands (treeop0
, treeop1
, NULL_RTX
, &op0
, &op1
, EXPAND_NORMAL
);
8987 target
= expand_widen_pattern_expr (ops
, op0
, op1
, NULL_RTX
,
8989 gcc_assert (target
);
8992 case VEC_PACK_TRUNC_EXPR
:
8993 case VEC_PACK_SAT_EXPR
:
8994 case VEC_PACK_FIX_TRUNC_EXPR
:
8995 mode
= TYPE_MODE (TREE_TYPE (treeop0
));
8999 expand_operands (treeop0
, treeop1
, target
, &op0
, &op1
, EXPAND_NORMAL
);
9000 op2
= expand_normal (treeop2
);
9002 /* Careful here: if the target doesn't support integral vector modes,
9003 a constant selection vector could wind up smooshed into a normal
9004 integral constant. */
9005 if (CONSTANT_P (op2
) && GET_CODE (op2
) != CONST_VECTOR
)
9007 tree sel_type
= TREE_TYPE (treeop2
);
9008 enum machine_mode vmode
9009 = mode_for_vector (TYPE_MODE (TREE_TYPE (sel_type
)),
9010 TYPE_VECTOR_SUBPARTS (sel_type
));
9011 gcc_assert (GET_MODE_CLASS (vmode
) == MODE_VECTOR_INT
);
9012 op2
= simplify_subreg (vmode
, op2
, TYPE_MODE (sel_type
), 0);
9013 gcc_assert (op2
&& GET_CODE (op2
) == CONST_VECTOR
);
9016 gcc_assert (GET_MODE_CLASS (GET_MODE (op2
)) == MODE_VECTOR_INT
);
9018 temp
= expand_vec_perm (mode
, op0
, op1
, op2
, target
);
9024 tree oprnd0
= treeop0
;
9025 tree oprnd1
= treeop1
;
9026 tree oprnd2
= treeop2
;
9029 expand_operands (oprnd0
, oprnd1
, NULL_RTX
, &op0
, &op1
, EXPAND_NORMAL
);
9030 op2
= expand_normal (oprnd2
);
9031 target
= expand_widen_pattern_expr (ops
, op0
, op1
, op2
,
9036 case REALIGN_LOAD_EXPR
:
9038 tree oprnd0
= treeop0
;
9039 tree oprnd1
= treeop1
;
9040 tree oprnd2
= treeop2
;
9043 this_optab
= optab_for_tree_code (code
, type
, optab_default
);
9044 expand_operands (oprnd0
, oprnd1
, NULL_RTX
, &op0
, &op1
, EXPAND_NORMAL
);
9045 op2
= expand_normal (oprnd2
);
9046 temp
= expand_ternary_op (mode
, this_optab
, op0
, op1
, op2
,
9053 /* A COND_EXPR with its type being VOID_TYPE represents a
9054 conditional jump and is handled in
9055 expand_gimple_cond_expr. */
9056 gcc_assert (!VOID_TYPE_P (type
));
9058 /* Note that COND_EXPRs whose type is a structure or union
9059 are required to be constructed to contain assignments of
9060 a temporary variable, so that we can evaluate them here
9061 for side effect only. If type is void, we must do likewise. */
9063 gcc_assert (!TREE_ADDRESSABLE (type
)
9065 && TREE_TYPE (treeop1
) != void_type_node
9066 && TREE_TYPE (treeop2
) != void_type_node
);
9068 temp
= expand_cond_expr_using_cmove (treeop0
, treeop1
, treeop2
);
9072 /* If we are not to produce a result, we have no target. Otherwise,
9073 if a target was specified use it; it will not be used as an
9074 intermediate target unless it is safe. If no target, use a
9077 if (modifier
!= EXPAND_STACK_PARM
9079 && safe_from_p (original_target
, treeop0
, 1)
9080 && GET_MODE (original_target
) == mode
9081 && !MEM_P (original_target
))
9082 temp
= original_target
;
9084 temp
= assign_temp (type
, 0, 1);
9086 do_pending_stack_adjust ();
9088 op0
= gen_label_rtx ();
9089 op1
= gen_label_rtx ();
9090 jumpifnot (treeop0
, op0
, -1);
9091 store_expr (treeop1
, temp
,
9092 modifier
== EXPAND_STACK_PARM
,
9095 emit_jump_insn (gen_jump (op1
));
9098 store_expr (treeop2
, temp
,
9099 modifier
== EXPAND_STACK_PARM
,
9107 target
= expand_vec_cond_expr (type
, treeop0
, treeop1
, treeop2
, target
);
9114 /* Here to do an ordinary binary operator. */
9116 expand_operands (treeop0
, treeop1
,
9117 subtarget
, &op0
, &op1
, EXPAND_NORMAL
);
9119 this_optab
= optab_for_tree_code (code
, type
, optab_default
);
9121 if (modifier
== EXPAND_STACK_PARM
)
9123 temp
= expand_binop (mode
, this_optab
, op0
, op1
, target
,
9124 unsignedp
, OPTAB_LIB_WIDEN
);
9126 /* Bitwise operations do not need bitfield reduction as we expect their
9127 operands being properly truncated. */
9128 if (code
== BIT_XOR_EXPR
9129 || code
== BIT_AND_EXPR
9130 || code
== BIT_IOR_EXPR
)
9132 return REDUCE_BIT_FIELD (temp
);
9134 #undef REDUCE_BIT_FIELD
9137 /* Return TRUE if expression STMT is suitable for replacement.
9138 Never consider memory loads as replaceable, because those don't ever lead
9139 into constant expressions. */
9142 stmt_is_replaceable_p (gimple stmt
)
9144 if (ssa_is_replaceable_p (stmt
))
9146 /* Don't move around loads. */
9147 if (!gimple_assign_single_p (stmt
)
9148 || is_gimple_val (gimple_assign_rhs1 (stmt
)))
9155 expand_expr_real_1 (tree exp
, rtx target
, enum machine_mode tmode
,
9156 enum expand_modifier modifier
, rtx
*alt_rtl
)
9158 rtx op0
, op1
, temp
, decl_rtl
;
9161 enum machine_mode mode
;
9162 enum tree_code code
= TREE_CODE (exp
);
9163 rtx subtarget
, original_target
;
9166 bool reduce_bit_field
;
9167 location_t loc
= EXPR_LOCATION (exp
);
9168 struct separate_ops ops
;
9169 tree treeop0
, treeop1
, treeop2
;
9170 tree ssa_name
= NULL_TREE
;
9173 type
= TREE_TYPE (exp
);
9174 mode
= TYPE_MODE (type
);
9175 unsignedp
= TYPE_UNSIGNED (type
);
9177 treeop0
= treeop1
= treeop2
= NULL_TREE
;
9178 if (!VL_EXP_CLASS_P (exp
))
9179 switch (TREE_CODE_LENGTH (code
))
9182 case 3: treeop2
= TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 2);
9183 case 2: treeop1
= TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 1);
9184 case 1: treeop0
= TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 0);
9194 ignore
= (target
== const0_rtx
9195 || ((CONVERT_EXPR_CODE_P (code
)
9196 || code
== COND_EXPR
|| code
== VIEW_CONVERT_EXPR
)
9197 && TREE_CODE (type
) == VOID_TYPE
));
9199 /* An operation in what may be a bit-field type needs the
9200 result to be reduced to the precision of the bit-field type,
9201 which is narrower than that of the type's mode. */
9202 reduce_bit_field
= (!ignore
9203 && INTEGRAL_TYPE_P (type
)
9204 && GET_MODE_PRECISION (mode
) > TYPE_PRECISION (type
));
9206 /* If we are going to ignore this result, we need only do something
9207 if there is a side-effect somewhere in the expression. If there
9208 is, short-circuit the most common cases here. Note that we must
9209 not call expand_expr with anything but const0_rtx in case this
9210 is an initial expansion of a size that contains a PLACEHOLDER_EXPR. */
9214 if (! TREE_SIDE_EFFECTS (exp
))
9217 /* Ensure we reference a volatile object even if value is ignored, but
9218 don't do this if all we are doing is taking its address. */
9219 if (TREE_THIS_VOLATILE (exp
)
9220 && TREE_CODE (exp
) != FUNCTION_DECL
9221 && mode
!= VOIDmode
&& mode
!= BLKmode
9222 && modifier
!= EXPAND_CONST_ADDRESS
)
9224 temp
= expand_expr (exp
, NULL_RTX
, VOIDmode
, modifier
);
9230 if (TREE_CODE_CLASS (code
) == tcc_unary
9231 || code
== BIT_FIELD_REF
9232 || code
== COMPONENT_REF
9233 || code
== INDIRECT_REF
)
9234 return expand_expr (treeop0
, const0_rtx
, VOIDmode
,
9237 else if (TREE_CODE_CLASS (code
) == tcc_binary
9238 || TREE_CODE_CLASS (code
) == tcc_comparison
9239 || code
== ARRAY_REF
|| code
== ARRAY_RANGE_REF
)
9241 expand_expr (treeop0
, const0_rtx
, VOIDmode
, modifier
);
9242 expand_expr (treeop1
, const0_rtx
, VOIDmode
, modifier
);
9249 if (reduce_bit_field
&& modifier
== EXPAND_STACK_PARM
)
9252 /* Use subtarget as the target for operand 0 of a binary operation. */
9253 subtarget
= get_subtarget (target
);
9254 original_target
= target
;
9260 tree function
= decl_function_context (exp
);
9262 temp
= label_rtx (exp
);
9263 temp
= gen_rtx_LABEL_REF (Pmode
, temp
);
9265 if (function
!= current_function_decl
9267 LABEL_REF_NONLOCAL_P (temp
) = 1;
9269 temp
= gen_rtx_MEM (FUNCTION_MODE
, temp
);
9274 /* ??? ivopts calls expander, without any preparation from
9275 out-of-ssa. So fake instructions as if this was an access to the
9276 base variable. This unnecessarily allocates a pseudo, see how we can
9277 reuse it, if partition base vars have it set already. */
9278 if (!currently_expanding_to_rtl
)
9280 tree var
= SSA_NAME_VAR (exp
);
9281 if (var
&& DECL_RTL_SET_P (var
))
9282 return DECL_RTL (var
);
9283 return gen_raw_REG (TYPE_MODE (TREE_TYPE (exp
)),
9284 LAST_VIRTUAL_REGISTER
+ 1);
9287 g
= get_gimple_for_ssa_name (exp
);
9288 /* For EXPAND_INITIALIZER try harder to get something simpler. */
9290 && modifier
== EXPAND_INITIALIZER
9291 && !SSA_NAME_IS_DEFAULT_DEF (exp
)
9292 && (optimize
|| DECL_IGNORED_P (SSA_NAME_VAR (exp
)))
9293 && stmt_is_replaceable_p (SSA_NAME_DEF_STMT (exp
)))
9294 g
= SSA_NAME_DEF_STMT (exp
);
9298 location_t saved_loc
= curr_insn_location ();
9300 set_curr_insn_location (gimple_location (g
));
9301 r
= expand_expr_real (gimple_assign_rhs_to_tree (g
), target
,
9302 tmode
, modifier
, NULL
);
9303 set_curr_insn_location (saved_loc
);
9304 if (REG_P (r
) && !REG_EXPR (r
))
9305 set_reg_attrs_for_decl_rtl (SSA_NAME_VAR (exp
), r
);
9310 decl_rtl
= get_rtx_for_ssa_name (ssa_name
);
9311 exp
= SSA_NAME_VAR (ssa_name
);
9312 goto expand_decl_rtl
;
9316 /* If a static var's type was incomplete when the decl was written,
9317 but the type is complete now, lay out the decl now. */
9318 if (DECL_SIZE (exp
) == 0
9319 && COMPLETE_OR_UNBOUND_ARRAY_TYPE_P (TREE_TYPE (exp
))
9320 && (TREE_STATIC (exp
) || DECL_EXTERNAL (exp
)))
9321 layout_decl (exp
, 0);
9323 /* ... fall through ... */
9327 decl_rtl
= DECL_RTL (exp
);
9329 gcc_assert (decl_rtl
);
9330 decl_rtl
= copy_rtx (decl_rtl
);
9331 /* Record writes to register variables. */
9332 if (modifier
== EXPAND_WRITE
9334 && HARD_REGISTER_P (decl_rtl
))
9335 add_to_hard_reg_set (&crtl
->asm_clobbers
,
9336 GET_MODE (decl_rtl
), REGNO (decl_rtl
));
9338 /* Ensure variable marked as used even if it doesn't go through
9339 a parser. If it hasn't be used yet, write out an external
9341 TREE_USED (exp
) = 1;
9343 /* Show we haven't gotten RTL for this yet. */
9346 /* Variables inherited from containing functions should have
9347 been lowered by this point. */
9348 context
= decl_function_context (exp
);
9349 gcc_assert (SCOPE_FILE_SCOPE_P (context
)
9350 || context
== current_function_decl
9351 || TREE_STATIC (exp
)
9352 || DECL_EXTERNAL (exp
)
9353 /* ??? C++ creates functions that are not TREE_STATIC. */
9354 || TREE_CODE (exp
) == FUNCTION_DECL
);
9356 /* This is the case of an array whose size is to be determined
9357 from its initializer, while the initializer is still being parsed.
9358 ??? We aren't parsing while expanding anymore. */
9360 if (MEM_P (decl_rtl
) && REG_P (XEXP (decl_rtl
, 0)))
9361 temp
= validize_mem (decl_rtl
);
9363 /* If DECL_RTL is memory, we are in the normal case and the
9364 address is not valid, get the address into a register. */
9366 else if (MEM_P (decl_rtl
) && modifier
!= EXPAND_INITIALIZER
)
9369 *alt_rtl
= decl_rtl
;
9370 decl_rtl
= use_anchored_address (decl_rtl
);
9371 if (modifier
!= EXPAND_CONST_ADDRESS
9372 && modifier
!= EXPAND_SUM
9373 && !memory_address_addr_space_p (DECL_MODE (exp
),
9375 MEM_ADDR_SPACE (decl_rtl
)))
9376 temp
= replace_equiv_address (decl_rtl
,
9377 copy_rtx (XEXP (decl_rtl
, 0)));
9380 /* If we got something, return it. But first, set the alignment
9381 if the address is a register. */
9384 if (MEM_P (temp
) && REG_P (XEXP (temp
, 0)))
9385 mark_reg_pointer (XEXP (temp
, 0), DECL_ALIGN (exp
));
9390 /* If the mode of DECL_RTL does not match that of the decl,
9391 there are two cases: we are dealing with a BLKmode value
9392 that is returned in a register, or we are dealing with
9393 a promoted value. In the latter case, return a SUBREG
9394 of the wanted mode, but mark it so that we know that it
9395 was already extended. */
9396 if (REG_P (decl_rtl
)
9397 && DECL_MODE (exp
) != BLKmode
9398 && GET_MODE (decl_rtl
) != DECL_MODE (exp
))
9400 enum machine_mode pmode
;
9402 /* Get the signedness to be used for this variable. Ensure we get
9403 the same mode we got when the variable was declared. */
9404 if (code
== SSA_NAME
9405 && (g
= SSA_NAME_DEF_STMT (ssa_name
))
9406 && gimple_code (g
) == GIMPLE_CALL
)
9408 gcc_assert (!gimple_call_internal_p (g
));
9409 pmode
= promote_function_mode (type
, mode
, &unsignedp
,
9410 gimple_call_fntype (g
),
9414 pmode
= promote_decl_mode (exp
, &unsignedp
);
9415 gcc_assert (GET_MODE (decl_rtl
) == pmode
);
9417 temp
= gen_lowpart_SUBREG (mode
, decl_rtl
);
9418 SUBREG_PROMOTED_VAR_P (temp
) = 1;
9419 SUBREG_PROMOTED_UNSIGNED_SET (temp
, unsignedp
);
9426 temp
= immed_double_const (TREE_INT_CST_LOW (exp
),
9427 TREE_INT_CST_HIGH (exp
), mode
);
9433 tree tmp
= NULL_TREE
;
9434 if (GET_MODE_CLASS (mode
) == MODE_VECTOR_INT
9435 || GET_MODE_CLASS (mode
) == MODE_VECTOR_FLOAT
9436 || GET_MODE_CLASS (mode
) == MODE_VECTOR_FRACT
9437 || GET_MODE_CLASS (mode
) == MODE_VECTOR_UFRACT
9438 || GET_MODE_CLASS (mode
) == MODE_VECTOR_ACCUM
9439 || GET_MODE_CLASS (mode
) == MODE_VECTOR_UACCUM
)
9440 return const_vector_from_tree (exp
);
9441 if (GET_MODE_CLASS (mode
) == MODE_INT
)
9443 tree type_for_mode
= lang_hooks
.types
.type_for_mode (mode
, 1);
9445 tmp
= fold_unary_loc (loc
, VIEW_CONVERT_EXPR
, type_for_mode
, exp
);
9449 vec
<constructor_elt
, va_gc
> *v
;
9451 vec_alloc (v
, VECTOR_CST_NELTS (exp
));
9452 for (i
= 0; i
< VECTOR_CST_NELTS (exp
); ++i
)
9453 CONSTRUCTOR_APPEND_ELT (v
, NULL_TREE
, VECTOR_CST_ELT (exp
, i
));
9454 tmp
= build_constructor (type
, v
);
9456 return expand_expr (tmp
, ignore
? const0_rtx
: target
,
9461 return expand_expr (DECL_INITIAL (exp
), target
, VOIDmode
, modifier
);
9464 /* If optimized, generate immediate CONST_DOUBLE
9465 which will be turned into memory by reload if necessary.
9467 We used to force a register so that loop.c could see it. But
9468 this does not allow gen_* patterns to perform optimizations with
9469 the constants. It also produces two insns in cases like "x = 1.0;".
9470 On most machines, floating-point constants are not permitted in
9471 many insns, so we'd end up copying it to a register in any case.
9473 Now, we do the copying in expand_binop, if appropriate. */
9474 return CONST_DOUBLE_FROM_REAL_VALUE (TREE_REAL_CST (exp
),
9475 TYPE_MODE (TREE_TYPE (exp
)));
9478 return CONST_FIXED_FROM_FIXED_VALUE (TREE_FIXED_CST (exp
),
9479 TYPE_MODE (TREE_TYPE (exp
)));
9482 /* Handle evaluating a complex constant in a CONCAT target. */
9483 if (original_target
&& GET_CODE (original_target
) == CONCAT
)
9485 enum machine_mode mode
= TYPE_MODE (TREE_TYPE (TREE_TYPE (exp
)));
9488 rtarg
= XEXP (original_target
, 0);
9489 itarg
= XEXP (original_target
, 1);
9491 /* Move the real and imaginary parts separately. */
9492 op0
= expand_expr (TREE_REALPART (exp
), rtarg
, mode
, EXPAND_NORMAL
);
9493 op1
= expand_expr (TREE_IMAGPART (exp
), itarg
, mode
, EXPAND_NORMAL
);
9496 emit_move_insn (rtarg
, op0
);
9498 emit_move_insn (itarg
, op1
);
9500 return original_target
;
9503 /* ... fall through ... */
9506 temp
= expand_expr_constant (exp
, 1, modifier
);
9508 /* temp contains a constant address.
9509 On RISC machines where a constant address isn't valid,
9510 make some insns to get that address into a register. */
9511 if (modifier
!= EXPAND_CONST_ADDRESS
9512 && modifier
!= EXPAND_INITIALIZER
9513 && modifier
!= EXPAND_SUM
9514 && ! memory_address_addr_space_p (mode
, XEXP (temp
, 0),
9515 MEM_ADDR_SPACE (temp
)))
9516 return replace_equiv_address (temp
,
9517 copy_rtx (XEXP (temp
, 0)));
9523 rtx ret
= expand_expr_real_1 (val
, target
, tmode
, modifier
, alt_rtl
);
9525 if (!SAVE_EXPR_RESOLVED_P (exp
))
9527 /* We can indeed still hit this case, typically via builtin
9528 expanders calling save_expr immediately before expanding
9529 something. Assume this means that we only have to deal
9530 with non-BLKmode values. */
9531 gcc_assert (GET_MODE (ret
) != BLKmode
);
9533 val
= build_decl (curr_insn_location (),
9534 VAR_DECL
, NULL
, TREE_TYPE (exp
));
9535 DECL_ARTIFICIAL (val
) = 1;
9536 DECL_IGNORED_P (val
) = 1;
9538 TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 0) = treeop0
;
9539 SAVE_EXPR_RESOLVED_P (exp
) = 1;
9541 if (!CONSTANT_P (ret
))
9542 ret
= copy_to_reg (ret
);
9543 SET_DECL_RTL (val
, ret
);
9551 /* If we don't need the result, just ensure we evaluate any
9555 unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT idx
;
9558 FOR_EACH_CONSTRUCTOR_VALUE (CONSTRUCTOR_ELTS (exp
), idx
, value
)
9559 expand_expr (value
, const0_rtx
, VOIDmode
, EXPAND_NORMAL
);
9564 return expand_constructor (exp
, target
, modifier
, false);
9566 case TARGET_MEM_REF
:
9569 = TYPE_ADDR_SPACE (TREE_TYPE (TREE_TYPE (TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 0))));
9570 enum insn_code icode
;
9573 op0
= addr_for_mem_ref (exp
, as
, true);
9574 op0
= memory_address_addr_space (mode
, op0
, as
);
9575 temp
= gen_rtx_MEM (mode
, op0
);
9576 set_mem_attributes (temp
, exp
, 0);
9577 set_mem_addr_space (temp
, as
);
9578 align
= get_object_alignment (exp
);
9579 if (modifier
!= EXPAND_WRITE
9580 && modifier
!= EXPAND_MEMORY
9582 && align
< GET_MODE_ALIGNMENT (mode
)
9583 /* If the target does not have special handling for unaligned
9584 loads of mode then it can use regular moves for them. */
9585 && ((icode
= optab_handler (movmisalign_optab
, mode
))
9586 != CODE_FOR_nothing
))
9588 struct expand_operand ops
[2];
9590 /* We've already validated the memory, and we're creating a
9591 new pseudo destination. The predicates really can't fail,
9592 nor can the generator. */
9593 create_output_operand (&ops
[0], NULL_RTX
, mode
);
9594 create_fixed_operand (&ops
[1], temp
);
9595 expand_insn (icode
, 2, ops
);
9596 temp
= ops
[0].value
;
9604 = TYPE_ADDR_SPACE (TREE_TYPE (TREE_TYPE (TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 0))));
9605 enum machine_mode address_mode
;
9606 tree base
= TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 0);
9608 enum insn_code icode
;
9610 /* Handle expansion of non-aliased memory with non-BLKmode. That
9611 might end up in a register. */
9612 if (mem_ref_refers_to_non_mem_p (exp
))
9614 HOST_WIDE_INT offset
= mem_ref_offset (exp
).low
;
9615 base
= TREE_OPERAND (base
, 0);
9617 && host_integerp (TYPE_SIZE (type
), 1)
9618 && (GET_MODE_BITSIZE (DECL_MODE (base
))
9619 == TREE_INT_CST_LOW (TYPE_SIZE (type
))))
9620 return expand_expr (build1 (VIEW_CONVERT_EXPR
, type
, base
),
9621 target
, tmode
, modifier
);
9622 if (TYPE_MODE (type
) == BLKmode
)
9624 temp
= assign_stack_temp (DECL_MODE (base
),
9625 GET_MODE_SIZE (DECL_MODE (base
)));
9626 store_expr (base
, temp
, 0, false);
9627 temp
= adjust_address (temp
, BLKmode
, offset
);
9628 set_mem_size (temp
, int_size_in_bytes (type
));
9631 exp
= build3 (BIT_FIELD_REF
, type
, base
, TYPE_SIZE (type
),
9632 bitsize_int (offset
* BITS_PER_UNIT
));
9633 return expand_expr (exp
, target
, tmode
, modifier
);
9635 address_mode
= targetm
.addr_space
.address_mode (as
);
9636 base
= TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 0);
9637 if ((def_stmt
= get_def_for_expr (base
, BIT_AND_EXPR
)))
9639 tree mask
= gimple_assign_rhs2 (def_stmt
);
9640 base
= build2 (BIT_AND_EXPR
, TREE_TYPE (base
),
9641 gimple_assign_rhs1 (def_stmt
), mask
);
9642 TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 0) = base
;
9644 align
= get_object_alignment (exp
);
9645 op0
= expand_expr (base
, NULL_RTX
, VOIDmode
, EXPAND_SUM
);
9646 op0
= memory_address_addr_space (mode
, op0
, as
);
9647 if (!integer_zerop (TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 1)))
9650 = immed_double_int_const (mem_ref_offset (exp
), address_mode
);
9651 op0
= simplify_gen_binary (PLUS
, address_mode
, op0
, off
);
9652 op0
= memory_address_addr_space (mode
, op0
, as
);
9654 temp
= gen_rtx_MEM (mode
, op0
);
9655 set_mem_attributes (temp
, exp
, 0);
9656 set_mem_addr_space (temp
, as
);
9657 if (TREE_THIS_VOLATILE (exp
))
9658 MEM_VOLATILE_P (temp
) = 1;
9659 if (modifier
!= EXPAND_WRITE
9660 && modifier
!= EXPAND_MEMORY
9662 && align
< GET_MODE_ALIGNMENT (mode
))
9664 if ((icode
= optab_handler (movmisalign_optab
, mode
))
9665 != CODE_FOR_nothing
)
9667 struct expand_operand ops
[2];
9669 /* We've already validated the memory, and we're creating a
9670 new pseudo destination. The predicates really can't fail,
9671 nor can the generator. */
9672 create_output_operand (&ops
[0], NULL_RTX
, mode
);
9673 create_fixed_operand (&ops
[1], temp
);
9674 expand_insn (icode
, 2, ops
);
9675 temp
= ops
[0].value
;
9677 else if (SLOW_UNALIGNED_ACCESS (mode
, align
))
9678 temp
= extract_bit_field (temp
, GET_MODE_BITSIZE (mode
),
9679 0, TYPE_UNSIGNED (TREE_TYPE (exp
)),
9680 (modifier
== EXPAND_STACK_PARM
9681 ? NULL_RTX
: target
),
9690 tree array
= treeop0
;
9691 tree index
= treeop1
;
9694 /* Fold an expression like: "foo"[2].
9695 This is not done in fold so it won't happen inside &.
9696 Don't fold if this is for wide characters since it's too
9697 difficult to do correctly and this is a very rare case. */
9699 if (modifier
!= EXPAND_CONST_ADDRESS
9700 && modifier
!= EXPAND_INITIALIZER
9701 && modifier
!= EXPAND_MEMORY
)
9703 tree t
= fold_read_from_constant_string (exp
);
9706 return expand_expr (t
, target
, tmode
, modifier
);
9709 /* If this is a constant index into a constant array,
9710 just get the value from the array. Handle both the cases when
9711 we have an explicit constructor and when our operand is a variable
9712 that was declared const. */
9714 if (modifier
!= EXPAND_CONST_ADDRESS
9715 && modifier
!= EXPAND_INITIALIZER
9716 && modifier
!= EXPAND_MEMORY
9717 && TREE_CODE (array
) == CONSTRUCTOR
9718 && ! TREE_SIDE_EFFECTS (array
)
9719 && TREE_CODE (index
) == INTEGER_CST
)
9721 unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT ix
;
9724 FOR_EACH_CONSTRUCTOR_ELT (CONSTRUCTOR_ELTS (array
), ix
,
9726 if (tree_int_cst_equal (field
, index
))
9728 if (!TREE_SIDE_EFFECTS (value
))
9729 return expand_expr (fold (value
), target
, tmode
, modifier
);
9734 else if (optimize
>= 1
9735 && modifier
!= EXPAND_CONST_ADDRESS
9736 && modifier
!= EXPAND_INITIALIZER
9737 && modifier
!= EXPAND_MEMORY
9738 && TREE_READONLY (array
) && ! TREE_SIDE_EFFECTS (array
)
9739 && TREE_CODE (index
) == INTEGER_CST
9740 && (TREE_CODE (array
) == VAR_DECL
9741 || TREE_CODE (array
) == CONST_DECL
)
9742 && (init
= ctor_for_folding (array
)) != error_mark_node
)
9744 if (TREE_CODE (init
) == CONSTRUCTOR
)
9746 unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT ix
;
9749 FOR_EACH_CONSTRUCTOR_ELT (CONSTRUCTOR_ELTS (init
), ix
,
9751 if (tree_int_cst_equal (field
, index
))
9753 if (TREE_SIDE_EFFECTS (value
))
9756 if (TREE_CODE (value
) == CONSTRUCTOR
)
9758 /* If VALUE is a CONSTRUCTOR, this
9759 optimization is only useful if
9760 this doesn't store the CONSTRUCTOR
9761 into memory. If it does, it is more
9762 efficient to just load the data from
9763 the array directly. */
9764 rtx ret
= expand_constructor (value
, target
,
9766 if (ret
== NULL_RTX
)
9771 expand_expr (fold (value
), target
, tmode
, modifier
);
9774 else if (TREE_CODE (init
) == STRING_CST
)
9776 tree low_bound
= array_ref_low_bound (exp
);
9777 tree index1
= fold_convert_loc (loc
, sizetype
, treeop1
);
9779 /* Optimize the special case of a zero lower bound.
9781 We convert the lower bound to sizetype to avoid problems
9782 with constant folding. E.g. suppose the lower bound is
9783 1 and its mode is QI. Without the conversion
9784 (ARRAY + (INDEX - (unsigned char)1))
9786 (ARRAY + (-(unsigned char)1) + INDEX)
9788 (ARRAY + 255 + INDEX). Oops! */
9789 if (!integer_zerop (low_bound
))
9790 index1
= size_diffop_loc (loc
, index1
,
9791 fold_convert_loc (loc
, sizetype
,
9794 if (compare_tree_int (index1
, TREE_STRING_LENGTH (init
)) < 0)
9796 tree type
= TREE_TYPE (TREE_TYPE (init
));
9797 enum machine_mode mode
= TYPE_MODE (type
);
9799 if (GET_MODE_CLASS (mode
) == MODE_INT
9800 && GET_MODE_SIZE (mode
) == 1)
9801 return gen_int_mode (TREE_STRING_POINTER (init
)
9802 [TREE_INT_CST_LOW (index1
)],
9808 goto normal_inner_ref
;
9811 /* If the operand is a CONSTRUCTOR, we can just extract the
9812 appropriate field if it is present. */
9813 if (TREE_CODE (treeop0
) == CONSTRUCTOR
)
9815 unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT idx
;
9818 FOR_EACH_CONSTRUCTOR_ELT (CONSTRUCTOR_ELTS (treeop0
),
9820 if (field
== treeop1
9821 /* We can normally use the value of the field in the
9822 CONSTRUCTOR. However, if this is a bitfield in
9823 an integral mode that we can fit in a HOST_WIDE_INT,
9824 we must mask only the number of bits in the bitfield,
9825 since this is done implicitly by the constructor. If
9826 the bitfield does not meet either of those conditions,
9827 we can't do this optimization. */
9828 && (! DECL_BIT_FIELD (field
)
9829 || ((GET_MODE_CLASS (DECL_MODE (field
)) == MODE_INT
)
9830 && (GET_MODE_PRECISION (DECL_MODE (field
))
9831 <= HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT
))))
9833 if (DECL_BIT_FIELD (field
)
9834 && modifier
== EXPAND_STACK_PARM
)
9836 op0
= expand_expr (value
, target
, tmode
, modifier
);
9837 if (DECL_BIT_FIELD (field
))
9839 HOST_WIDE_INT bitsize
= TREE_INT_CST_LOW (DECL_SIZE (field
));
9840 enum machine_mode imode
= TYPE_MODE (TREE_TYPE (field
));
9842 if (TYPE_UNSIGNED (TREE_TYPE (field
)))
9844 op1
= gen_int_mode (((HOST_WIDE_INT
) 1 << bitsize
) - 1,
9846 op0
= expand_and (imode
, op0
, op1
, target
);
9850 int count
= GET_MODE_PRECISION (imode
) - bitsize
;
9852 op0
= expand_shift (LSHIFT_EXPR
, imode
, op0
, count
,
9854 op0
= expand_shift (RSHIFT_EXPR
, imode
, op0
, count
,
9862 goto normal_inner_ref
;
9865 case ARRAY_RANGE_REF
:
9868 enum machine_mode mode1
, mode2
;
9869 HOST_WIDE_INT bitsize
, bitpos
;
9871 int volatilep
= 0, must_force_mem
;
9872 tree tem
= get_inner_reference (exp
, &bitsize
, &bitpos
, &offset
,
9873 &mode1
, &unsignedp
, &volatilep
, true);
9874 rtx orig_op0
, memloc
;
9875 bool mem_attrs_from_type
= false;
9877 /* If we got back the original object, something is wrong. Perhaps
9878 we are evaluating an expression too early. In any event, don't
9879 infinitely recurse. */
9880 gcc_assert (tem
!= exp
);
9882 /* If TEM's type is a union of variable size, pass TARGET to the inner
9883 computation, since it will need a temporary and TARGET is known
9884 to have to do. This occurs in unchecked conversion in Ada. */
9887 (TREE_CODE (TREE_TYPE (tem
)) == UNION_TYPE
9888 && COMPLETE_TYPE_P (TREE_TYPE (tem
))
9889 && (TREE_CODE (TYPE_SIZE (TREE_TYPE (tem
)))
9891 && modifier
!= EXPAND_STACK_PARM
9892 ? target
: NULL_RTX
),
9894 modifier
== EXPAND_SUM
? EXPAND_NORMAL
: modifier
);
9896 /* If the bitfield is volatile, we want to access it in the
9897 field's mode, not the computed mode.
9898 If a MEM has VOIDmode (external with incomplete type),
9899 use BLKmode for it instead. */
9902 if (volatilep
&& flag_strict_volatile_bitfields
> 0)
9903 op0
= adjust_address (op0
, mode1
, 0);
9904 else if (GET_MODE (op0
) == VOIDmode
)
9905 op0
= adjust_address (op0
, BLKmode
, 0);
9909 = CONSTANT_P (op0
) ? TYPE_MODE (TREE_TYPE (tem
)) : GET_MODE (op0
);
9911 /* If we have either an offset, a BLKmode result, or a reference
9912 outside the underlying object, we must force it to memory.
9913 Such a case can occur in Ada if we have unchecked conversion
9914 of an expression from a scalar type to an aggregate type or
9915 for an ARRAY_RANGE_REF whose type is BLKmode, or if we were
9916 passed a partially uninitialized object or a view-conversion
9917 to a larger size. */
9918 must_force_mem
= (offset
9920 || bitpos
+ bitsize
> GET_MODE_BITSIZE (mode2
));
9922 /* Handle CONCAT first. */
9923 if (GET_CODE (op0
) == CONCAT
&& !must_force_mem
)
9926 && bitsize
== GET_MODE_BITSIZE (GET_MODE (op0
)))
9929 && bitsize
== GET_MODE_BITSIZE (GET_MODE (XEXP (op0
, 0)))
9932 op0
= XEXP (op0
, 0);
9933 mode2
= GET_MODE (op0
);
9935 else if (bitpos
== GET_MODE_BITSIZE (GET_MODE (XEXP (op0
, 0)))
9936 && bitsize
== GET_MODE_BITSIZE (GET_MODE (XEXP (op0
, 1)))
9940 op0
= XEXP (op0
, 1);
9942 mode2
= GET_MODE (op0
);
9945 /* Otherwise force into memory. */
9949 /* If this is a constant, put it in a register if it is a legitimate
9950 constant and we don't need a memory reference. */
9951 if (CONSTANT_P (op0
)
9953 && targetm
.legitimate_constant_p (mode2
, op0
)
9955 op0
= force_reg (mode2
, op0
);
9957 /* Otherwise, if this is a constant, try to force it to the constant
9958 pool. Note that back-ends, e.g. MIPS, may refuse to do so if it
9959 is a legitimate constant. */
9960 else if (CONSTANT_P (op0
) && (memloc
= force_const_mem (mode2
, op0
)))
9961 op0
= validize_mem (memloc
);
9963 /* Otherwise, if this is a constant or the object is not in memory
9964 and need be, put it there. */
9965 else if (CONSTANT_P (op0
) || (!MEM_P (op0
) && must_force_mem
))
9967 tree nt
= build_qualified_type (TREE_TYPE (tem
),
9968 (TYPE_QUALS (TREE_TYPE (tem
))
9969 | TYPE_QUAL_CONST
));
9970 memloc
= assign_temp (nt
, 1, 1);
9971 emit_move_insn (memloc
, op0
);
9973 mem_attrs_from_type
= true;
9978 enum machine_mode address_mode
;
9979 rtx offset_rtx
= expand_expr (offset
, NULL_RTX
, VOIDmode
,
9982 gcc_assert (MEM_P (op0
));
9984 address_mode
= get_address_mode (op0
);
9985 if (GET_MODE (offset_rtx
) != address_mode
)
9986 offset_rtx
= convert_to_mode (address_mode
, offset_rtx
, 0);
9988 if (GET_MODE (op0
) == BLKmode
9989 /* A constant address in OP0 can have VOIDmode, we must
9990 not try to call force_reg in that case. */
9991 && GET_MODE (XEXP (op0
, 0)) != VOIDmode
9993 && (bitpos
% bitsize
) == 0
9994 && (bitsize
% GET_MODE_ALIGNMENT (mode1
)) == 0
9995 && MEM_ALIGN (op0
) == GET_MODE_ALIGNMENT (mode1
))
9997 op0
= adjust_address (op0
, mode1
, bitpos
/ BITS_PER_UNIT
);
10001 op0
= offset_address (op0
, offset_rtx
,
10002 highest_pow2_factor (offset
));
10005 /* If OFFSET is making OP0 more aligned than BIGGEST_ALIGNMENT,
10006 record its alignment as BIGGEST_ALIGNMENT. */
10007 if (MEM_P (op0
) && bitpos
== 0 && offset
!= 0
10008 && is_aligning_offset (offset
, tem
))
10009 set_mem_align (op0
, BIGGEST_ALIGNMENT
);
10011 /* Don't forget about volatility even if this is a bitfield. */
10012 if (MEM_P (op0
) && volatilep
&& ! MEM_VOLATILE_P (op0
))
10014 if (op0
== orig_op0
)
10015 op0
= copy_rtx (op0
);
10017 MEM_VOLATILE_P (op0
) = 1;
10020 /* In cases where an aligned union has an unaligned object
10021 as a field, we might be extracting a BLKmode value from
10022 an integer-mode (e.g., SImode) object. Handle this case
10023 by doing the extract into an object as wide as the field
10024 (which we know to be the width of a basic mode), then
10025 storing into memory, and changing the mode to BLKmode. */
10026 if (mode1
== VOIDmode
10027 || REG_P (op0
) || GET_CODE (op0
) == SUBREG
10028 || (mode1
!= BLKmode
&& ! direct_load
[(int) mode1
]
10029 && GET_MODE_CLASS (mode
) != MODE_COMPLEX_INT
10030 && GET_MODE_CLASS (mode
) != MODE_COMPLEX_FLOAT
10031 && modifier
!= EXPAND_CONST_ADDRESS
10032 && modifier
!= EXPAND_INITIALIZER
10033 && modifier
!= EXPAND_MEMORY
)
10034 /* If the field is volatile, we always want an aligned
10035 access. Do this in following two situations:
10036 1. the access is not already naturally
10037 aligned, otherwise "normal" (non-bitfield) volatile fields
10038 become non-addressable.
10039 2. the bitsize is narrower than the access size. Need
10040 to extract bitfields from the access. */
10041 || (volatilep
&& flag_strict_volatile_bitfields
> 0
10042 && (bitpos
% GET_MODE_ALIGNMENT (mode
) != 0
10043 || (mode1
!= BLKmode
10044 && bitsize
< GET_MODE_SIZE (mode1
) * BITS_PER_UNIT
)))
10045 /* If the field isn't aligned enough to fetch as a memref,
10046 fetch it as a bit field. */
10047 || (mode1
!= BLKmode
10048 && (((TYPE_ALIGN (TREE_TYPE (tem
)) < GET_MODE_ALIGNMENT (mode
)
10049 || (bitpos
% GET_MODE_ALIGNMENT (mode
) != 0)
10051 && (MEM_ALIGN (op0
) < GET_MODE_ALIGNMENT (mode1
)
10052 || (bitpos
% GET_MODE_ALIGNMENT (mode1
) != 0))))
10053 && modifier
!= EXPAND_MEMORY
10054 && ((modifier
== EXPAND_CONST_ADDRESS
10055 || modifier
== EXPAND_INITIALIZER
)
10057 : SLOW_UNALIGNED_ACCESS (mode1
, MEM_ALIGN (op0
))))
10058 || (bitpos
% BITS_PER_UNIT
!= 0)))
10059 /* If the type and the field are a constant size and the
10060 size of the type isn't the same size as the bitfield,
10061 we must use bitfield operations. */
10063 && TYPE_SIZE (TREE_TYPE (exp
))
10064 && TREE_CODE (TYPE_SIZE (TREE_TYPE (exp
))) == INTEGER_CST
10065 && 0 != compare_tree_int (TYPE_SIZE (TREE_TYPE (exp
)),
10068 enum machine_mode ext_mode
= mode
;
10070 if (ext_mode
== BLKmode
10071 && ! (target
!= 0 && MEM_P (op0
)
10073 && bitpos
% BITS_PER_UNIT
== 0))
10074 ext_mode
= mode_for_size (bitsize
, MODE_INT
, 1);
10076 if (ext_mode
== BLKmode
)
10079 target
= assign_temp (type
, 1, 1);
10084 /* In this case, BITPOS must start at a byte boundary and
10085 TARGET, if specified, must be a MEM. */
10086 gcc_assert (MEM_P (op0
)
10087 && (!target
|| MEM_P (target
))
10088 && !(bitpos
% BITS_PER_UNIT
));
10090 emit_block_move (target
,
10091 adjust_address (op0
, VOIDmode
,
10092 bitpos
/ BITS_PER_UNIT
),
10093 GEN_INT ((bitsize
+ BITS_PER_UNIT
- 1)
10095 (modifier
== EXPAND_STACK_PARM
10096 ? BLOCK_OP_CALL_PARM
: BLOCK_OP_NORMAL
));
10101 op0
= validize_mem (op0
);
10103 if (MEM_P (op0
) && REG_P (XEXP (op0
, 0)))
10104 mark_reg_pointer (XEXP (op0
, 0), MEM_ALIGN (op0
));
10106 op0
= extract_bit_field (op0
, bitsize
, bitpos
, unsignedp
,
10107 (modifier
== EXPAND_STACK_PARM
10108 ? NULL_RTX
: target
),
10109 ext_mode
, ext_mode
);
10111 /* If the result is a record type and BITSIZE is narrower than
10112 the mode of OP0, an integral mode, and this is a big endian
10113 machine, we must put the field into the high-order bits. */
10114 if (TREE_CODE (type
) == RECORD_TYPE
&& BYTES_BIG_ENDIAN
10115 && GET_MODE_CLASS (GET_MODE (op0
)) == MODE_INT
10116 && bitsize
< (HOST_WIDE_INT
) GET_MODE_BITSIZE (GET_MODE (op0
)))
10117 op0
= expand_shift (LSHIFT_EXPR
, GET_MODE (op0
), op0
,
10118 GET_MODE_BITSIZE (GET_MODE (op0
))
10119 - bitsize
, op0
, 1);
10121 /* If the result type is BLKmode, store the data into a temporary
10122 of the appropriate type, but with the mode corresponding to the
10123 mode for the data we have (op0's mode). It's tempting to make
10124 this a constant type, since we know it's only being stored once,
10125 but that can cause problems if we are taking the address of this
10126 COMPONENT_REF because the MEM of any reference via that address
10127 will have flags corresponding to the type, which will not
10128 necessarily be constant. */
10129 if (mode
== BLKmode
)
10133 new_rtx
= assign_stack_temp_for_type (ext_mode
,
10134 GET_MODE_BITSIZE (ext_mode
),
10136 emit_move_insn (new_rtx
, op0
);
10137 op0
= copy_rtx (new_rtx
);
10138 PUT_MODE (op0
, BLKmode
);
10144 /* If the result is BLKmode, use that to access the object
10146 if (mode
== BLKmode
)
10149 /* Get a reference to just this component. */
10150 if (modifier
== EXPAND_CONST_ADDRESS
10151 || modifier
== EXPAND_SUM
|| modifier
== EXPAND_INITIALIZER
)
10152 op0
= adjust_address_nv (op0
, mode1
, bitpos
/ BITS_PER_UNIT
);
10154 op0
= adjust_address (op0
, mode1
, bitpos
/ BITS_PER_UNIT
);
10156 if (op0
== orig_op0
)
10157 op0
= copy_rtx (op0
);
10159 /* If op0 is a temporary because of forcing to memory, pass only the
10160 type to set_mem_attributes so that the original expression is never
10161 marked as ADDRESSABLE through MEM_EXPR of the temporary. */
10162 if (mem_attrs_from_type
)
10163 set_mem_attributes (op0
, type
, 0);
10165 set_mem_attributes (op0
, exp
, 0);
10167 if (REG_P (XEXP (op0
, 0)))
10168 mark_reg_pointer (XEXP (op0
, 0), MEM_ALIGN (op0
));
10170 MEM_VOLATILE_P (op0
) |= volatilep
;
10171 if (mode
== mode1
|| mode1
== BLKmode
|| mode1
== tmode
10172 || modifier
== EXPAND_CONST_ADDRESS
10173 || modifier
== EXPAND_INITIALIZER
)
10177 target
= gen_reg_rtx (tmode
!= VOIDmode
? tmode
: mode
);
10179 convert_move (target
, op0
, unsignedp
);
10184 return expand_expr (OBJ_TYPE_REF_EXPR (exp
), target
, tmode
, modifier
);
10187 /* All valid uses of __builtin_va_arg_pack () are removed during
10189 if (CALL_EXPR_VA_ARG_PACK (exp
))
10190 error ("%Kinvalid use of %<__builtin_va_arg_pack ()%>", exp
);
10192 tree fndecl
= get_callee_fndecl (exp
), attr
;
10195 && (attr
= lookup_attribute ("error",
10196 DECL_ATTRIBUTES (fndecl
))) != NULL
)
10197 error ("%Kcall to %qs declared with attribute error: %s",
10198 exp
, identifier_to_locale (lang_hooks
.decl_printable_name (fndecl
, 1)),
10199 TREE_STRING_POINTER (TREE_VALUE (TREE_VALUE (attr
))));
10201 && (attr
= lookup_attribute ("warning",
10202 DECL_ATTRIBUTES (fndecl
))) != NULL
)
10203 warning_at (tree_nonartificial_location (exp
),
10204 0, "%Kcall to %qs declared with attribute warning: %s",
10205 exp
, identifier_to_locale (lang_hooks
.decl_printable_name (fndecl
, 1)),
10206 TREE_STRING_POINTER (TREE_VALUE (TREE_VALUE (attr
))));
10208 /* Check for a built-in function. */
10209 if (fndecl
&& DECL_BUILT_IN (fndecl
))
10211 gcc_assert (DECL_BUILT_IN_CLASS (fndecl
) != BUILT_IN_FRONTEND
);
10212 return expand_builtin (exp
, target
, subtarget
, tmode
, ignore
);
10215 return expand_call (exp
, target
, ignore
);
10217 case VIEW_CONVERT_EXPR
:
10220 /* If we are converting to BLKmode, try to avoid an intermediate
10221 temporary by fetching an inner memory reference. */
10222 if (mode
== BLKmode
10223 && TREE_CODE (TYPE_SIZE (type
)) == INTEGER_CST
10224 && TYPE_MODE (TREE_TYPE (treeop0
)) != BLKmode
10225 && handled_component_p (treeop0
))
10227 enum machine_mode mode1
;
10228 HOST_WIDE_INT bitsize
, bitpos
;
10233 = get_inner_reference (treeop0
, &bitsize
, &bitpos
,
10234 &offset
, &mode1
, &unsignedp
, &volatilep
,
10238 /* ??? We should work harder and deal with non-zero offsets. */
10240 && (bitpos
% BITS_PER_UNIT
) == 0
10242 && compare_tree_int (TYPE_SIZE (type
), bitsize
) == 0)
10244 /* See the normal_inner_ref case for the rationale. */
10246 = expand_expr (tem
,
10247 (TREE_CODE (TREE_TYPE (tem
)) == UNION_TYPE
10248 && (TREE_CODE (TYPE_SIZE (TREE_TYPE (tem
)))
10250 && modifier
!= EXPAND_STACK_PARM
10251 ? target
: NULL_RTX
),
10253 modifier
== EXPAND_SUM
? EXPAND_NORMAL
: modifier
);
10255 if (MEM_P (orig_op0
))
10259 /* Get a reference to just this component. */
10260 if (modifier
== EXPAND_CONST_ADDRESS
10261 || modifier
== EXPAND_SUM
10262 || modifier
== EXPAND_INITIALIZER
)
10263 op0
= adjust_address_nv (op0
, mode
, bitpos
/ BITS_PER_UNIT
);
10265 op0
= adjust_address (op0
, mode
, bitpos
/ BITS_PER_UNIT
);
10267 if (op0
== orig_op0
)
10268 op0
= copy_rtx (op0
);
10270 set_mem_attributes (op0
, treeop0
, 0);
10271 if (REG_P (XEXP (op0
, 0)))
10272 mark_reg_pointer (XEXP (op0
, 0), MEM_ALIGN (op0
));
10274 MEM_VOLATILE_P (op0
) |= volatilep
;
10280 op0
= expand_expr (treeop0
, NULL_RTX
, VOIDmode
, modifier
);
10282 /* If the input and output modes are both the same, we are done. */
10283 if (mode
== GET_MODE (op0
))
10285 /* If neither mode is BLKmode, and both modes are the same size
10286 then we can use gen_lowpart. */
10287 else if (mode
!= BLKmode
&& GET_MODE (op0
) != BLKmode
10288 && (GET_MODE_PRECISION (mode
)
10289 == GET_MODE_PRECISION (GET_MODE (op0
)))
10290 && !COMPLEX_MODE_P (GET_MODE (op0
)))
10292 if (GET_CODE (op0
) == SUBREG
)
10293 op0
= force_reg (GET_MODE (op0
), op0
);
10294 temp
= gen_lowpart_common (mode
, op0
);
10299 if (!REG_P (op0
) && !MEM_P (op0
))
10300 op0
= force_reg (GET_MODE (op0
), op0
);
10301 op0
= gen_lowpart (mode
, op0
);
10304 /* If both types are integral, convert from one mode to the other. */
10305 else if (INTEGRAL_TYPE_P (type
) && INTEGRAL_TYPE_P (TREE_TYPE (treeop0
)))
10306 op0
= convert_modes (mode
, GET_MODE (op0
), op0
,
10307 TYPE_UNSIGNED (TREE_TYPE (treeop0
)));
10308 /* As a last resort, spill op0 to memory, and reload it in a
10310 else if (!MEM_P (op0
))
10312 /* If the operand is not a MEM, force it into memory. Since we
10313 are going to be changing the mode of the MEM, don't call
10314 force_const_mem for constants because we don't allow pool
10315 constants to change mode. */
10316 tree inner_type
= TREE_TYPE (treeop0
);
10318 gcc_assert (!TREE_ADDRESSABLE (exp
));
10320 if (target
== 0 || GET_MODE (target
) != TYPE_MODE (inner_type
))
10322 = assign_stack_temp_for_type
10323 (TYPE_MODE (inner_type
),
10324 GET_MODE_SIZE (TYPE_MODE (inner_type
)), inner_type
);
10326 emit_move_insn (target
, op0
);
10330 /* At this point, OP0 is in the correct mode. If the output type is
10331 such that the operand is known to be aligned, indicate that it is.
10332 Otherwise, we need only be concerned about alignment for non-BLKmode
10336 enum insn_code icode
;
10338 if (TYPE_ALIGN_OK (type
))
10340 /* ??? Copying the MEM without substantially changing it might
10341 run afoul of the code handling volatile memory references in
10342 store_expr, which assumes that TARGET is returned unmodified
10343 if it has been used. */
10344 op0
= copy_rtx (op0
);
10345 set_mem_align (op0
, MAX (MEM_ALIGN (op0
), TYPE_ALIGN (type
)));
10347 else if (mode
!= BLKmode
10348 && MEM_ALIGN (op0
) < GET_MODE_ALIGNMENT (mode
)
10349 /* If the target does have special handling for unaligned
10350 loads of mode then use them. */
10351 && ((icode
= optab_handler (movmisalign_optab
, mode
))
10352 != CODE_FOR_nothing
))
10356 op0
= adjust_address (op0
, mode
, 0);
10357 /* We've already validated the memory, and we're creating a
10358 new pseudo destination. The predicates really can't
10360 reg
= gen_reg_rtx (mode
);
10362 /* Nor can the insn generator. */
10363 insn
= GEN_FCN (icode
) (reg
, op0
);
10367 else if (STRICT_ALIGNMENT
10369 && MEM_ALIGN (op0
) < GET_MODE_ALIGNMENT (mode
))
10371 tree inner_type
= TREE_TYPE (treeop0
);
10372 HOST_WIDE_INT temp_size
10373 = MAX (int_size_in_bytes (inner_type
),
10374 (HOST_WIDE_INT
) GET_MODE_SIZE (mode
));
10376 = assign_stack_temp_for_type (mode
, temp_size
, type
);
10377 rtx new_with_op0_mode
10378 = adjust_address (new_rtx
, GET_MODE (op0
), 0);
10380 gcc_assert (!TREE_ADDRESSABLE (exp
));
10382 if (GET_MODE (op0
) == BLKmode
)
10383 emit_block_move (new_with_op0_mode
, op0
,
10384 GEN_INT (GET_MODE_SIZE (mode
)),
10385 (modifier
== EXPAND_STACK_PARM
10386 ? BLOCK_OP_CALL_PARM
: BLOCK_OP_NORMAL
));
10388 emit_move_insn (new_with_op0_mode
, op0
);
10393 op0
= adjust_address (op0
, mode
, 0);
10400 tree lhs
= treeop0
;
10401 tree rhs
= treeop1
;
10402 gcc_assert (ignore
);
10404 /* Check for |= or &= of a bitfield of size one into another bitfield
10405 of size 1. In this case, (unless we need the result of the
10406 assignment) we can do this more efficiently with a
10407 test followed by an assignment, if necessary.
10409 ??? At this point, we can't get a BIT_FIELD_REF here. But if
10410 things change so we do, this code should be enhanced to
10412 if (TREE_CODE (lhs
) == COMPONENT_REF
10413 && (TREE_CODE (rhs
) == BIT_IOR_EXPR
10414 || TREE_CODE (rhs
) == BIT_AND_EXPR
)
10415 && TREE_OPERAND (rhs
, 0) == lhs
10416 && TREE_CODE (TREE_OPERAND (rhs
, 1)) == COMPONENT_REF
10417 && integer_onep (DECL_SIZE (TREE_OPERAND (lhs
, 1)))
10418 && integer_onep (DECL_SIZE (TREE_OPERAND (TREE_OPERAND (rhs
, 1), 1))))
10420 rtx label
= gen_label_rtx ();
10421 int value
= TREE_CODE (rhs
) == BIT_IOR_EXPR
;
10422 do_jump (TREE_OPERAND (rhs
, 1),
10424 value
? 0 : label
, -1);
10425 expand_assignment (lhs
, build_int_cst (TREE_TYPE (rhs
), value
),
10427 do_pending_stack_adjust ();
10428 emit_label (label
);
10432 expand_assignment (lhs
, rhs
, false);
10437 return expand_expr_addr_expr (exp
, target
, tmode
, modifier
);
10439 case REALPART_EXPR
:
10440 op0
= expand_normal (treeop0
);
10441 return read_complex_part (op0
, false);
10443 case IMAGPART_EXPR
:
10444 op0
= expand_normal (treeop0
);
10445 return read_complex_part (op0
, true);
10452 /* Expanded in cfgexpand.c. */
10453 gcc_unreachable ();
10455 case TRY_CATCH_EXPR
:
10457 case EH_FILTER_EXPR
:
10458 case TRY_FINALLY_EXPR
:
10459 /* Lowered by tree-eh.c. */
10460 gcc_unreachable ();
10462 case WITH_CLEANUP_EXPR
:
10463 case CLEANUP_POINT_EXPR
:
10465 case CASE_LABEL_EXPR
:
10470 case COMPOUND_EXPR
:
10471 case PREINCREMENT_EXPR
:
10472 case PREDECREMENT_EXPR
:
10473 case POSTINCREMENT_EXPR
:
10474 case POSTDECREMENT_EXPR
:
10477 case COMPOUND_LITERAL_EXPR
:
10478 /* Lowered by gimplify.c. */
10479 gcc_unreachable ();
10482 /* Function descriptors are not valid except for as
10483 initialization constants, and should not be expanded. */
10484 gcc_unreachable ();
10486 case WITH_SIZE_EXPR
:
10487 /* WITH_SIZE_EXPR expands to its first argument. The caller should
10488 have pulled out the size to use in whatever context it needed. */
10489 return expand_expr_real (treeop0
, original_target
, tmode
,
10490 modifier
, alt_rtl
);
10493 return expand_expr_real_2 (&ops
, target
, tmode
, modifier
);
10497 /* Subroutine of above: reduce EXP to the precision of TYPE (in the
10498 signedness of TYPE), possibly returning the result in TARGET. */
10500 reduce_to_bit_field_precision (rtx exp
, rtx target
, tree type
)
10502 HOST_WIDE_INT prec
= TYPE_PRECISION (type
);
10503 if (target
&& GET_MODE (target
) != GET_MODE (exp
))
10505 /* For constant values, reduce using build_int_cst_type. */
10506 if (CONST_INT_P (exp
))
10508 HOST_WIDE_INT value
= INTVAL (exp
);
10509 tree t
= build_int_cst_type (type
, value
);
10510 return expand_expr (t
, target
, VOIDmode
, EXPAND_NORMAL
);
10512 else if (TYPE_UNSIGNED (type
))
10514 rtx mask
= immed_double_int_const (double_int::mask (prec
),
10516 return expand_and (GET_MODE (exp
), exp
, mask
, target
);
10520 int count
= GET_MODE_PRECISION (GET_MODE (exp
)) - prec
;
10521 exp
= expand_shift (LSHIFT_EXPR
, GET_MODE (exp
),
10522 exp
, count
, target
, 0);
10523 return expand_shift (RSHIFT_EXPR
, GET_MODE (exp
),
10524 exp
, count
, target
, 0);
10528 /* Subroutine of above: returns 1 if OFFSET corresponds to an offset that
10529 when applied to the address of EXP produces an address known to be
10530 aligned more than BIGGEST_ALIGNMENT. */
10533 is_aligning_offset (const_tree offset
, const_tree exp
)
10535 /* Strip off any conversions. */
10536 while (CONVERT_EXPR_P (offset
))
10537 offset
= TREE_OPERAND (offset
, 0);
10539 /* We must now have a BIT_AND_EXPR with a constant that is one less than
10540 power of 2 and which is larger than BIGGEST_ALIGNMENT. */
10541 if (TREE_CODE (offset
) != BIT_AND_EXPR
10542 || !host_integerp (TREE_OPERAND (offset
, 1), 1)
10543 || compare_tree_int (TREE_OPERAND (offset
, 1),
10544 BIGGEST_ALIGNMENT
/ BITS_PER_UNIT
) <= 0
10545 || !exact_log2 (tree_low_cst (TREE_OPERAND (offset
, 1), 1) + 1) < 0)
10548 /* Look at the first operand of BIT_AND_EXPR and strip any conversion.
10549 It must be NEGATE_EXPR. Then strip any more conversions. */
10550 offset
= TREE_OPERAND (offset
, 0);
10551 while (CONVERT_EXPR_P (offset
))
10552 offset
= TREE_OPERAND (offset
, 0);
10554 if (TREE_CODE (offset
) != NEGATE_EXPR
)
10557 offset
= TREE_OPERAND (offset
, 0);
10558 while (CONVERT_EXPR_P (offset
))
10559 offset
= TREE_OPERAND (offset
, 0);
10561 /* This must now be the address of EXP. */
10562 return TREE_CODE (offset
) == ADDR_EXPR
&& TREE_OPERAND (offset
, 0) == exp
;
10565 /* Return the tree node if an ARG corresponds to a string constant or zero
10566 if it doesn't. If we return nonzero, set *PTR_OFFSET to the offset
10567 in bytes within the string that ARG is accessing. The type of the
10568 offset will be `sizetype'. */
10571 string_constant (tree arg
, tree
*ptr_offset
)
10573 tree array
, offset
, lower_bound
;
10576 if (TREE_CODE (arg
) == ADDR_EXPR
)
10578 if (TREE_CODE (TREE_OPERAND (arg
, 0)) == STRING_CST
)
10580 *ptr_offset
= size_zero_node
;
10581 return TREE_OPERAND (arg
, 0);
10583 else if (TREE_CODE (TREE_OPERAND (arg
, 0)) == VAR_DECL
)
10585 array
= TREE_OPERAND (arg
, 0);
10586 offset
= size_zero_node
;
10588 else if (TREE_CODE (TREE_OPERAND (arg
, 0)) == ARRAY_REF
)
10590 array
= TREE_OPERAND (TREE_OPERAND (arg
, 0), 0);
10591 offset
= TREE_OPERAND (TREE_OPERAND (arg
, 0), 1);
10592 if (TREE_CODE (array
) != STRING_CST
10593 && TREE_CODE (array
) != VAR_DECL
)
10596 /* Check if the array has a nonzero lower bound. */
10597 lower_bound
= array_ref_low_bound (TREE_OPERAND (arg
, 0));
10598 if (!integer_zerop (lower_bound
))
10600 /* If the offset and base aren't both constants, return 0. */
10601 if (TREE_CODE (lower_bound
) != INTEGER_CST
)
10603 if (TREE_CODE (offset
) != INTEGER_CST
)
10605 /* Adjust offset by the lower bound. */
10606 offset
= size_diffop (fold_convert (sizetype
, offset
),
10607 fold_convert (sizetype
, lower_bound
));
10610 else if (TREE_CODE (TREE_OPERAND (arg
, 0)) == MEM_REF
)
10612 array
= TREE_OPERAND (TREE_OPERAND (arg
, 0), 0);
10613 offset
= TREE_OPERAND (TREE_OPERAND (arg
, 0), 1);
10614 if (TREE_CODE (array
) != ADDR_EXPR
)
10616 array
= TREE_OPERAND (array
, 0);
10617 if (TREE_CODE (array
) != STRING_CST
10618 && TREE_CODE (array
) != VAR_DECL
)
10624 else if (TREE_CODE (arg
) == PLUS_EXPR
|| TREE_CODE (arg
) == POINTER_PLUS_EXPR
)
10626 tree arg0
= TREE_OPERAND (arg
, 0);
10627 tree arg1
= TREE_OPERAND (arg
, 1);
10632 if (TREE_CODE (arg0
) == ADDR_EXPR
10633 && (TREE_CODE (TREE_OPERAND (arg0
, 0)) == STRING_CST
10634 || TREE_CODE (TREE_OPERAND (arg0
, 0)) == VAR_DECL
))
10636 array
= TREE_OPERAND (arg0
, 0);
10639 else if (TREE_CODE (arg1
) == ADDR_EXPR
10640 && (TREE_CODE (TREE_OPERAND (arg1
, 0)) == STRING_CST
10641 || TREE_CODE (TREE_OPERAND (arg1
, 0)) == VAR_DECL
))
10643 array
= TREE_OPERAND (arg1
, 0);
10652 if (TREE_CODE (array
) == STRING_CST
)
10654 *ptr_offset
= fold_convert (sizetype
, offset
);
10657 else if (TREE_CODE (array
) == VAR_DECL
10658 || TREE_CODE (array
) == CONST_DECL
)
10661 tree init
= ctor_for_folding (array
);
10663 /* Variables initialized to string literals can be handled too. */
10664 if (init
== error_mark_node
10666 || TREE_CODE (init
) != STRING_CST
)
10669 /* Avoid const char foo[4] = "abcde"; */
10670 if (DECL_SIZE_UNIT (array
) == NULL_TREE
10671 || TREE_CODE (DECL_SIZE_UNIT (array
)) != INTEGER_CST
10672 || (length
= TREE_STRING_LENGTH (init
)) <= 0
10673 || compare_tree_int (DECL_SIZE_UNIT (array
), length
) < 0)
10676 /* If variable is bigger than the string literal, OFFSET must be constant
10677 and inside of the bounds of the string literal. */
10678 offset
= fold_convert (sizetype
, offset
);
10679 if (compare_tree_int (DECL_SIZE_UNIT (array
), length
) > 0
10680 && (! host_integerp (offset
, 1)
10681 || compare_tree_int (offset
, length
) >= 0))
10684 *ptr_offset
= offset
;
10691 /* Generate code to calculate OPS, and exploded expression
10692 using a store-flag instruction and return an rtx for the result.
10693 OPS reflects a comparison.
10695 If TARGET is nonzero, store the result there if convenient.
10697 Return zero if there is no suitable set-flag instruction
10698 available on this machine.
10700 Once expand_expr has been called on the arguments of the comparison,
10701 we are committed to doing the store flag, since it is not safe to
10702 re-evaluate the expression. We emit the store-flag insn by calling
10703 emit_store_flag, but only expand the arguments if we have a reason
10704 to believe that emit_store_flag will be successful. If we think that
10705 it will, but it isn't, we have to simulate the store-flag with a
10706 set/jump/set sequence. */
10709 do_store_flag (sepops ops
, rtx target
, enum machine_mode mode
)
10711 enum rtx_code code
;
10712 tree arg0
, arg1
, type
;
10714 enum machine_mode operand_mode
;
10717 rtx subtarget
= target
;
10718 location_t loc
= ops
->location
;
10723 /* Don't crash if the comparison was erroneous. */
10724 if (arg0
== error_mark_node
|| arg1
== error_mark_node
)
10727 type
= TREE_TYPE (arg0
);
10728 operand_mode
= TYPE_MODE (type
);
10729 unsignedp
= TYPE_UNSIGNED (type
);
10731 /* We won't bother with BLKmode store-flag operations because it would mean
10732 passing a lot of information to emit_store_flag. */
10733 if (operand_mode
== BLKmode
)
10736 /* We won't bother with store-flag operations involving function pointers
10737 when function pointers must be canonicalized before comparisons. */
10738 #ifdef HAVE_canonicalize_funcptr_for_compare
10739 if (HAVE_canonicalize_funcptr_for_compare
10740 && ((TREE_CODE (TREE_TYPE (arg0
)) == POINTER_TYPE
10741 && (TREE_CODE (TREE_TYPE (TREE_TYPE (arg0
)))
10743 || (TREE_CODE (TREE_TYPE (arg1
)) == POINTER_TYPE
10744 && (TREE_CODE (TREE_TYPE (TREE_TYPE (arg1
)))
10745 == FUNCTION_TYPE
))))
10752 /* For vector typed comparisons emit code to generate the desired
10753 all-ones or all-zeros mask. Conveniently use the VEC_COND_EXPR
10754 expander for this. */
10755 if (TREE_CODE (ops
->type
) == VECTOR_TYPE
)
10757 tree ifexp
= build2 (ops
->code
, ops
->type
, arg0
, arg1
);
10758 tree if_true
= constant_boolean_node (true, ops
->type
);
10759 tree if_false
= constant_boolean_node (false, ops
->type
);
10760 return expand_vec_cond_expr (ops
->type
, ifexp
, if_true
, if_false
, target
);
10763 /* Get the rtx comparison code to use. We know that EXP is a comparison
10764 operation of some type. Some comparisons against 1 and -1 can be
10765 converted to comparisons with zero. Do so here so that the tests
10766 below will be aware that we have a comparison with zero. These
10767 tests will not catch constants in the first operand, but constants
10768 are rarely passed as the first operand. */
10779 if (integer_onep (arg1
))
10780 arg1
= integer_zero_node
, code
= unsignedp
? LEU
: LE
;
10782 code
= unsignedp
? LTU
: LT
;
10785 if (! unsignedp
&& integer_all_onesp (arg1
))
10786 arg1
= integer_zero_node
, code
= LT
;
10788 code
= unsignedp
? LEU
: LE
;
10791 if (! unsignedp
&& integer_all_onesp (arg1
))
10792 arg1
= integer_zero_node
, code
= GE
;
10794 code
= unsignedp
? GTU
: GT
;
10797 if (integer_onep (arg1
))
10798 arg1
= integer_zero_node
, code
= unsignedp
? GTU
: GT
;
10800 code
= unsignedp
? GEU
: GE
;
10803 case UNORDERED_EXPR
:
10829 gcc_unreachable ();
10832 /* Put a constant second. */
10833 if (TREE_CODE (arg0
) == REAL_CST
|| TREE_CODE (arg0
) == INTEGER_CST
10834 || TREE_CODE (arg0
) == FIXED_CST
)
10836 tem
= arg0
; arg0
= arg1
; arg1
= tem
;
10837 code
= swap_condition (code
);
10840 /* If this is an equality or inequality test of a single bit, we can
10841 do this by shifting the bit being tested to the low-order bit and
10842 masking the result with the constant 1. If the condition was EQ,
10843 we xor it with 1. This does not require an scc insn and is faster
10844 than an scc insn even if we have it.
10846 The code to make this transformation was moved into fold_single_bit_test,
10847 so we just call into the folder and expand its result. */
10849 if ((code
== NE
|| code
== EQ
)
10850 && integer_zerop (arg1
)
10851 && (TYPE_PRECISION (ops
->type
) != 1 || TYPE_UNSIGNED (ops
->type
)))
10853 gimple srcstmt
= get_def_for_expr (arg0
, BIT_AND_EXPR
);
10855 && integer_pow2p (gimple_assign_rhs2 (srcstmt
)))
10857 enum tree_code tcode
= code
== NE
? NE_EXPR
: EQ_EXPR
;
10858 tree type
= lang_hooks
.types
.type_for_mode (mode
, unsignedp
);
10859 tree temp
= fold_build2_loc (loc
, BIT_AND_EXPR
, TREE_TYPE (arg1
),
10860 gimple_assign_rhs1 (srcstmt
),
10861 gimple_assign_rhs2 (srcstmt
));
10862 temp
= fold_single_bit_test (loc
, tcode
, temp
, arg1
, type
);
10864 return expand_expr (temp
, target
, VOIDmode
, EXPAND_NORMAL
);
10868 if (! get_subtarget (target
)
10869 || GET_MODE (subtarget
) != operand_mode
)
10872 expand_operands (arg0
, arg1
, subtarget
, &op0
, &op1
, EXPAND_NORMAL
);
10875 target
= gen_reg_rtx (mode
);
10877 /* Try a cstore if possible. */
10878 return emit_store_flag_force (target
, code
, op0
, op1
,
10879 operand_mode
, unsignedp
,
10880 (TYPE_PRECISION (ops
->type
) == 1
10881 && !TYPE_UNSIGNED (ops
->type
)) ? -1 : 1);
10885 /* Stubs in case we haven't got a casesi insn. */
10886 #ifndef HAVE_casesi
10887 # define HAVE_casesi 0
10888 # define gen_casesi(a, b, c, d, e) (0)
10889 # define CODE_FOR_casesi CODE_FOR_nothing
10892 /* Attempt to generate a casesi instruction. Returns 1 if successful,
10893 0 otherwise (i.e. if there is no casesi instruction).
10895 DEFAULT_PROBABILITY is the probability of jumping to the default
10898 try_casesi (tree index_type
, tree index_expr
, tree minval
, tree range
,
10899 rtx table_label
, rtx default_label
, rtx fallback_label
,
10900 int default_probability
)
10902 struct expand_operand ops
[5];
10903 enum machine_mode index_mode
= SImode
;
10904 rtx op1
, op2
, index
;
10909 /* Convert the index to SImode. */
10910 if (GET_MODE_BITSIZE (TYPE_MODE (index_type
)) > GET_MODE_BITSIZE (index_mode
))
10912 enum machine_mode omode
= TYPE_MODE (index_type
);
10913 rtx rangertx
= expand_normal (range
);
10915 /* We must handle the endpoints in the original mode. */
10916 index_expr
= build2 (MINUS_EXPR
, index_type
,
10917 index_expr
, minval
);
10918 minval
= integer_zero_node
;
10919 index
= expand_normal (index_expr
);
10921 emit_cmp_and_jump_insns (rangertx
, index
, LTU
, NULL_RTX
,
10922 omode
, 1, default_label
,
10923 default_probability
);
10924 /* Now we can safely truncate. */
10925 index
= convert_to_mode (index_mode
, index
, 0);
10929 if (TYPE_MODE (index_type
) != index_mode
)
10931 index_type
= lang_hooks
.types
.type_for_mode (index_mode
, 0);
10932 index_expr
= fold_convert (index_type
, index_expr
);
10935 index
= expand_normal (index_expr
);
10938 do_pending_stack_adjust ();
10940 op1
= expand_normal (minval
);
10941 op2
= expand_normal (range
);
10943 create_input_operand (&ops
[0], index
, index_mode
);
10944 create_convert_operand_from_type (&ops
[1], op1
, TREE_TYPE (minval
));
10945 create_convert_operand_from_type (&ops
[2], op2
, TREE_TYPE (range
));
10946 create_fixed_operand (&ops
[3], table_label
);
10947 create_fixed_operand (&ops
[4], (default_label
10949 : fallback_label
));
10950 expand_jump_insn (CODE_FOR_casesi
, 5, ops
);
10954 /* Attempt to generate a tablejump instruction; same concept. */
10955 #ifndef HAVE_tablejump
10956 #define HAVE_tablejump 0
10957 #define gen_tablejump(x, y) (0)
10960 /* Subroutine of the next function.
10962 INDEX is the value being switched on, with the lowest value
10963 in the table already subtracted.
10964 MODE is its expected mode (needed if INDEX is constant).
10965 RANGE is the length of the jump table.
10966 TABLE_LABEL is a CODE_LABEL rtx for the table itself.
10968 DEFAULT_LABEL is a CODE_LABEL rtx to jump to if the
10969 index value is out of range.
10970 DEFAULT_PROBABILITY is the probability of jumping to
10971 the default label. */
10974 do_tablejump (rtx index
, enum machine_mode mode
, rtx range
, rtx table_label
,
10975 rtx default_label
, int default_probability
)
10979 if (INTVAL (range
) > cfun
->cfg
->max_jumptable_ents
)
10980 cfun
->cfg
->max_jumptable_ents
= INTVAL (range
);
10982 /* Do an unsigned comparison (in the proper mode) between the index
10983 expression and the value which represents the length of the range.
10984 Since we just finished subtracting the lower bound of the range
10985 from the index expression, this comparison allows us to simultaneously
10986 check that the original index expression value is both greater than
10987 or equal to the minimum value of the range and less than or equal to
10988 the maximum value of the range. */
10991 emit_cmp_and_jump_insns (index
, range
, GTU
, NULL_RTX
, mode
, 1,
10992 default_label
, default_probability
);
10995 /* If index is in range, it must fit in Pmode.
10996 Convert to Pmode so we can index with it. */
10998 index
= convert_to_mode (Pmode
, index
, 1);
11000 /* Don't let a MEM slip through, because then INDEX that comes
11001 out of PIC_CASE_VECTOR_ADDRESS won't be a valid address,
11002 and break_out_memory_refs will go to work on it and mess it up. */
11003 #ifdef PIC_CASE_VECTOR_ADDRESS
11004 if (flag_pic
&& !REG_P (index
))
11005 index
= copy_to_mode_reg (Pmode
, index
);
11008 /* ??? The only correct use of CASE_VECTOR_MODE is the one inside the
11009 GET_MODE_SIZE, because this indicates how large insns are. The other
11010 uses should all be Pmode, because they are addresses. This code
11011 could fail if addresses and insns are not the same size. */
11012 index
= gen_rtx_PLUS
11014 gen_rtx_MULT (Pmode
, index
,
11015 gen_int_mode (GET_MODE_SIZE (CASE_VECTOR_MODE
), Pmode
)),
11016 gen_rtx_LABEL_REF (Pmode
, table_label
));
11017 #ifdef PIC_CASE_VECTOR_ADDRESS
11019 index
= PIC_CASE_VECTOR_ADDRESS (index
);
11022 index
= memory_address (CASE_VECTOR_MODE
, index
);
11023 temp
= gen_reg_rtx (CASE_VECTOR_MODE
);
11024 vector
= gen_const_mem (CASE_VECTOR_MODE
, index
);
11025 convert_move (temp
, vector
, 0);
11027 emit_jump_insn (gen_tablejump (temp
, table_label
));
11029 /* If we are generating PIC code or if the table is PC-relative, the
11030 table and JUMP_INSN must be adjacent, so don't output a BARRIER. */
11031 if (! CASE_VECTOR_PC_RELATIVE
&& ! flag_pic
)
11036 try_tablejump (tree index_type
, tree index_expr
, tree minval
, tree range
,
11037 rtx table_label
, rtx default_label
, int default_probability
)
11041 if (! HAVE_tablejump
)
11044 index_expr
= fold_build2 (MINUS_EXPR
, index_type
,
11045 fold_convert (index_type
, index_expr
),
11046 fold_convert (index_type
, minval
));
11047 index
= expand_normal (index_expr
);
11048 do_pending_stack_adjust ();
11050 do_tablejump (index
, TYPE_MODE (index_type
),
11051 convert_modes (TYPE_MODE (index_type
),
11052 TYPE_MODE (TREE_TYPE (range
)),
11053 expand_normal (range
),
11054 TYPE_UNSIGNED (TREE_TYPE (range
))),
11055 table_label
, default_label
, default_probability
);
11059 /* Return a CONST_VECTOR rtx for a VECTOR_CST tree. */
11061 const_vector_from_tree (tree exp
)
11067 enum machine_mode inner
, mode
;
11069 mode
= TYPE_MODE (TREE_TYPE (exp
));
11071 if (initializer_zerop (exp
))
11072 return CONST0_RTX (mode
);
11074 units
= GET_MODE_NUNITS (mode
);
11075 inner
= GET_MODE_INNER (mode
);
11077 v
= rtvec_alloc (units
);
11079 for (i
= 0; i
< VECTOR_CST_NELTS (exp
); ++i
)
11081 elt
= VECTOR_CST_ELT (exp
, i
);
11083 if (TREE_CODE (elt
) == REAL_CST
)
11084 RTVEC_ELT (v
, i
) = CONST_DOUBLE_FROM_REAL_VALUE (TREE_REAL_CST (elt
),
11086 else if (TREE_CODE (elt
) == FIXED_CST
)
11087 RTVEC_ELT (v
, i
) = CONST_FIXED_FROM_FIXED_VALUE (TREE_FIXED_CST (elt
),
11090 RTVEC_ELT (v
, i
) = immed_double_int_const (tree_to_double_int (elt
),
11094 return gen_rtx_CONST_VECTOR (mode
, v
);
11097 /* Build a decl for a personality function given a language prefix. */
11100 build_personality_function (const char *lang
)
11102 const char *unwind_and_version
;
11106 switch (targetm_common
.except_unwind_info (&global_options
))
11111 unwind_and_version
= "_sj0";
11115 unwind_and_version
= "_v0";
11118 unwind_and_version
= "_seh0";
11121 gcc_unreachable ();
11124 name
= ACONCAT (("__", lang
, "_personality", unwind_and_version
, NULL
));
11126 type
= build_function_type_list (integer_type_node
, integer_type_node
,
11127 long_long_unsigned_type_node
,
11128 ptr_type_node
, ptr_type_node
, NULL_TREE
);
11129 decl
= build_decl (UNKNOWN_LOCATION
, FUNCTION_DECL
,
11130 get_identifier (name
), type
);
11131 DECL_ARTIFICIAL (decl
) = 1;
11132 DECL_EXTERNAL (decl
) = 1;
11133 TREE_PUBLIC (decl
) = 1;
11135 /* Zap the nonsensical SYMBOL_REF_DECL for this. What we're left with
11136 are the flags assigned by targetm.encode_section_info. */
11137 SET_SYMBOL_REF_DECL (XEXP (DECL_RTL (decl
), 0), NULL
);
11142 /* Extracts the personality function of DECL and returns the corresponding
11146 get_personality_function (tree decl
)
11148 tree personality
= DECL_FUNCTION_PERSONALITY (decl
);
11149 enum eh_personality_kind pk
;
11151 pk
= function_needs_eh_personality (DECL_STRUCT_FUNCTION (decl
));
11152 if (pk
== eh_personality_none
)
11156 && pk
== eh_personality_any
)
11157 personality
= lang_hooks
.eh_personality ();
11159 if (pk
== eh_personality_lang
)
11160 gcc_assert (personality
!= NULL_TREE
);
11162 return XEXP (DECL_RTL (personality
), 0);
11165 #include "gt-expr.h"